WO2005046718A1 - Diagnosis and hyperinsulinemia and type ii diabetes and protection against same based on genes differentially expressed in pancreas cells (12.1) - Google Patents

Diagnosis and hyperinsulinemia and type ii diabetes and protection against same based on genes differentially expressed in pancreas cells (12.1) Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005046718A1
WO2005046718A1 PCT/US2004/036760 US2004036760W WO2005046718A1 WO 2005046718 A1 WO2005046718 A1 WO 2005046718A1 US 2004036760 W US2004036760 W US 2004036760W WO 2005046718 A1 WO2005046718 A1 WO 2005046718A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
protein
human
mouse
gene
dna
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2004/036760
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
John J. Kopchick
Karen T. Coschigano
Keith S. Boyce
Andres Kriete
Original Assignee
Ohio University
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ohio University filed Critical Ohio University
Publication of WO2005046718A1 publication Critical patent/WO2005046718A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6876Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes
    • C12Q1/6883Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes for diseases caused by alterations of genetic material
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/118Prognosis of disease development
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/158Expression markers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/04Endocrine or metabolic disorders
    • G01N2800/042Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism, e.g. diabetes, glucose metabolism

Definitions

  • the human molecules could be used for protection against faster-than-normal biological aging, or to achieve slower-than-normal biological aging. It was eilso taught that the human molecules may also be used as markers of biological aging.
  • provisional application Ser. No. 60/474,606, filed June 2, 2003 (our docket Kopchick7-USA) our research group used a gene chip to study the,genetic changes in the liver of C57B1/6J mice that occur at frequent intervals of the aging process. Differential hybridization techniques were used to identify mouse genes that are differentially expressed in mice, depending upon their age.
  • mice The level of gene expression of approximately 10,000 mouse genes (from the Amersham Codelink UniSet Mouse I Bioarray, product code: 300013) in the liver of mice with average ages of 35, 49, 56, 77, 118, 133, 207, 403, 558 and 725 days was determined.
  • complementary RNA derived from mice of different ages was screened for hybridization with oligonucleotide probes each specific to a particular mouse gene, each gene in turn representative of a particular mouse gene cluster (Uhigene) .
  • 60/460,415 (our docket: K ⁇ pchick6- USA) , filed April 7, 2003, was similar, but complementary ⁇ RNA, derived from RNA of mouse liver, was screened against a mouse gene chip. See also 60/506,716, filed Sept. 30, 2003 (Kopchick ⁇ .1) .
  • Gene chip analyses have also been used to identify genes differentially expressed in normal vs. hyperinsulinemic, hyperinsulinemic vs. type II diabetic, or normal vs. type II diabetic mouse pancreas, see U.S. Provisional Appl. 60/517,376, filed Nov. 6, 2003 (Kopchickl2) and muscle, see U.S Provisional Appl. 60/547,512, filed Feb.
  • the invention relates to various nucleic acid molecules and proteins, and their use in (1) diagnosing hyperinsulinemia and type II diabetes, or conditions associated with their development, and (2) protecting mammals (including humans) against them.
  • the pancreas is an elongated, tapered organ located across the back of the abdomen, behind the stomach.
  • the right side of the organ (called the head) is the widest part of the organ and lies in the curve of the duodenum, the first division of the small intestine.
  • the tapered left side (called the body of the pancreas) extends slightly upward and ends near the spleen (called the tail) .
  • the pancreas is covered with a very thin connective tissue capsule which extends inward as septa, partitioning the gland into lobules.
  • the pancreas is composed of two major types of tissue.
  • pancreatic exocrine cells The bulk of the pancreas is composed of pancreatic exocrine cells and their associated ducts.
  • the pancreatic exocrine cells are arranged in grape-like clusters called acini.
  • the exocrine cells are packed with membrane-bound secretory granules which contain digestive enzymes that are exocytosed into the lumen of the acinus.
  • Exocrine secretions from acini flow successively through intercalated ducts, intralobular ducts, interlobular ducts and finally into the duodenum through the main pancreatic duct.
  • the enzymes secreted by the exocrine tissue in the pancreas help break down carbohydrates, fats, proteins, and acids in the duodenum.
  • the three major classes are proteases, pancreatic lipases and amylase. These enzymes travel down the pancreatic duct into the bile duct in an inactive form. When they enter the duodenum, they are activated.
  • the exocrine tissue also secretes a bicarbonate to neutralize stomach acid in the duodenum. Secretion from the exocrine pancreas is regulated predominantly by three enzymes secreted by the enteric endocrine system: cholecystokinin, secretin, and gastrin.
  • Islets of Langerhans are the endocrine cells of the pancreas.
  • the Islets of Langerhans are composed of four hormone- producing cell types: insulin-producing beta cells, glucagon-producing alpha cells, somatostatin-producing delta cells, and pancreatic polypeptide (PP) -producing cells.
  • Beta cells make up -70% of the cells in the islet and tend to be more centrally located.
  • Alpha cells make up most of the rest of the islet and are generally near the periphery of the.islet.
  • Delta cells tend to be in the periphery of the islet, as are the least abundant PP-producing cells .
  • Insulin has the following functions: 1) It increases the rate of glucose metabolism, and glucose that is not - needed immediately by the cells is changed into glycogen for storage (in the liver, skeletal muscles, and skin) , and fat (especially for storage in the adipose tissue and liver) ; 2) It decreases the glucose level in the blood .and increases glucose transport to skeletal, heart, smooth muscle, and fat cells. It does not affect glucose transport to the brain or red blood cells; 3) It increases transport of amino acids into the cells and causes an increase in protein synthesis; 4) It works along with growth hormone to promote growth. With a lack of insulin, the liver will start breaking down glycogen and forming new glucose (gluconeogenesis) . Fats will also be released into the blood in the form of free fatty acids. Amino acids will be released into the blood and very little protein synthesis will take place.
  • Glucagon' s main function is to break down glycogen into glucose and to simulate gluconeogenesis, thus increasing the blood glucose level.
  • blood glucose levels drop below 70 mg per 100 ml of blood, glucagon is secreted in large quantities to prevent hypoglycemia and make sure the brain is getting enough glucose (its major nutrient) . If left uncontrolled, glucagon could deplete the liver of glycogen within four hours .
  • Epinephrine and cortisol released by the adrenals also raise blood sugar, as does growth hormone released from the anterior pituitary.
  • a deficiency of insulin in the body results in diabetes mellitus, which affects about 13 million individuals in the United States. It is characterized by a high blood glucose (sugar) level and glucose spilling into the urine due to a deficiency of insulin. As more glucose concentrates in the urine, more water is excreted, resulting in extreme thirst, rapid weight loss, drowsiness, fatigue, a.nd possibly dehydration. Because the cells of the diabetic cannot use glucose for fuel, the body uses stored protein and fat for energy, which leads to a buildup of acid (acidosis) in the blood.
  • acidosis acid
  • Type II diabetes is the predominant form found in the Western world; fewer than 8% of diabetic Americans have the type I disease.
  • Type I diabetes In Type I diabetes, formerly called juvenile-onset or insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, the pancreas cannot produce insulin. People with Type I diabetes must have daily insulin injections. But they need to avoid taking too much insulin because that can lead to insulin shock, which begins with a mild hunger. This is quickly followed by sweating, shallow breathing, dizziness, palpitations, trembling, and mental confusion. As the blood sugar falls, the body tries to compensate by breaking down fat and protein to make more sugar. Eventually, low blood sugar leads to a decrease in the sugar supply to the brain, resulting in a loss of consciousness. Eating a sugary food can prevent insulin shock until appropriate medical measures can be taken.
  • Type I diabetics are often characterized by their low or absent levels of circulating endogenous insulin, i.e., hypoinsulinemia (1) .
  • Islet, cell antibodies causing damage to the pancreas are frequently present at diagnosis. Injection of exogenous insulin is required to prevent ketosis and sustain life.
  • Type' II diabetes Type -II diabetes, formerly called adult-onset or non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM) , can occur at any age. The pancreas can produce insulin, but the cells -do not respond to it. Type II diabetes is a metabolic disorder that affects approximately 17 million Americans. It is estimated that another 10 million individuals are "prone" to becoming diabetic, These vulnerable individuals can become resistant to insulin, a pancreatic hormone that signals glucose (blood sugar) uptake by fat and muscle . In order to maintain normal glucose levels, the islet cells of the pancreas produce more insulin, resulting in a condition called hyperinsulinemia.
  • NIDDM non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus
  • type II diabetes is diagnosed.
  • Early Type II diabetics are often characterized by hyperinsulinemia and resistance to insulin. Late Type II diabetics may be normoinsulinemic or hypoinsulinemic. Type II diabetics are usually not insulin dependent or prone to ketosis under normal circumstances. Little is known about the disease progression from the normoinsulinemic state to the hyperinsulinemic state, and from the hyperinsulinemic state to the Type II diabetic state.
  • type II diabetes is a metabolic disorder that is characterized by insulin resistance and impaired glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (2,3,4).
  • Type II diabetes and atherosclerotic disease are viewed as consequences of having the insulin resistance syndrome (IRS) for many years (5) .
  • the current theory of the pathogenesis of Type II diabetes is often referred to. as the "insulin resistance/islet cell exhaustion" theory.
  • a condition causing insulin resistance compels the pancreatic islet cells to hypersecrete insulin in order to maintain glucose homeostasis.
  • the islet cells eventually fail and the symptoms of clinical diabetes are manifested. Therefore, this theory implies that, at some point, peripheral hyperinsulinemia will be an antecedent of Type II diabetes.
  • Peripheral hyperinsulinemia can be viewed as the difference- between what is produced by the ⁇ cell minus that which is taken up by the liver. Therefore, peripheral hyperinsulinemia can be caused by increased ⁇ cell production, decreased hepatic uptake or some combination --of both. It is also important to note that it is not possible to determine the origin of insulin resistance once it is established since the onset of peripheral hyperinsulinemia leads to a condition of global insulin resistance. Multiple environmental and genetic factors are involved in the development of insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia and type II diabetes. An important risk factor for the development of insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia and type II diabetes is obesity, particularly visceral obesity (6,7,8). Type II diabetes exists world-wide, but in developed societies, the prevalence has risen as the average age of the population increases and the average individual becomes more obese .
  • Obesi ty and Diabetes Obesity is a serious arid growing problem in the United States. Obesity-related health risks include high blood pressure, hardening of the arteries, cardiovascular disease, and Type II diabetes (also known as non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, Type II diabetes) (9, 10,11) . Recent studies show that 85% of the individuals with Type II diabetes are obese (12) . Treatment of Diabetes . For many years, treatment was insulin therapy for Type I and oral sulfonylureas and/or insulin therapy for Type II. Metformin (glucophage) was the first antidiabetic drug • approved by FDA (May 1995) for the treatment of Type II diabetes since the oral sulfonylureas were introduced in 1984.
  • Metformin promotes the use of insulin already in the blood. This May 1995 approval was followed by the September 1995 approval of another antidiabetic drug, Acarbose (precose) . It slows down the digestion and absorption of complex sugars, which reduces blood sugar levels after meals.
  • Acarbose precose
  • humulin a synthetic insulin called humulin. Approved by FDA in 1982, it was the first genetically engineered consumer health product manufactured for diabetics. Synthetic insulins can be produced in unlimited quantities.
  • Another possible treatment for diabetes includes surgically replacing the pancreas' endocrine tissues (islets of Langerhans) with healthy islet of Langerhans tissue grafts. Since 1988, 45 patients worldwide have undergone successful transplantation.
  • Complications Complications of diabetes (end organ damage) include retinopathy, neuropathy, and nephropathy (traditionally designated as microvascular complications) as well as atherosclerosis (a macrovascular complication) .
  • retinopathy traditionally designated as microvascular complications
  • atherosclerosis a macrovascular complication
  • retinopathy traditionally designated as microvascular complications
  • atherosclerosis a macrovascular complication
  • Cystic Fibrosis The major problem of cystic fibrosis, the number ' one genetic killer disease of children in the United States, is that the body overproduces thick, sticky mucus.
  • pancreatic ducts which impedes the flow of the pancreatic juices from the pancreas into the duodenum of the small intestines.
  • Food cannot be properly digested. Without treatment, children with cystic fibrosis suffer from malnutrition and constant diarrhea; their average life expectancy is 21.
  • Pancreatic enzyme preparations are usually used to minimize the disease's effects on the pancreas.
  • Pancreatic juices contain enzymes for digesting all three major food types (proteins, carbohydrates and fats) , as well as quantities of bicarbonate ions, which pla an important role in neutralizing the acid emptied by the stomach into the duodenum.
  • pancreatic lipase which is capable of changing fat into glycerol fatty acids and cholesterol.
  • Hormones regulate pancreatic secretions. Food enters the small intestine. The hormones secretin and cholecystokinin cause the pancreas to create large quantities ' of fluid containing bicarbonate ions, which neutralizes the acid stomach contents.
  • pancreatitis Another common disease associated with the exocrine function of the pancreas is pancreatitis (inflammation of the pancreas), which can be either acute or chronic.
  • pancreatitis inflammation of the pancreas
  • the most common cause of acute pancreatitis is blockage by a gallstone of the main secretory duct from the pancreas as well as the common bile duct.
  • pancreas can digest the entire pancreas within a few hours .
  • the pancreas can continue secreting insulin.
  • Acute pancreatitis is a condition demanding immediate medical attention.
  • pancreatitis When appropriately treated, the effects of acute pancreatitis usually calm down within five to seven days. Treatment includes stopping oral consumption and providing nourishment only with intravenous fluids. Chronic pancreatitis occurs when acute pancreatitis continues until pancreatic function is greatly diminished. Symptoms include persistent pain in the upper abdomen which can radiate to the back and last for days or weeks, with mild jaundice (yellow skin and eyes) and rapid weight loss. A person can have recurrent attacks over several years. This may result in secondary bacterial infections of the pancreas, calcium deficiencies, and Type II diabetes.
  • Pancreatic Cancer is the fourth leading cause of cancer deaths in the United States, affecting about 27,000 persons yearly. It is second only to colon cancer as a cause of death from gastrointestinal malignancy. It affects men • twice as frequently as women and is more likely to develop after the age of 40. Pancreatic cancer risks increase with chronic pancreatitis, diabetes mellitus, genetic factors (more common in blacks than whites) , smoking,- ⁇ excess alcohol consumption, high-fat diets, and exposure to industrial chemicals such as urea, naphthalene or benzidine. Symptoms include weight loss, abdominal pain, nausea, loss of appetite, itching, jaundice, and constipation.
  • Abdominal stress may improve or worsen after eating, and the pain may increase after lying down. Because its symptoms mimic many other common health problems, it often goes undetected until it is too late to treat effectively. When early diagnosis and early treatment are possible, however, survival chances increase. Imaging with endoscopic ultrasound may aid early diagnosis. researchers are also rapidly building a library of potential genetic markers that indicate the onset of pancreatic cancer. Treatment includes chemotherapeutic drugs and traditional surgical techniques.
  • mice Animal Models Transgenic Mouse Models of Diabetes or Diabetes Resistance . McGrane, et al . , J. Biol. Chem. 263:11443-51 (1988) and Chen, et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 269:15892-7 (1994) describe the genetic engineering of mice to express bovine growth hormone (bGH) or human growth hormone (hGH) , respectively. These mice exhibited an enhanced growth phenotype. They also developed kidney lesions similar to those seen in diabetic glomerulosclerosis, see Yang, et al . , Lab. Invest., 68:62-70 (19-93). Ogueta, et al . , J.
  • bGH bovine growth hormone
  • hGH human growth hormone
  • Endocrinol., 165: 321-8 (2000) reported that transgenic mice expressing bovine GH develop arthritic disorder and self- antibodies.
  • Growth hormone has many roles, ranging from regulation of protein, fat and carbohydrate metabolism to growth promotion.
  • GH is produced in the somatrophic cells of the anterior pituitary and exerts its effects either through the GH-induced action of IGF-I, in the case of growth promotion, or by direct interaction with the GHR on target cells including liver, muscle, adipose, and kidney cells.
  • Hyposecretion of GH during development leads to dwarfism, and hypersecretion before puberty leads to gigantism.
  • mice have been made that express the GH antagonists bGH-G119R or hGH G120R, and which exhibit a dwarf phenotype. Chen, et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 263:15892-7 (1994); Chen, et al . , Mol. Endocrinol, 5:1845-52 (1991); Chen, et al . , Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 87:5061-5 (1990) . These mice did not develop kidney lesions. See Yang (1993), supra . Chen, et al .
  • mice Two of the proteins which mediate growth hormone activity are the growth hormone receptor and the growth hormone binding protein, encoded by the same gene in mice(GHR/BP) . It is possible to genetically engineer mice so that the gene encoding these proteins is disrupted ("knocked-out” ; inactivated), see Zhou, et al . , Proc. Nat. Acad.- Sci. (USA), 94:13215-20 (1997). Zhou, et al. inactivated the GHR/BP gene by replacing the 3 ' portion of exon 4 (which encodes a portion of the GH binding domains) and the 5 ' region of intron 4 with a neomycin gene cassette .
  • the modified gene was introduced into the target mice by homologous recombination. Like mice expressing a GH antagonist, homozygous GHR/BP-KO mice exhibit a dwarf phenotype. GHR/BP-KO mice, made diabetic by streptozotocin treatment, are protected from the development of diabetes- associated nephropathy. Bellush, et al . , Endocrinol., 141:163-8 (2000) . High-Fat Diets . High-fat diets have been shown to induce both obesity and Type II diabetes in laboratory animals (13) . Surwit and colleagues demonstrated that male C57BL/6J mice are extremely sensitive to the diabetogenic effects of a high-fat diet when initiated at weaning.
  • DNA microarray analysis has been performed on normal, obese and diabetic mice (21) . Also, the obesity and diabetes in the mouse models examined were caused by a specific endogenous genetic mutation (22) . The differentially expressed genes in the above models may be very different from genes differentially expressed due to diet-induced obesity and Type-II diabetes.
  • Apoptosis and CIDE-A Apoptosis is a form of programmed cell death that occurs in an active and controlled manner to eliminate unwanted cells.
  • Apoptotic cells undergo an orchestrated cascade of morphological changes such as membrane blebbing, nuclear shrinkage, chromatin condensation, and formation of apoptotic bodies which then undergo phagocytosis by neighboring cells.
  • One of the hallmarks of cellular apoptosis is the cleavage of chromosomal DNA into discrete oligonucleosomal size fragments. This orderly removal of unwanted cells minimizes the release of cellular components that may affect neighboring tissue. In contrast, membrane rupture and release of cellular components during necrosis often leads to tissue inflammation.
  • Caspases are a family of serine proteases that are synthesized as inactive proenzymes. Their activation by apoptotic signals such as CD95 (Fas) death receptor activation or tumor necrosis factor results in the cleavage of specific target proteins and execution of the apoptotic program. Apoptosis may occur by either an extrinsic pathway involving the activation of cell surface death receptors (DR) or by an intrinsic mitochondrial pathway. Yoon, J-H. Gores G.J. (2002) Death receptor-mediated apoptosis and the liver. J. Hepatology 37:400-410. These pathways are not mutually exclusive and some cell types require the activation of both pathways for maximal apoptotic signaling.
  • DR cell surface death receptors
  • Hepatocytes are members of the Type-II cells in which mitochondria are essential for DR-mediated apoptosis Scaffidi, C, Fulda, S., Srinivasan, A.-., Friesen, C, Li, F., Tomaselli, K.J., Debatin, K.M. , -Krammer, P.H., Peter, M.E. (1998) Two CD95 (APO-l/Fas) signaling pathways. EMBO J. 17:1675-1687.
  • the pro-apoptotic protein Bid is truncated by activated caspases-8/10 and translocates to the mitochondria.
  • DFF DNA fragmentation factor
  • DFF45 cleavage by activated caspase-3 results in its dissociation from DFF40 and allows the caspase-activated DNAse (CAD) activity of DFF40 to cleave chromosomal DNA into oligonucleosomal size fragments.
  • CAD caspase-activated DNAse
  • CIDEs cell-death-inducing DFF45-like effectors
  • CIDE a novel family of cell death activators with homology to the 45 kDa subunit of the DNA fragmentation factor.
  • C/EBP-like proteins interact with sequences required for differentiation-dependent expression. J. Biol. Chem. 267:7185-7193; Liang, L. , Zhao, M. , Xu, Z., Yokoyama, K.K., Li, T. (2003) Molecular cloning and characterization of CIDE-3, a novel member of the cell-death-inducing DNA- fragmentation-factor (DFF45) -like effector family. Biochem. J. 370:195-203.
  • the CIDEs contain an N-terminal domain that shares homology with the N-terminal region of DFF45 and may represent a regulatory region via protein interaction. See Inohara, supra; Lugovskoy, A. . , Zhou, P., Chou, J.J., McCarty, J.S., Li, P., Wagner, G. (1999) Solution structure of the CIDE-N domain of CIDE-B and a model for CIDE-N/CIDE-N interactions in the DNA fragmentation pathway of apoptosis. Cell 9:747- 755. The family members also share a C-terminal domain that is necessary and sufficient for inducing cell death and DNA fragmentation; see Inohara supra.
  • CIDE-A brown adipose tissue
  • BAT brown adipose tissue
  • CIDE- A can interact and inhibit UCP1 in BAT and may therefore play a role in regulating energy balance, see Zhou supra. Previous reports have indicated that CIDE-A is not expressed in either adult human or mouse liver tissue, see ⁇ Inohara supra, Zhou supra.
  • CIDE-A The human protein cell death activator CIDE-A is of particular interest because of its highly dramatic -change in liver expression with age, first demonstrated in our Kopchick7 application, supra. CIDE-A expression is elevated in older normal mice. CIDE-A expression was studied,.for normal C57BI/6J. mouse ages 35, 49, 77, 133, 207, 403 • ⁇ and 558 days. Expression is low at the first five data points, then rises sharply at 403 days, and again at 558 days. CIDE-A was therefore classified as an "unfavorable protein", i.e., it was taught that an antagonist to CIDE-A could retard biological aging.
  • RNA derived from normal mice, or mouse models of hyperinsulinemia or type II diabetes was screened for hybridization with oligonucleotide probes each specific to a particular mouse database DNA, the latter being identified, by database accession number, by the gene manufacturer.
  • Each database DNA was also identified by the gene chip manufacturer as representative of a particular mouse gene cluster (Unigene) .
  • this database DNA sequence is a full length genomic DNA or cDNA sequence, and is therefore either identical to, or otherwise encodes the same protein as does, a natural full-length genomic DNA protein coding sequence. Those which don't present at least a partial sequence of a natural gene or its cDNA equivalent.
  • mouse genes all of these mouse database DNA sequences, whether full-length or partial, and whether cDNA or genomic DNA, are referred to herein as "mouse genes".
  • genomic DNA or "gDNA” .
  • the sequences in the protein databases are determined either by directly sequencing the protein or, more commonly, by sequencing a DNA, and then determining the translated amino acid sequence in accordance with the Genetic Code. All of the mouse sequences in the mouse polypeptide database are referred to herein as “mouse proteins” regardless of whether they are in fact full length sequences.
  • Mouse genes which were differentially expressed normal vs. hyperinsulinemic, ⁇ hyperinsulinemic vs. diabetic, or normal vs.
  • diabetic as measured by different levels of hybridization of the respective cRNA samples with the particular probe corresponding to that mouse gene) were identi ied. Since the progression is from normal to hyperinsulinemic, and thence from hyperinsulinemic to type II diabetic, one may define mammalian subjects as being more favored or less favored, with normal subjects being more favored than hyperinsulinemic subjects, and hyperinsulinemic subjects being more favored than type II diabetic subjects. The subjects' state may then be correlated with their gene expression activity.
  • the terms "normal” and "control” are used interchangeably in this specification, unless expressly stated otherwise.
  • the control or normal subject is a mouse which is normal vis-a-vis fasting insulin and fasting glucose levels.
  • normal means normal relative to those parameters, and does not necessitate that the mouse be normal in every respect .
  • a mouse gene is said to have exhibited a favorable behavior if, for a particular mouse age of observation, its average level of. expression in mice- which are in a more favored state is higher than that in mice which are in a less favored state.
  • a mouse gene is said to have exhibited an unfavorable behavior if, for a particular mouse age of observation, its average level of expression in mice which are in a more favored state is lower than that in mice which are in a less favored state.
  • mice gene For a given comparison of subjects, e.g., normal vs. hyperinsulinemic, we classify the mouse gene as favorable or unfavorable on the basis of the direction of the largest expression ' change, and it is the magnitude of this largest expression change, expressed as a ratio of greater to lesser, which is set forth in the Master Table 1 data for that mouse gene. Thus, if at 2 weeks, there was a 3-fold favorable behavior, and at 8 weeks, there was a 4-fold unfavorable behavior, and at all other time points, the behavior was weaker than 3-fold, the mouse gene would be classified as an unfavorable gene with respect to the subject comparison in question.
  • mice gene were observed at an age other than one of the ages noted in the Examples, we would have observed a still stronger differential expression behavior. Nonetheless, we must classify the mouse genes on the basis of the behavior which we actually observed, not the behavior which might have been observed at some other age.
  • mice genes which exhibit strongly favorable or unfavorable differential expression behaviors A behavior is considered strong if the ratio of the higher level to the lower level is at least two-fold. However, a mouse gene may still be identified as favorable or unfavorable even if none of its observed behaviors are substantial as defined above. In general, we consider the consistency of its behaviors (that is, are all or most of the differential expression behaviors at different- ages in the same direction,, e.g.
  • mice gene is more likely to be identified as favorable on the basis of a weakly favorable behavior if it is related to other mouse genes which exhibited favorable, especially strongly favorable, behavior. If we considered a mouse gene with only weak differential expression behavior to be worthy of consideration on the basis of these criteria, then we listed it in Master Table 1 in the appropriate subtable. Preferably, the differential behavior observed is both I strong and consistent . Preferably, if related mouse genes were tested, they exhibit the same direction of differential expression behavior.
  • mixed genes/proteins are those exhibiting a combination of favorable and unfavorable behavior.
  • a mixed gene/protein can be used as would a favorable gene/protein if its favorable behavior outweighs the unfavorable. It can be used as would an unfavorable gene/protein if its unfavorable behavior outweighs the favorable. Preferably, they are used in conjunction with other agents that affect their balance of favorable and unfavorable behavior.
  • Use of mixed genes/proteins is, in general, less desirable than use of purely favorable or purely unfavorable genes/proteins, but . it is not excluded. . .
  • a mouse gene is classified on the basis of the strongest C-HI behavior among the ages tested, the strongest HI-D behavior among the ages tested, and the strongest. C-D behavior among the ages tested. If at least one of these three behaviors is significantly favorable, and none of the others of these three behaviors is significantly unfavorable, the mouse gene will be classified as wholly favorable and listed in subtable 1A of Master Table 1. However, that does not mean that it may not have exhibited a weaker but unfavorable expression behavior at some tested age.
  • the "favorable” , “unfavorable” and “mixed” mouse proteins of the present invention include the mouse database proteins listed in the Master Table in the same row as a particular "favorable”, “unfavorable” or “mixed” mouse gene, respectively. These proteins may be the exact translation product of the identified mouse gene (database DNA) . However, if they were sequenced directly, they could be shorter or longer than that translation product. They could also differ in sequence from the exact translation product as a result of post-translational modifications.
  • mouse proteins of interest also include mouse proteins which, while not listed in the table, correspond to (i.e., homologous to, i.e., which could be aligned in a statistically significant manner to) such mouse proteins or genes, and mouse proteins which are at least substantially identical or conservatively identical to the listed mouse proteins.
  • human genes databases DNAs
  • proteins were identified by searching a database comprising human DNAs or proteins for sequences corresponding to (i.e., homologous to, i.e., which could be aligned in a statistically significant manner to) the mouse gene or protein. More than one human protein may be identified as corresponding to a particular mouse chip probe and to a particular mouse ⁇ gene. Note that the terms "human genes” and “human proteins” are used in a manner analogous to that already discussed in the case of "mouse genes” and “mouse proteins”.
  • corresponding does not mean identical, but rather implies the existence of a statistically significant sequence similarity, such as one sufficient to qualify the human protein or gene as a homologus protein or DNA as defined below.
  • the greater the degree of relationship as thus defined i.e., by the statistical significance of each alignment used to connect the mouse cDNA to the human protein or gene, measured by an E value), the more close the correspondence.
  • the connection may be direct (mouse gene to human protein) or indirect (e.g., mouse gene to human gene, human gene to human protein) .By "mouse gene”, we mean the mouse gene from which the gene chip DNA in question was derived.
  • the human genes/proteins which most closely correspond, directly or indirectly, to the mouse genes are preferred, such as the one(s) with the highest, top two highest, top three highest, top four highest, top five highest, and top ten highest E values for the final alignment in the connection process.
  • the human genes/proteins deemed to correspond to our mouse genes are identified in the Master Tables. Note that it is possible to identify homologous full- length human genes and proteins, if they are present in the database, even if the query mouse DNA or protein sequence is not a full-length sequence. If there is no homologous full-length human gene or protein in the database, but there is a partial one, the latter may nonetheless be useful.
  • a partial protein may still have ' biological activity, and a molecule which binds the partial protein may also bind the full- length protein so as to antagonize a biological activity of the full-length protein.
  • a partial human gene may encode a partial protein which has biological activity, or the gene may be useful in the design of a hybridization probe or in the design of a therapeutic antisense DNA.
  • the partial genes and protein sequences may of course also be used in the design of probes intended to identify the full length gene or protein sequence.
  • a human protein For the sake of convenience, we refer to a human protein as favorable if (1) it is listed in Master Table 1 as corresponding to a favorable mouse gene, or (2) it is at least substantially identical or conservatively identical to a listed protein per (1) , or (3) it is a member of a human protein class listed in Master Table 2 (if provided) as corresponding to a favorable mouse gene.
  • a human protein We define a human protein as unfavorable in an analogous manner.
  • We may further identify a human protein as being wholly favorable see mouse genes of subtable 1A, wholly unfavorable (see mouse genes of subtable IB), or mixed, i.e., both partially favorable and partially unfavorable (see mouse genes of subtable IC) .
  • a human gene which encodes a particular human protein may be classified in the same way as the human protein which it encodes.
  • this classification is not based on the direct study of the expression of the human gene/protein, of course, the human genes/proteins of ultimate interest will be the ones whose change in level of expression is, in fact, correlated, directly or inversely, with the change of state (normal, hyperinsulinemic, diabetic) of the subject.
  • agents useful in screening humans at risk for progression toward hyperinsulinemia or toward type II ⁇ diabetes or protecting humans at risk thereof from progression from a normoinsulinemic state to a hyperinsulinemic state, or from either to a type II diabetic state.
  • Agents which bind the "favorable" and "unfavorable" nucleic acids e.g., the agent is a substantially complementary nucleic acid hybridization probe
  • the corresponding proteins e.g., an antibody vs. the protein
  • a subject with one or more el-evated "unfavorable” and/or one or more depressed “favorable” genes/proteins is at increased risk, and one with one or more elevated “favorable” and/or one or more depressed “unfavorable” genes/proteins is at decreased risk.
  • the assay may be used as a preliminary screening assay to select subjects for further analysis, or as a formal diagnostic assay.
  • the identification of the related genes and proteins may also be useful in protecting humans against these disorders .
  • DNAs of interest include those which specifically hybridize to the aforementioned mouse or human genes, and are thus of interest as hybridization assay reagents or for antisense therapy. They also include synthetic DNA sequences which encode the same polypeptide as is encoded by the database DNA, and thus are useful for producing the polypeptide in cell culture or in situ (i.e., gene therapy) . Moreover, they include DNA sequences which encode polypeptides which are substantially structurally identical or conservatively identical in amino acid sequence to the mouse and human proteins identified in the Master Table 1, subtables 1A or IC. Finally, they include DNA sequences which encode peptide (including antibody) antagonists of the proteins of Master Table 1, subtables IB or IC.
  • the related human DNAs may be identified by comparing the mouse sequence (or its AA translation product) to known human DNAs (and their AA translation products) .
  • mouse DNAs also may be identified by- screening human cDNA or genomic DNA .libraries using the mouse gene of the Master Table, or a fragment thereof, as a probe. If the mouse gene of Master Table 1 is not full-length, and there is no closely corresponding full-length mouse gene in the sequence databank, then the mouse DNA may first be used as a hybridization probe to screen a mouse cDNA library to isolate the corresponding full-length sequence. Alternatively, the mouse DNA may be used as a probe to screen a mouse genomic DNA library.
  • our animal models of hyperinsulinemia and diabetes are also obese. It is possible that the genes found to be favorable act indirectly by inhibiting obesity. Likewise, it is possible that the genes found to be unfavorable act indirectly by accentuating obesity. Consequently, it is within the compass of the present invention to use the favorable genes and proteins, or to use antagonists of the unfavorable genes and proteins, to protect against obesity, as well as against sequelae of obesity such as hyperinsulinemia and diabetes. Since type II diabetes is an age-related disease, the agents of the present invention may be used in conunction with known anti-aging or anti-age-related disease agents. It is of particular interest to use the agents of the present invention in conjunction with an agent disclosed in one of the related applications cited above, in particular, an antagonist to CIDE-A, the latter having been taught in Kopchick7 and Kopchick7A-PCT.
  • FIG. 1 Body weight gain (1(a)), fasting glucose (1(b)) and fasting insulin (1 (c) ) levels of mice on the HF or Std diets. Results reflect mean ⁇ SE of 50 mice on the high fat (HF) diet and 20 mice on the standard (Std) diet.
  • FIG. 1 Pancreatic xpression levels of glutathione peroxidase 1 (Gpxl, NM_008160) using RNA isolated from pancreas of individual diabetic HF mice and corresponding Std mice at different time points.
  • FIG. 3 Pancreatic expression levels for additional glutathione peroxidase, S-transferase and synthetase genes exhibiting a consistent decrease in expression in the HF mice in comparison to Std mice at all four time points (top panel) or at three of the four time points (bottom panel) .
  • a "full length" gene is here defined as (1) a naturally occurring DNA sequence which begins with an initiation codon (almost always the Met codon, ATG) , and ends with a stop codon in phase with said initiation codon (when introns, if any, are ignored) , and thereby encodes a naturally occurring polypeptide with biological activity, or a naturally occurring precursor thereof, or (2) a synthetic DNA sequence which encodes the same polypeptide as that which is encoded by (1) .
  • the gene may, but need not, include introns.
  • a "full-length" protein is here defined as a naturally occurring protein encoded by a full-length gene, or a protein derived naturally by post-translational modification of such a protein. Thus, it includes mature proteins, proproteins, preproteins and preproproteins . It also includes substitution and extension mutants of such naturally occurring proteins.
  • a mouse is considered to be a diabetic subject if, regardless of its fasting plasma insulin level, it has a fasting plasma glucose level of at least 190 mg/dL.
  • a mouse is considered to be a hyperinsulinemic subject if its fasting plasma insulin level is at least 0.67 ng/mL and it does not qualify as a diabetic subject.
  • a mouse is considered to be "normal” if it is neither diabetic nor hyperinsulinemic. Thus, normality is defined in a very limited manner.
  • a mouse is considered “obese” if its weight is at least 15% in excess of the mean weight for mice of its age and sex.
  • a mouse which does not satisfy this standard may be characterized as "non-obese", the term "normal” being reserved for use in reference to glucose and insulin levels as previously described.
  • a human is considered a diabetic subject if, regardless of his or her fasting plasma insulin level, the fasting plasma glucose level is at least 126 mg/dL.
  • a human is considered a hyperinsulinemic subject if the fasting plasma insulin level is more than 26 micro International Units/mL (it is believed that this is equivalent to 1.08 ng/mL) , and does not qualify as a diabetic subject.
  • a human is considered to be "normal” if it is neither diabetic nor hyperinsulinemic. Thus, normality is defined in a very limited manner.
  • a human is considered “obese” if the body mass index (BMI) (weight divided by height-squared) is at least 30 kg/m 2 .
  • a human who does not satisfy this standard may be characterized as "non-obese", the term “normal” being reserved for use in reference to glucose and insulin levels as previously described-.
  • a human is considered overweight if the BMI is at least 25 jg/m 2 .
  • NIDDK National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases
  • a human who does not satisfy ⁇ this standard may be characterized as "non-overweight . "
  • the diagnostic and protective methods of the present invention are applied to human subjects exhibiting one or more of the aforementioned risk factors. Likewise, in a preferred embodiment, they are applied to human subjects who, while not- diabetic, exhibit impaired glucose homeostasis (110 to ⁇ 126 mg/dL) .
  • the age of the subjects is at least 45, at least 50, at least 55, at least 60, at least 65, at least 70, and at least 75.
  • NIDDK says that "The relative risk of diabetes increases by approximately 25 percent for each additional unit of BMI over 22.”
  • the BMIs of the human subjects is at least 23, at least 24, at least 25 (i.e., overweight by our criterion) , at least 26, at least 27, at least 28, at least 29, at least 30 (i.e., obese), at least 31, at least 32, at least 33, at least 34, at least 35, at least 36, at least 37, at least 38, at least 39, at least 40, or over 40.
  • Age-related (senescent) diseases include certain cancers, atherosclerosis, diabetes (type 2) , osteoporosis, hypertension, depression, Alzheimer's, Parkinson's, glaucoma, certain immune system defects, kidney failure, and liver steatosis.
  • they are diseases for which the relative risk (comparing a subpopulation over age 55 to a suitably matched population under age 55) is at least 1.1.
  • the agents of the present invention protect against one or more age-related diseases for at least a subpopulation of mature (post-puberty) adult subjects.
  • the mouse or human genes may be used directly.
  • they or specific binding fragments thereof may be labeled and used as hybridization probes.
  • they or specific binding fragments thereof may be used as antisense reagents to inhibit the expression of " the corresponding gene, or of a sufficiently homologous gene of another species . If the- database DNA appears to be a" full-length cDNA or gDNA, that is, it encodes an entire, " functional, naturally occurring protein, then it may be used in the expression of that protein.
  • the corresponding human gene may be used to express the human protein. Such expression may be in cell culture, with the protein subsequently isolated and administered exogenously to subjects who would benefit therefrom, or in vivo, i.e., administration by gene therapy.
  • any DNA encoding the same protein may be used for the same purpose, and a DNA encoding a protein which a fragment or a mutant of that naturally occurring protein which retains the desired activity, may be used for the purpose of producing the active fragment or mutant.
  • the encoded protein of course has utility therapeutically and, in labeled or immobilized form, diagnostically.
  • the genes may also be used indirectly, that is, to identify other useful DNAs, proteins, or other molecules.
  • mice genes disclosed herein have significant similarity to any known human DNA, and whether, in any of the six possible combinations of reference frame and strand, they encode a protein similar to a known human protein. If so, then it follows that the known human protein, and DNAs encoding that protein, may be used in a similar manner. In addition, if the known human protein is known to have additional homologues, then those homologous proteins, and DNAs encoding them, may be used in a similar manner.
  • Searches may also take cognizance, intermediately, of known genes and proteins other than mouse or human ones, e.g., use the mouse sequence to identify a known rat sequence and then the rat sequence to identify a human one.
  • mouse gene encodes a mouse protein which appears similar to a human protein
  • that human protein may be used (especially in humans) for purposes analogous to the proposed use of the mouse protein in mice.
  • a specific binding fragment of an appropriate strand of the corresponding human gene (gDNA or cDNA) could be labeled and used as a hybridization probe (especially against samples of human mRNA or cDNA) .
  • the disclosed genes gDNA or cDNA
  • the disclosed genes have significant similarities to known DNAs (and their translated AA sequences to known proteins)
  • results are dependent., to some degree, on the search parameters.
  • Preferred parameters are set forth in Example 1.
  • the results are also dependent on the content of the database. While the raw similarity score of a particular target (database) sequence will not vary with content (as long as it remains in the database) , its informational value (in bits), expected value, and relative ranking can change. Generally speaking, the changes are small.
  • the nucleic acid and- protein databases keep growing. Hence a later search may identify high scoring target sequences which were not- uncovered by an earlier search because the target sequences were not previously part of a database.
  • the cognate DNAs and proteins include not only those set forth in the examples, but those which would have been highly ranked (top ten, more preferably top three, even more preferably top two, most preferably the top one) in a search run with the same parameters on the date of filing of this application.
  • the known mouse or human database DNA appears to be a partial sequence (that is, partial relative to a cDNA or gDNA encoding the whole naturally occurring protein) , it may be used as a hybridization probe to isolate the full-length DNA. If the partial DNA encodes a biologically functional fragment of the cognate protein, it may be used in a manner similar to the full length DNA, i.e., to produce the functional fragment.
  • an antagonist of a protein or other molecule may be obtained by preparing a combinatorial library, as described below, of potential antagonists, and screening the library members or binding to the protein or other molecule in question. The binding members may then be further screened for the ability to antagonize the biological activity of the target.
  • the antagonists may be used therapeutically, or, in suitably labeled or immobilized form, diagnostically. If the identified mouse or human database DNA is related to a known protein, then substances known to interact with that protein (e.g., agonists, antagonists, substrates, receptors, second messengers, regulators, and so forth) , and binding molecules which bind them, are also of utility. Such binding molecules can likewise be identified by screening a combinatorial library.
  • a DNA of the present invention is a partial DNA, and the cognate full length DNA is not listed in a sequence database, the available DNA may be used as a hybridization probe to isolate the full-length DNA from a suitable DNA library.
  • Stringent hybridization conditions are appropriate, that is, conditions in which the hybridization temperature is 5-10 deg. C. below the Tm of the DNA as a perfect duplex.
  • sequence databases available do not include the sequence of any homologous gene (cDNA or gDNA) , or at least of the homologous gene for a species of interest. However, given the cDNAs set forth above, one may readily obtain the homologous gene. The possession of one DNA (the "starting DNA") greatly facilitates the isolation of homologous DNAs. If only a partial DNA is known, this partial DNA may first be used as a probe to isolate the corresponding full length DNA for the same species, and that the latter may be used as the starting DNA in the search for homologous genes.
  • starting DNA greatly facilitates the isolation of homologous DNAs. If only a partial DNA is known, this partial DNA may first be used as a probe to isolate the corresponding full length DNA for the same species, and that the latter may be used as the starting DNA in the search for homologous genes.
  • the starting DNA, or a fragment thereof is used as a hybridization probe to screen a cDNA or genomic DNA library for clones containing inserts which encode either the entire homologous protein, or a recognizable fragment thereof.
  • the human cDNA library is about 10 8 bases and the human genomic DNA library is about 10 10 bases.
  • the library is preferably derived from an organism which is known, on biochemical evidence, to produce a .homologous protein, and more preferably from the genomic DNA or mRNA of cells of that organism which are likely to be relatively high producers of that protein.
  • a cDNA library (which is derived from an mRNA library) is especially preferred. If the organism in question is known to have substantially different codon preferences from that of the organism whose relevant cDNA or genomic DNA is known, a synthetic hybridization probe may be used which encodes the same amino acid sequence but whose codon utilization is more similar to that of the DNA of the target organism.
  • the synthetic probe may employ inosine as a substitute for those bases which are most likely to be divergent, or the probe may be a mixed probe which mixes the codons for the source DNA with the preferred codons (encoding the same amino acid) for the target organism.
  • the Tm of a perfect duplex of starting DNA is determined. One may then select a hybridization temperature which is sufficiently lower than the perfect duplex Tm to allow hybridization of the starting DNA (or other probe) to a target DNA which is divergent from the starting DNA.
  • a 1% sequence divergence typically lowers the Tm of a duplex by 1-2°C, and the DNAs encoding homologous proteins of different species typically have sequence identities of around 50-80%.
  • the library is screened under conditions where the temperature is at least 20°C, more preferably at least 50°C, below the perfect duplex Tm. Since salt reduces the Tm, one ordinarily would carry out the search for DNAs encoding highly homologous proteins under relatively low salt hybridization conditions, e.g., ⁇ 1M NaCl. The higher the salt concentration, and/or the lower the temperature, the greater the sequence divergence which is tolerated.
  • salts to identify homologous genes in other species see, e.g., Schwinn, et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 265:8183-89 (1990.) (hamster 67-bp cDNA probe vs.
  • human leukocyte genomic library human 0.32kb DNA probe vs. bovine brain cDNA library, both with hybridization at 42°C in 6xSSC) ; Jenkins et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 265:19624-31 (1990) (Chicken.770-bp cDNA probe vs. human genomic libraries; hybridization at 40°C in 50% formamide and 5xSSC) ; Murata et al., J. Exp. Med., 175:341-51 (1992) (1.2-kb mouse cDNA probe v. human eosinophil cDNA library; hybridization at 65°C in 6xSSC) ; Guyer et al . , J. Biol.
  • Correspond ⁇ ng (Homologous) Proteins and DNAs In the case of a gene chip, the manufacturer- of the gene chip determines which DNA to place at each position on the chip. This DNA may correspond in sequence to a genomic DNA, a cDNA,. or a fragment of genomic or cDNA, and may be natural, synthetic or partially natural and partially synthetic in origin.
  • the manufacturer of the gene chip will normally identify the DNA for a mouse gene chip as corresponding to a particular mouse gene, in which case it will be assumed that the alignments of chip DNA to mouse gene satisfies the homology criteria of the invention.
  • the gene chip manufacturer will provide a sequence database accession number for the mouse DNA. If so, to identify the corresponding mouse protein, we will first inspect the database record for that mouse DNA.
  • the mouse protein accession number will appear in that record or in a linked record. If it doesn't, the corresponding mouse protein can be identified by performing a BlastX search on a mouse protein database with the mouse database DNA sequence as the query sequence. Even if the protein sequence is not in the database, if the DNA sequence comprises a full-length coding sequence, the corresponding protein can. be identified by translating the coding sequence in accordance with the Genetic Code.
  • a human protein can be said to be identifiable as corresponding (homologous) to a gene chip DNA if it is identified as corresponding (homologous) to the mouse gene (gDNA or cDNA, whole or partial) identified by the gene chip manufacturer as corresponding to that gene chip DNA.
  • BlastP a mouse protein, the latter being encoded by said mouse gene, or aligned to said mouse gene BlastX,
  • any alignment by BlastN, BlastP or BlastX is in accordance with the default parameters set forth below, and the expected value (E) of each alignment (the probability that such an alignment would have occurred by chance alone) is less than e-10. (Note that because this is a negative exponent, a value such as e-50 is less than e-10.)
  • a human gene is corresponding (homologous) to a mouse gene chip DNA, and hence to said identified mouse gene (or cDNA) and protein, if it encodes a corresponding (homologous) human protein as defined above, or it can be aligned by BlastN to said mouse gene.
  • the E value is less than e-50, more preferably less than e-60, still more preferably less than "' e-70, even more preferably less than e-80, considerably more preferably less than e-90, and most preferably less than e-100. Desirably, it is true for two or even all three 'of these conditions.
  • Master table 1 In constructing Master table 1, we generally used a BlastX (mouse gene vs. human protein) alignment E value cutoff of e,-50. However, ⁇ if there were no human proteins with ' that good an alignment to the mouse DNA in question, or if there were other reasons for including a particular human protein (e.g., a known functionality supportive of the observed differential cognate mouse protein expression) , then a human protein with a score worse (i.e., higher) than e-50 may appear in Master Table 1.
  • BlastX mouse gene vs. human protein
  • a longer (possibly full length) mouse gene or cDNA may be identified by a BlastN search of the mouse DNA database.
  • the identified DNA may be used to conduct a BlastN search of a human DNA database, or a BlastX search of a mouse or human protein database .
  • a human protein can be said to be identifiable as corresponding (homologous) to a gene chip DNA, or to a DNA identified by the manufacturer as corresponding to that gene chip DNA, if
  • BlastX genomic DNA
  • cDNA DNA complementary to messenger RNA
  • BlastP mouse protein by BlastP
  • BlastX mouse gene/cDNA by BlastX
  • gDNA or cDNA can in -turn be aligned to the gene chip or corresponding manufacturer identified DNA by BlastN;
  • any alignment by BlastN, BlastP, or BlastX is in accordance with the default parameters set forth below, and the expected -value (E) of each alignment (the probability that such an alignment would have occurred by chance alone) is less than e-10. (Note that because this is a negative exponent, a value such as e-50 is less than e-10.)
  • the E value is less than e-50, more preferably less than e-60, , still more preferably less than e-70, even more preferably less than e-80, considerably more preferably less than e-90, and most preferably less than e-100.
  • one or more of these standards of preference are met for two, three, four or all five of conditions (1')- (5 ' ) .
  • the E value is preferably, so limited for all of said alignments in the connecting chain.
  • a human gene corresponds (is homologous) to a gene chip DNA or manufacturer identified corresponding DNA if it encodes a homologous human protein as defined above, or if it can be aligned either directly to that DNA, or indirectly through a mouse gene which can be aligned to said DNA, according to the conditions set forth above.
  • Master table 1 assembles a list of human protein corresponding to each of the mouse DNAs/proteins identified as related to the chip DNA. These human proteins form a set and can be given a percentile rank, with respect to E value, within that set .
  • the human proteins of the present invention preferably are those scorers with a percentile rank of at least 50%, more preferably at least 60%, still more preferably at least 70%, even more preferably at least 80%, and most preferably at least 90%.
  • gDNA or cDNA mouse gene (gDNA or cDNA) in Master Table 1
  • BlastX the human protein with the best score (lowest e-value) .
  • These human proteins form a subset of the set above and can be given a percentile rank within that subset, e.g., the human proteins with scores in the top 10% of that subset have a percentile rank of 90% or higher.
  • the human proteins of the present invention preferably are those best scorer subset proteins with a percentile rank within the subset of at least 50%, more preferably at least 60%, still more preferably at least 70%, even more preferably at least 80%, and most preferably at least 90%.
  • BlastN and BlastX report very low expected values as "0.0". This does not truly mean that the expected value is exactly zero (since any alignment could occur by chance), but merely that it is so infinitesimal that it is not reported.
  • the documentation does not state the cutoff value, but alignments with explicit E values as low as e-178 (624 bits) have been reported as nonzero values, while a score of 636 bits was reported as "0.0".
  • Functional.ly homologous human proteins are also of interest.
  • a hmman protein may be said to be functionally homologous to the mouse gene if the human protein has at least one biological activity in common with the mouse protein encoded by said mouse gene.
  • the human proteins of interest also include those that are substantially and/or conservatively identical (as defined below) to the homologous and/or functionally homologous human proteins defined above.
  • the degree of differential expression may be expressed as the ratio of the higher expression level to the lower expression level. Preferably, this is at least 2-fold, and more preferably, it is higher, such as at least 3-fold, at least 4-fold, at least 5-fold, at least 6-fold, at least 7- fold, at least 8 -fold, at least 9-fold, or at least 10-fold.
  • the human protein of interest corresponds to a mouse gene for which the degree of differential expression places it among the top 10% of the mouse genes in the appropriate subtable.
  • the complementary strand. of the gene, or a portion thereof may be used in labeled form as a hybridization probe to detect messenger RNA and thereby monitor the level of expression of the gene in a subject. Elevated levels are indicative of progression, or propensity to progression, to a less favored state, and clinicians may take appropriate preventative, curative or ameliorative action.
  • the messenger RNA product (or equivalent cDNA) , the protein product, or a binding molecule specific for that product (e.g., an antibody which binds the product) , or a downstream product which mediates the activity (e.g., a signaling intermediate) or a binding molecule (e.g., an antibody) therefor, may be used, preferably in labeled or immobilized form, as an assay reagent in an assay for ⁇ said nucleic acid product, protein product, or downstream product (e.g., a signaling intermediate) .
  • elevated levels are indicative of a present or future problem.
  • an agent which down-regulates expression of the gene may be used to reduce levels ⁇ ⁇ f the corresponding protein and thereby inhibit further damage.
  • This agent could inhibit transcription of the gene in the subject, or translation of the corresponding messenger RNA.
  • Possible inhibitors of transcription and translation include antisense molecules and repressor molecules.
  • the agent could also inhibit a post-translational modification (e.g., glycosylation, phosphorylation, cleavage, GPI attachment) required for activity, or post-translationally modify the protein so as to inactivate it.
  • a post-translational modification e.g., glycosylation, phosphorylation, cleavage, GPI attachment
  • it could be an agent which down- or up-regulated a positive or negative regulatory gene, respectively.
  • an agent which is an antagonist of the messenger RNA product or protein product of the gene, or of a downstream product through which its activity is manifested may be used to inhibit its activity.
  • This antagonist could be an antibody, a peptide, a peptoid, a nucleic acid, a peptide nucleic acid (PNA) oligomer, a small organic molecule of a kind for which a combinatorial library exists (e.g., a benzodiazepine) , etc.
  • An antagonist is simply a binding molecule which, by binding, reduces or abolishes the undesired activity of its target.
  • the antagonist if not an oligomeric molecule, is preferably less than lOO ' O daltons, more preferably less than 500 daltons.
  • an agent which degrades, or abets the degradation of, that messenger RNA, its protein product or a downstream product which mediates its activity e.g., a signaling intermediate
  • a gene is u -regulated in more favored mammals, or down-regulated in less favored animals then the utilities are converse to those stated above.
  • the complementary strand-of the gene, or a portion thereof may be used in labeled form as a hybridization probe to detect messenger RNA and thereby monitor the level of expression of the gene in a subject.
  • Depressed levels are indicative of damage, or possibly of a propensity to damage, and clinicians ' may " take appropriate preventative, curative or ameliorative action.
  • the messenger RNA product, the equivalent cDNA, protein product, or a binding molecule specific for those products, or a downstream product, or a signaling intermediate, or a binding molecule therefor may be used, preferably in labeled or immobilized form, as an assay reagent in an assay for said protein product or downstream product.
  • depressed levels are indicative of a present or future problem.
  • an agent which up-regulates expression of the gene may be used to increase levels of the corresponding protein and thereby inhibit further progression to a less favored state.
  • it could be a vector which carries a copy of the gene, but which expresses the gene at higher levels than does the endogenous expression system.
  • it could be an agent which up- or down-regulates a positive or negative regulatory gene.
  • an agent which is an agonist of the protein product of the gene, or of a downstream product through which its activity (of inhibition of progression to a less favored state) is manifested, or of a signaling intermediate may be used to foster its activity.
  • an agent which inhibits the degradation of that protein product or of a downstream product or of a signaling intermediate may be used to increase the effective period of activity of the protein.
  • Mutant Proteins The present invention also contemplates mutant proteins (peptides) which are substantially identical (as defined below) to the parental protein (peptide) .
  • the fewer the mutations the more likely the mutant protein is to retain the activity of the parental protein.
  • the effect of mutations is usually (but not always) additive. Certain individual mutations are more likely to be tolerated than others.
  • a protein is more likely to tolerate a mutation which (a) is a substitution rather than an insertion or deletion; (b) is an insertion or deletion at the terminus, rather than internally, or, if internal, is at a domain boundary, or a loop or turn, rather than in an alpha helix or beta strand; (c) affects a surface residue rather than an interior residue; (d) affects a part of the molecule distal to the binding site; (e) is a substitution of one amino acid for another of similar size, charge, and/or hydrophobic!ty, and does not destroy a disulfide bond, or other crosslink; and (f) is at a site which is subject to substantial variation among a family of homologous proteins to which the protein of interest belongs.
  • Binding Si te Residues forming the binding site may be identified, by (1) comparing the effects of labeling the surface residues before and after complexing the protein to its target, (2) labeling the binding site directly with affinity ligands, (3) fragmenting-..the protein and testing the fragments for binding activity, and (4) systematic mutagenesis (e.g., alanine-scanning mutagenesis) to determine which mutants destroy binding. If the binding site of a homologous protein is known, the binding site may be postulated by analogy. Protein libraries may be constructed and screened that a large family (e.g., 10 8 ) of related -mutants may be evaluated simultaneously. Hence, the mutations are preferably conservative modifications as defined below.
  • a mutant protein (peptide) is substantially identical to a reference protein (peptide) if (a) it has at least 10% of a specific binding activity or a non-nutritional biological activity of the reference protein, and (b) is at least 50% identical in amino acid sequence to the reference protein (peptide) . It is "substantially structurally identical” if condition (b) applies, regardless of (a) . Percentage amino acid identity is .
  • a mutant DNA sequence is substantially identical to a reference DNA sequence if they are.”structural sequences, and encoding mutant and reference proteins which are substantially identical as described above.
  • mutant sequence has at least 10% of the regulatory activity of the reference sequence, and is at least 50% identical in nucleotide sequence to the reference sequence . Percentage identity is determined as for proteins except that matches " are scored +5 , mismatches - 4, the gap open penalty is -12, and the gap extension penalty (per additional null) is -4. More preferably, the sequence is not merely substantially identical but rather is at least 51%, at least 66%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98% or at least 99% identical in sequence to the reference sequence.
  • DNA sequences may also be considered "substantially identical" if they hybridize to each other under stringent conditions, i.e., conditions at which the Tm of the heteroduplex of the one strand of the mutant DNA and the more complementary strand of the reference DNA is not in excess of 10°C. less than the Tm of the reference DNA ho oduplex. Typically this will correspond to a percentage identity of 85-90%.
  • Constant Modifications “Conservative modifications” are defined as (a) conservative substitutions of amino acids as hereafter defined; or (b) single or multiple insertions (extension) or deletions (truncation) of amino acids at the termini . Conservative modifications are preferred to other modifications . Conservative substitutions are preferred to other conservative modifications.
  • “Semi-Conservative Modifications” are modifications which are not conservative, but which are (a) semi- conservative substitutions as hereafter defined; or (b) single or multiple insertions or deletions internally, but at interdomain boundaries, in loops or in other segments of relatively high mobility. Semi-conservative modifications are preferred to nonconservative modifications. Semi- conservative substitutions are preferred to other semi- conservative modifications. Non-conservative substitutions are preferred to other non-conservative modifications.
  • a priori sense i.e., modifications which would be expected to preserve 3D structure and activity, based on analysis of the naturally occurring families of homologous proteins and of past experience with the effects of deliberate mutagenesis, rather than post facto, a modification already known to conserve activity.
  • a modification which is conservative a priori may, and usually is, also conservative post facto.
  • no more than about five amino acids are inserted or deleted at a particular locus, and the modifications are outside regions known to contain binding sites important to activity.
  • insertions or deletions are limited to the termini .
  • a conservative substitution is a substitution of one amino acid for another of the same exchange group, the exchange groups being defined as follows I Gly, Pro, Ser, Ala (Cys) (and any nonbiogenic, neutral amino acid with a hydrophobicity not exceeding that of the aforementioned a.a.'s) II Arg, Lys, His (and any nonbiogenic, positively- 5 charged amino acids) III Asp, Glu, Asn, Gin (and any nonbiogenic negatively-charged amino acids) IV Leu, Ile, Met, Val (Cys) (and any nonbiogenic, aliphatic, neutral amino acid with a
  • Cys belongs to both I and IV. 15 Residues Pro, Gly and Cys have special conformational roles. Cys participates in formation of disulfide bonds. Gly imparts flexibility to the chain. Pro imparts rigidity to the chain and disrupts ot helices. These residues may be essential in certain regions of the polypeptide, but 20 substitutable elsewhere. One, two or three conservative substitutions are more likely to be tolerated than a larger number.
  • “Semi-conservative substitutions” are defined herein as being substitutions within supergroup I/II/III or within 25 supergroup IV/V, but not within a single one of groups I-V. They also include replacement of any other amino acid with alanine. If a substitution is not conservative, it preferably is semi-conservative. "Non-conservative substitutions” are substitutions 30 which are not “conservative” or “semi-conservative” . "Highly conservative substitutions” are a subset of conservative substitutions, and are exchanges of amino acids within the groups Phe/Tyr/Trp, Met/Leu/lle/Val, His/Arg/Lys, Asp/Glu and Ser/Thr/Ala. They are more likely to be 35. tolerated than other conservative substitutions. Again, the smaller the number of substitutions, the more likely they are to be tolerated.
  • a protein (peptide) is conservatively identical to a reference protein (peptide) it differs from the latter, if at all, solely by conservative modifications, the protein (peptide remaining at least seven amino acids long if the reference protein (peptide) was at least seven amino acids long.
  • a protein is at least semi-conservatively identical to a reference protein (peptide) if it differs from the latter, if at all, solely by semi-conservative or conservative modifications.
  • a protein (peptide) is nearly conservatively identical to a reference protein (peptide) if it differs from the latter, if at all, solely by one or more conservative modifications and/or a single nonconservative substitution. It is highly conservatively identical if it differs, if at all, solely by highly conservative substitutions. Highly conservatively identical proteins are preferred to those merely conservatively identical . An absolutely identical protein is even more preferred.
  • the core sequence of a reference protein . is the largest single fragment which retains at least 10% of a particular specific binding activity, if one is specified, or otherwise of at least one specific binding activity of the referent. If the referent has more than one specific binding activity, it may have more than one core sequence, and these may overlap or not . If it is taught that a peptide of the present invention may have a particular similarity relationship (e.g., markedly identical) to a reference protein (peptide) , preferred peptides are those which comprise a sequence having that relationship to a core sequence of the reference protein (peptide) , but with internal insertions or deletions in either sequence excluded.
  • Library generally refers to a collection of chemical or biological entities which are related in origin, structure, and/or function, and which can be screened simultaneously for a property of interest. Libraries may be classified by how they are constructed (natural vs. artificial diversity; combinatorial vs. noncombinatorial) , how they are screened (hybridization, expression, display) , or by the nature of the screened library members (peptides, nucleic acids, etc.). In a "natural diversity” library, essentially all of the diversity arose without human intervention.
  • a limitation might be to cells of a particular individual, to a particular species, or to a particular genus, or, more complexly, to individuals of a particular species who are of a particular age, sex, physical condition, geographical location, occupation and/or familial relationship. Alternatively or additionally, it might be to cells of a particular tissue or organ. Or it could be cells exposed to particular pharmacological, environmental, or pathogenic conditions. Or the library could be of chemicals, or a particular class of chemicals, produced by such cells. In a "controlled structure" library, the library members are deliberately limited by the production conditions to particular chemical structures. For example, if they are oligomers, they may be limited in length and ' monomer composition, e.g. hexapeptides composed of the twenty genetically encoded amino acids.
  • hybridization Library In a hybridization library, the library members are nucleic acids, and are screened using a nucleic acid hybridization probe. Bound nucleic acids may then be amplified, cloned, and/or sequenced.
  • the screened library members are gene expression products, but one may also speak of an underlying library of genes encoding those products.
  • the library is made by subcloning DNA encoding the library members (or portions thereof) into expression vectors (or into cloning vectors which subsequently are used to construct expression vectors) , each vector comprising an expressible gene encoding a particular library member, introducing the expression vectors into suitable cells, and expressing the genes so the expression products are produced.
  • the expression products are secreted, so the library can be screened using an affinity reagent, such as an antibody or receptor.
  • the bound expression products may 3oe sequenced directly, or their sequences inferred by, e.g., sequencing at least the variable portion of the encoding DNA.
  • the cells are lysed, thereby exposing the expression products, and the latter are screened with the affinity reagent.
  • the cells express the library members in such a manner that they are displayed on the surface of the cells, or on the surface of viral particles produced by the cells. (See display libraries, below) .
  • the screening is not for the ability of the expression product to bind to an affinity reagent, but rather for its ability to alter the phenotype of the host cell in a particular detectable manner.
  • the screened library members are transformed cells, but there is a first underlying library of expression products which mediate the behavior of the cells, and a second underlying library of genes which encode those products.
  • the library members are each conjugated to, and displayed upon, a support of some kind.
  • the support may be living (a cell or virus) , or nonliving (e.g., a bead or plate) .
  • display will normally be effectuated by expressing a fusion protein which comprises the library member, a carrier moiety allowing integration of the fusion protein into the surface of the cell or virus, and optionally a lining moiety.
  • the cell coexpresses a first fusion comprising the-library member and a linking moiety Ll, and a second fusion comprising a linking moiety L2 and the carrier moiety.
  • Ll and L2 interact to associate the first fusion with the second fusion and hence, indirectly, the library member with the surface of the cell or virus.
  • Soluble Library In a soluble library, the library members are free in solution.
  • a soluble library may be produced directly, or one may first make a display library and then release the library members from their supports.
  • Encapsulated Library In an encapsulated library, the library members are inside cells or liposomes. Generally speaking, encapsulated libraries are used to store the library members for future use; the members are extracted in some way for screening purposes. However, if they differentially affect the phenotype of the cells, they may be screened indirectly by screening the cells.
  • a cDNA library is usually prepared by extracting RNA from cells of particular origin, fractionating the RNA to isolate the messenger RNA (mRNA has a poly (A) tail, so this is usually done by oligo-dT affinity chromatography) , synthesizing complementary DNA (cDNA) using reverse transcriptase, DNA polymerase, and other enzymes, subcloning the cDNA into vectors, and introducing the vectors into cells. Often, only mRNAs or cDNAs of particular sizes will be used, to make it more likiely that the cDNA encodes a functional polypeptide.
  • a cDNA library explores the natural diversity of the transcribed DNAs of cells from a particular source. It is not a combinatorial library.
  • a cDNA library may be used to make a hybridization library, or it may be used as an (or to make) expression library.
  • Genomic DNA Library A genomic DNA library -i s made by extracting DNA from a particular source, fragmenting the DNA, isolating fragments of a particular size range, subcloning the DNA fragments into vectors , and introducing the vectors into cells .
  • a genomic DNA library is a natural diversity library, and not a combinatorial library .
  • a genomic DNA library may be used the same way as a cDNA library .
  • Synthetic DNA library A synthetic DNA library may be screened directly (as a hybridization library) , or used in the creation of an expression or display library of peptides/proteins .
  • combinatorial libraries refers to a library in which the individual members are either systematic or random combinations of a limited set of basic elements , the properties of each member being dependent on the choice and location of the elements incorporated into it .
  • the members of the library are at least capable of being screened simultaneously . Randomization may be complete or partial; some positions may be randomized and others predetermined, and at random positions, the choices may be limited in a predetermined manner.
  • the members of a combinatorial library may be oligomers or polymers of some kind, in which the variation occurs through the choice of monomeric building block at one or more positions of the oligomer or polymer, and possibly in terms of the connecting linkage, or the length of the oligomer or polymer, too.
  • the members may be nonoligomeric molecules with a standard core structure, like the 1,4 -benzodiazepine structure, with the variation being introduced by the choice of substituents at particular variable sites on the core structure.
  • the members may be nonoligomeric molecules assembled like a jigsaw puzzle, but wherein each piece has both one or more variable moieties (contributing to library diversity) and one or more constant moieties (providing the functionalities for coupling the piece in question to other pieces) .
  • each piece has both one or more variable moieties (contributing to library diversity) and one or more constant moieties (providing the functionalities for coupling the piece in question to other pieces) .
  • chemical building blocks are at least partially randomly combined into a large number (as high- as 10 15 ) of different compounds,which are then simultaneously screened for binding (or other) activity against one or more targets .
  • a “simple combinatorial library” is a mixture of two or more simple libraries, e.g., DNAs and peptides, or peptides, peptoids, and PNAs, or benzodiazepines and carbamates.
  • the number of component simple libraries in a composite library will, of course, normally be smaller than the average number of members in each simple library, as otherwise the advantage of a library over individual synthesis is small. Libraries of thousands, even millions, of random oligopeptides have been prepared by chemical synthesis (Houghten et al .
  • the first combinatorial libraries were composed of peptides or proteins, in which all or selected amino acid positions were randomized. Peptides and proteins can exhibit high and specific binding activity, and can act as catalysts; In consequence, they are of great importance in biological systems. Nucleic acids have also been used in combinatorial libraries.
  • nucleic acid with appropriate binding activity can be amplified.
  • combinatorial libraries composed of nucleic acids can be of low redundancy and hence, of high diversity.
  • combinatorial libraries based on small molecules which are more suited to pharmaceutical use, especially those which, like benzodiazepines, belong to a chemical class which has already yielded useful pharmacological agents .
  • the techniques of combinatorial chemistry have been recognized as the most efficient means for finding small molecules that act on these targets.
  • small molecule combinatorial chemistry involves the synthesis of either pooled or discrete molecules that present varying arrays of functionality on a common scaffold.
  • the size of a library is the number of molecules in it. •
  • the simple diversity of a library is the number of unique structures in it . There is no formal minimum or maximum diversity. If the library has a very low diversity, the library has little advantage over just synthesizing and screening the members individually. If the library is of very high diversity, it may be inconvenient to handle, at least without automatizing the process.
  • the simple diversity of a library is preferably at least 10, 10E2, 10E3, 10E4, 10E6, 10E7, 10E8 or 10E9, the higher the better under most circumstances?.
  • the simple diversity is usually not more than 10E15, and more usually not more than 10E10.
  • the average sampling level is the size divided by the simple diversity.
  • the expected average sampling level must be high enough to provide a reasonable assurance that, if a given structure were expected, as a consequence of the library design, to be present, that the actual average sampling level will be high enough so that the structure, if satisfying the screening criteria, will yield a positive result when the library is screened.
  • the preferred average sampling level is a function of the detection limit, which in turn is a function of the strength of the signal to be screened.
  • There are more complex measures of diversity than simple diversity These attempt to take into account the degree of structural difference between the various unique sequences. These more complex measures are usually used in the context of small organic compound libraries, see below.
  • the library members may be presented as solutes in solution, or immobilized on some form of support.
  • the support may be living (cell, virus) or nonliving (bead, plate, etc.).
  • the supports may be separable (cells, virus particles, beads) so that binding and nonbinding members can be separated, or nonseparable (plate) .
  • the members will normally be placed on addressable positions on the support.
  • the advantage of a soluble library is that there is no carrier moiety that could interfere with the binding of the members to the support.
  • the advantage of an immobilized library is that it is easier to identify the structure of the members which were positive .
  • the target When screening a soluble library, or one with a separable support, the target is usually immobilized.
  • the target When screening a library on a nonseparable support, the target will usually be labeled.
  • oligonucleotide libraries An oligonucleotide library is a combinatorial library, at least some of whose members are single-stranded oligonucleotides having three o more nucleotides connected by phosphodiester or analogous bonds.
  • the oligonucleotides may be linear, cyclic or branched, and may include non- nucleic acid moieties.
  • the nucleotides are riot limited to the nucleotides normally found in DNA or RNA. ' For examples of nucleotides modified to increase nuclease resistance and chemical stability of aptamers , see Chart 1 in Osborne and Ellington, Chem. Rev., 97: 349-70 (1997) .
  • RNA For screening of RNA, see Ellington and Szostak, Nature, 346: 818-22 (1990). There is no formal minimum or maximum size for these oligonucleotides. However, the number of conformations which an oligonucleotide can assume increases exponentially with its length in bases. Hence, a longer oligonucleotide is more likely to be able to fold to adapt itself to a protein surface. On the other hand, while very long molecules can be synthesized and screened, unless they provide a much superior affinity to that of shorter molecules, they are not likely to be found in the selected population, for the reasons explained by Osborne and Ellington (1997) .
  • the libraries of the present invention are preferably composed of oligonucleotides having a length of 3 to 100 bases, more preferably 15 to 35 bases.
  • the oligonucleotides in a given library may be of the same or of different lengths .
  • Oligonucleotide libraries have the advantage that libraries of very high diversity (e.g., 10 15 ) are feasible, and binding molecules are readily amplified in vitro by polymerase chain reaction (PCR) .
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • nucleic acid molecules can have very high specificity and affinity to targets .
  • this invention prepares and screens oligonucleotide libraries by the SELEX method, as described in King and Famulok, Molec. Biol.
  • aptamers may be used to characterize the target protein, both directly (through identification of the aptamer and the points of contact between the aptamer and the protein) and indirectly (by use of the aptamer as a ligand to modify the chemical reactivity of the protein) .
  • each nucleotide (monomeric unit) is composed of a phosphate group, a sugar moiety, and either a purine or a pyrimidine base.
  • the sugar is deoxyribose and in RNA it is ribose.
  • the nucleotides are linked by 5 '-3' phosphodiester bonds.
  • the deoxyribose phosphate backbone of DNA can be modified to increase resistance to nuclease and to increase penetration of cell membranes.
  • Derivatives such as mono- or dithiophosphates, methyl phosphonates, boranophosphates, formacetals, carbamates, siloxanes, and dimethylenethio- - sulfoxideo- and-sulfono- linked species are known in the art.
  • a peptide is composed of a plurality of amino acid residues joined together by peptidyl (-MHCO-) bonds.
  • a biogenic peptide is a peptide in which the residues are all genetically encoded amino acid residues; it is not necessary that the biogenic peptide actually be produced by gene expression.
  • Amino acids are the basic building blocks with which peptides and proteins are constructed. Amino acids possess both, an amino group (-NH 2 ) and a carboxylic acid group (- COOH) . Many amino acids, but not all, have the alpha amino acid structure NH 2 -CHR-COOH, where R is hydrogen, or any of a variety of functional groups.
  • Twenty amino acids are genetically encoded: Alanine, Arginine, Asparagine, Aspartic Acid, Cysteine, Glutamic Acid, Glutamine, Glycine, Histidine, Isoleucine, Leucine, Lysine, Methionine, Phenylalanine, Proline, Serine, Threonine, Tryptophan, Tyrosine, and Valine. Of these, all save Glycine are optically isomeric, however, only the L- form is found in humans. Nevertheless, the D-forms of these amino acids do have biological significance; D-Phe, for example, is a known analgesic.
  • amino acids are also known, including: 2- Aminoadipic acid; 3-Aminoadipic acid; beta-Aminopropionic acid; 2-Aminobutyric acid; 4-Aminobutyric acid (Piperidinic acid) ;6-Aminocaproic acid; 2-Aminoheptanoic acid; 2- Aminoisobutyric acid, 3-Aminoisobutyric acid; 2-Aminopimelic acid; 2,4-Diaminobutyric acid; Desmosine; 2,2'- Diaminopimelic acid; 2 ,3-Diaminopropionic acid; N-
  • Ethylglycine N-Ethylasparagine; Hydroxylysine; allo- Hydroxylysine; 3-Hydroxyproline; 4-Hydroxyproline; Isodesmosine; allo-Isoleucine; N-Methylglycine (Sarcosine) ; N-Methylisoleucine; N-Methylvaline; Norvaline; Norleucine; and Ornithine.
  • Peptides are constructed by condensation of amino acids and/or smaller peptides.
  • amino group of one amino acid reacts with the carboxylic acid group of a second amino acid (or peptide) to form a peptide (-NHCO-) bond, releasing one molecule of water. Therefore, when an amino acid is incorporated into a peptide, it should, technically speaking, be referred to as an amino acid residue .
  • the core of that residue is the moiety which excludes the -NH and -CO linking functionalities which connect it to other residues. This moiety consists of one or more main chain atoms (see below) and the attached side chains .
  • the main chain moiety of each amino acid consists of the -NH and -CO linking functionalities and a core main chain moiety. Usually the latter is a single carbon atom.
  • the core main chain moiety may include additional carbon atoms, and may also include nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atoms, which together form a single chain.
  • the core main chain atoms consist solely of carbon atoms.
  • the side chains are attached to the core main chain atoms.
  • the C-l, C-2 and N-2 of each residue form the repeating unit of the main chain, and the word "side chain” refers to the C-3 and higher numbered carbon atoms and their substituents. It also includes H atoms attached to the main chain atoms .
  • Amino acids may be classified according to the number of carbon atoms which appear in the main chain between the carbonyl carbon and amino nitrogen atoms which participate in the peptide bonds.
  • alpha, beta, gamma and delta amino acids are known. These have 1-4 intermediary carbons.
  • Proline is a special case of an alpha amino acid; its side chain also binds to the peptide bond nitrogen.
  • main chain core carbon a side chain other than H is attached to.
  • the preferred attachment site is the C-2 (alpha) carbon, i.e., the one adjacent to the carboxyl carbon of the -CO linking functionality.
  • a main chain atom may carry either one or two side chains; one is more common-.
  • a side chain may be attached to a main chain carbon atom by a single or a double bond; the former is more common.
  • a simple combinatorial peptide library is one whose members are peptides having three or more amino acids connected via peptide bonds.
  • the peptides may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and may covalently or noncovalently include nonpeptidyl moieties.
  • the amino acids are not limited to the naturally occurring or to the genetically encoded axnino acids.
  • a biased peptide library is one in which one or more (but not all) residues of the peptides are constant residues.
  • Cyclic Peptides Many naturally occurring peptides are cyclic. Cyclization is a common mechanism for stabilization of peptide conformation thereby achieving improved association of the peptide with its ligand and hence improved biological activity. Cyclization is usually achieved by intra-chain - cystine formation, by formation of peptide bond between side chains or between N- and C- terminals. Cyclization was usually achieved by peptides in solution, but several publications have appeared that describe cyclization of peptides on beads. A peptide library may be an oligope tide library or a protein library.
  • the oligopeptides are at least five, six, seven or eight amino acids in length. Preferably, they are composed of less than 50, more preferably less than 20 amino acids. In the case of an oligopeptide library, all or just some of the residues may be variable.
  • the oligopeptide may be unconstrained, or constrained to a particular conformation by, e.g., the participation of constant cysteine residues in the formation of a constraining disulfide bond.
  • Proteins like oligopeptides, are composed of a plurality of amino acids, but the term protein is usually reserved for longer peptides, which are able to fold into a stable conformation.
  • a protein may be composed of two or more polypeptide chains, held together by covalent or noncovalent crosslinks. These may occur in a homooligomeric or a heterooligomeric state.
  • a peptide is considered a protein if it (1) is at least 50 amino acids long, or (2) has at least two stabilizing covalent crosslinks (e.g., disulfide bonds). Thus, conotoxins are considered proteins.
  • the proteins of a protein library will be characterizable as having both constant residues (the same for all proteins in the library) and variable residues (which vary from member to member) . This is simply because, for a given range of variation at each position, the sequence 'space (simple diversity) grows exponentially with the number of residue positions, so at some point it becomes inconvenient for all residues of a peptide to be variable positions. Since proteins are usually larger than oligopeptides, it is more common for protein libraries than oligopeptide libraries to feature variable positions. In the case of a protein library, it is desirable to focus the mutations at those sites which are tolerant of mutation.
  • Protein libraries can be considered a special case of the biased peptide library.
  • the protein library comprises members which comprise a mutant of
  • VH or VL chain or a mutant of an antigen-specific binding fragment of such a chain.
  • VH and VL chains are usually each about 110 amino acid residues, and are held in proximity ' by a disulfide bond between the adjoing CL and CHI regions to form a variable domain. Together, the VH, VL, CL and CHI form an Fab fragment .
  • the hypervariable regions are at
  • VH and VL chains There is variation among VH and VL chains at residues outside the hypervariable regions, but to a much lesser degree .
  • a sequence is considered a mutant of a VH or VL chain if it is at least 80% identical to a naturally occurring VH or VL chain at all residues outside the hypervariable region.
  • such antibody library members comprise both at least one VH chain and at least one
  • VL chain at least one of which is a mutant chain, and which chains may be derived from the same or different antibodies.
  • VH and VL chains may be covalently joined by a suitable linker moiety, as in a "single chain antibody” , or they may be noncovalently joined, as in a naturally occurring variable domain. If the joining is noncovalent, and the library is displayed on cells or virus, then either the VH or the VL chain may be fused to the carrier surface/coat protein.
  • the complementary chain may be co-expressed, or added exogenously to the library.
  • the members may further comprise some or all of an antibody constant heavy and/or constant light chain, or a mutant thereof .
  • a peptoid is an analogue of a peptide in which one or more of the peptide bonds (-NH-CO-) are replaced by pseudopeptide bonds, which may be the same or different. It is not necessary that all of the peptide bonds be replaced, i.e., a peptoid may include one or more conventional amino acid residues, e.g., proline.
  • a peptide bond has two small divalent linker elements, -NH- and -CO-.
  • a preferred class of psuedopeptide bonds are those which consist of two small divalent linker elements.
  • Each may be chosen independently from the group consisting of amine (-NH-) , substituted amine (-NR-) , carbonyl (-CO-) , thiocarbonyl (-CS-) ,methylene (-CH2-) , monosubstituted methylene (-CHR-) , disubstituted methylene (-CR1R2-), ether (-0-)” and thioether (-S-) .
  • the more preferred pseudopeptide bonds include: N-modified -NRCO- Carba ⁇ -CH 2 -CH 2 - Depsi ⁇ -C0-0- Hydroxyethylene ⁇ -CH0H-CH 2 - Ketomethylene ⁇ -C0-CH 2 - Methylene-Oxy -CH 2 -0- Reduced -CH 2 -NH- Thiomethylene -CH 2 -S- Thiopeptide -CS-NH- Retro-Inverso -CO-NH-
  • a single peptoid molecule may include more than one kind of pseudopeptide bond.
  • the monomeric units which are not amino acid residues are of the structure -NR1-CR2-CO-, where at least one of RI and R2 are not hydrogen. If there is variability in the pseudopeptide bond, this is most conveniently done by using an -NRCO- or other pseudopeptide bond with an R group, and varying the R group.
  • the R group will usually be any of the side chains characterizing the amino acids of peptides, as previously discussed. If the R group of the pseudopeptide bond is not variable, it will usually be small, e.g., not more than 10 atoms (e.g., hydroxyl, amino, carboxyl, methyl, ethyl, propyl) . -If the conjugation chemistries are compatible, a simple combinatorial library may include both peptides and ⁇ peptoids .
  • a PNA oligomer is here defined as one comprising a plurality of units, at least one of which is a PNA monomer which comprises a side chain comprising a nucleobase.
  • the classic PNA oligomer is composed of (2- aminoethyl) glycine units, with nucleobases attached by methylene carbonyl linkers. That is, it has the structure H- (-HN-CH 2 -CH 2 -N(-CO-CH 2 -B) -CH 2 -CO-) n -OH where the outer parenthesized substructure is the PNA monomer.
  • nucleobase B is separated from the backbone N by three bonds, and the points of attachment of the side chains are separated by six bonds.
  • the nucleobase may be any of the bases included in the nucleotides discussed in connection with oligonucleotide libraries.
  • the bases of nucleotides A, G, T, C and U are preferred.
  • a PNA oligomer may further comprise one or more amino acid residues, especially glycine and proline.
  • the small organic compound library (“compound library”, for short) is a combinatorial library whose members are suitable for use as drugs if, indeed, they have the ability to mediate a biological activity of the target protein.
  • Peptides have certain disadvantages as drugs. These include susceptibility to degradation by serum proteases, and difficulty n penetrating cell membranes. Preferably, all or most of the compounds of the compound library avoid, or at least do not suffer to the same degree, one or moire of the pharmaceutical disadvantages of peptides. In designing a compound library, it is helpful to bear in mind the methods of molecular modification typically used to obtain new drugs.
  • disjunction in which a lead drug is simplified to ' identify its component pharmacophoric moieties
  • conjunction in which two or more known pharmacophoric moieties, which may be the same or different, are associated, covalently or noncovalently, to form a new drug
  • alteration in which one moiety is replaced by another which may be similar or different, but which is not in effect a disjunction or conjunction.
  • disjunction in which a lead drug is simplified to ' identify its component pharmacophoric moieties
  • conjunction in which two or more known pharmacophoric moieties, which may be the same or different, are associated, covalently or noncovalently, to form a new drug
  • alteration in which one moiety is replaced by another which may be similar or different, but which is not in effect a disjunction or conjunction.
  • Alterations include ring closing or opening, formation of lower or higher homologues, introduction or saturation of double bonds, introduction of optically active centers, introduction, removal or replacement of bulky groups, isosteric or bioisosteric substitution, changes in the position or orientation of a group, introduction of alkylating groups, and introduction, removal or replacement of groups with ' a view toward inhibiting or promoting inductive (electrostatic) or conjugative (resonance) effects.
  • the substituents may include electron acceptors and/or electron donors.
  • Typical electron donors (+1) include -CH 3 , -CH 2 R, -CHR 2 , -CR 3 and -COO".
  • the substituents may also include those which increase or decrease electronic density in conjugated systems.
  • the ' former (+R) groups include -CH 3 , -CR 3 , -F, -CI, -Br, -I, -OH, -OR, -0C0R, -SH, -SR, -NH 2 , -NR 2 , and -NHCOR.
  • the later (-R) groups include -N0 2 , -CN, -CHC, -COR, -COOH, -COOR, -CONH 2 , -S0 2 R and -CF 3 . Synthetically speaking, the modifications may be achieved by a variety of unit processes, including nucleophilic and electrophilic substitution, reduction and oxidation, addition elimination, double bond cleavage, and cyclization.
  • a compound, or a family of compounds, having one or more pharmacological activities may be disjoined into two or more known or potential pharmacophoric moieties.
  • Analogues of each of these moieties may be identified, and mixtures of these analogues reacted so as to reassemble compounds which have some similarity to the original lead compound. It is not necessary that all members of the library possess moieties analogous to all of the moieties of the lead compound.
  • the design of a library may be illustrated by the example of the benzodiazepines.
  • Benzodiazepine drugs including chlordiazepoxide, diazepam and oxazepam, have been used a ⁇ anti-anxiety drugs.
  • Derivatives of benzodiazepines have widespread biological activities; derivatives have been reported to act not only as anxiolytics, but also as anticonvulsants; cholecystokinin (CCK) receptor subtype A or B, kappa opioid receptor, platelet activating factor, and HIV transactivator Tat antagonists, and .GPIIblla, reverse transcriptase and ras farnesyltransferase inhibitors .
  • CCK cholecystokinin
  • the benzodiazepine structure has been disjoined into a 2-aminobenzophenone, an amino acid, and an alkylating agent. See Bunin, et al . , Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 91:4708 (1994) . Since only a few 2-aminobenzophenone derivatives are commercially- available, it was later disjoined into 2- aminoarylstannane, an acid chloride, an amino acid, and an alkylating agent. Bunin, et al . , Meth. Enzymol., 267:448 (1996) .
  • the arylstannane may be considered the core structure upon which the other moieties are substituted, or all four may be considered equals which are conjoined to make each library member.
  • a basic library synthesis plan and member structure is shown in Figure 1 of Fowlkes, et al . , U.S. Serial No. 08/740,671, incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • the acid chloride building block introduces variability at the R. 1 site.
  • the R 2 site is introduced by the amino acid, and the R 3 site by the alkylating agent.
  • the R 4 site is inherent in the arylstannane.- Bunin, et al .
  • variable elements included both aliphatic and aromatic groups.
  • aliphatic groups both acyclic and cyclic (mono- or poly-) structures, substituted or not, were tested. (although all of the acyclic groups were linear, it would have been feasible to introduce a branched aliphatic).
  • the aromatic groups featured either single and multiple rings, fused or not, substituted or not, and with heteroatoms or not.
  • the secondary substitutents included - NH 2 , -OH, -OMe, -CN, -CI, -F, and -COOH.
  • spacer moieties such as -0-, -S-, -00-, -CS-, -NH-, and - NR-, could have been incorporated.
  • Bunin et al suggest that instead of using a 1, 4- benzodiazepine as a core structure, one may instead use a 1, 4-benzodiazepine-2, 5-dione structure.
  • the hydantoins were synthesized by first simultaneously deprotecting and then treating each of five amino acid resins with each of eight isocyanates.
  • the benzodiazepines were synthesized by treating each of five deprotected amino acid resins with each of eight 2-amino benzophenone imines . Chen, et al . , J. Am. Chem. Soc, 116:2661-62 (1994) described the preparation of a pilot (9 member) combinatorial library of formate esters.
  • a polymer bead- bound aldehyde preparation was "split" into three aliquots, each reacted with one of three different ylide reagents.
  • each member is synthesized only at a particular coordinate on or in a matrix, or in a particular chamber. This might be, for example, the location of a particular pin, or a particular well on a,5. microtiter plate, or inside a "tea bag".
  • the present invention is not limited to any particular form of identification.
  • Examples of candidate simple libraries which might be evaluated include derivatives of the following: Cyclic Compounds Containing One Hetero Atom 0 Heteronitrogen pyrroles pentasubstituted pyrroles - pyrrolidines pyrrolines5 prolines indoles beta-carbolines pyridines dihydropyridines 1,4-dihydropyridines pyrido [2 , 3-d] pyrimidines tetrahydro-3H-imidazo [4,5-c] pyridines Isoquinolines ' tetrahydroisoquinolines quinolones beta-lactams azabicyclo [4.3.0]nonen-8-one amino acid Heterooxygen furans tetrahydrofurans 2 , 5-disubstituted tetrahydrofurans pyrans hydroxypyranones tetrahydroxypyranones gamma-butyrolactones Heterosulfur s
  • the preferred animal subject of the present invention is a mammal.
  • mammal an individual belonging to the class Mammalia.
  • the invention is particularly useful in the treatment of human subjects, although it is intended for veterinary and nutritional uses as well.
  • Preferred nonhuman subjects are of the orders Pri ata (e.g., apes and monkeys), Artiodactyla or
  • Perissodactyla e.g., cows, pigs, sheep, horses, goats
  • Carnivora e.g., cats, dogs
  • Rodenta e.g., rats, mice, guinea pigs, hamsters
  • Lagomorpha e.g., rabbits or other pet, farm or laboratory mammals.
  • protection is intended to include “prevention,” “suppression” and “treatment.”
  • Prevention strictly speaking, involves administration of the pharmaceutical prior to the induction of the disease (or other adverse clinical condition) .
  • “Suppression” involves administration of the composition prior to the clinical appearance of the disease.
  • Treatment involves administration of the protective composition after the appearance of the disease .
  • prevention will be understood to refer to both prevention in the strict sense, and to suppression.
  • the preventative or prophylactic use of a pharmaceutical usually involves identifying subjects who are at higher risk than the general population of contracting the disease, and administering the pharmaceutical to them in advance of the clinical appearance of the disease. The effectiveness of such use is measured by comparing the subsequent incidence or severity of the disease, or of particular symptoms of the disease, in the treated subjects against that in untreated subjects of the same high risk group .
  • a particular group e.g., a particular age, sex, race, ethnic group, etc.
  • prophylaxis for the general population, and not just a high risk group. This is most likely to be the case when .essentially all are at risk of contracting the disease, the effects of the disease are serious, the therapeutic index of the prophylactic agent is high, and the cost of the agent is low.
  • a prophylaxis or treatment may be curative, that is, directed at the underlying cause of a disease, or ameliorative, that is, directed at the symptoms of the disease, especially those which reduce the quality of life. It should also be understood that to be useful, the protection provided need not be absolute, provided that it is sufficient to carry clinical value.
  • administration may be systemic or topical.
  • administration of such a composition may be by various parenteral routes such as subcutaneous, intravenous, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intranasal, transdermal, or buccal routes.
  • parenteral routes such as subcutaneous, intravenous, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intranasal, transdermal, or buccal routes.
  • administration may be by the oral route.
  • Parenteral administration can be by bolus injection or by gradual perfusion over time.
  • a typical regimen comprises administration of an effective amount of the drug, administered over a period ranging from a single dose, to dosing over a period of hours, days, weeks, months, or years .
  • ⁇ It is understood that the suitable dosage of a drug of the present invention will be dependent upon the age, sex, health, and weight of the recipient, kind of concurrent treatment, if any, frequency of treatment, and the nature of the effect desired. However, the most preferred dosage can be tailored to the individual subject, as is understood and determinable by one of skill in the art, without undue ' experimentation. This will typically involve adjustment of a standard dose, e.g., reduction of the dose if the patient has a low body weight. Prior to use in humans, a drug will first be evaluated for safety and efficacy in laboratory animals.
  • the total dose required for each treatment may be administered by multiple doses or in a single dose.
  • the protein may be administered alone or in conjunction with other therapeutics directed to the disease or directed to other symptoms thereof.
  • Typical pharmaceutical doses, for adult humans, are in the range of 1 ng to lOg per day, more often 1 mg to lg per day.
  • the appropriate dosage form will depend on the disease, the pharmaceutical, and the mode of administration; possibilities include tablets, capsules, lozenges, dental pastes, suppositories, inhalants, solutions, ointments and parenteral depots. See, e.g., Berker, supra, Goodman, supra, Avery, supra and Ebadi, supra, which are entirely incorporated herein by reference, including all references cited therein.
  • the drug may be administered in the form of an expression vector comprising a nucleic acid encoding the peptide; such a vector, after incorporation into the genetic complement of a cell of the patient, directs synthesis of the peptide.
  • Suitable vectors include genetically engineered poxviruses (vaccinia) , adenoviruses, adeno-associated viruses, herpesviruses and lentiviruses which are or have been rendered nonpathogenic .
  • a pharmaceutical composition may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as excipients, carriers and/or auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. See, e.g., Berker, supra, Goodman, supra, Avery, supra and Ebadi, supra, 'which are entirely incorporated herein by reference, included all references cited therein.
  • the invention contemplates that it may be appropriate to ascertain or to mediate the biological activity of a substance of this invention in a target organism.
  • the target organism may be a plant, animal, or microorganism.
  • the drug may be intended to increase the disease, weather or pest resistance, alter the growth characteristics, or otherwise improve the useful characteristics or mute undesirable characteristics of the plant.
  • it may be a weed, in which case the drug may be intended to kill or otherwise inhibit the growth of the plant, or to alter its characteristics to convert it from a weed to an economic plant.
  • the plant may be a tree, shrub, crop, grass, etc.
  • the plant may be an algae (which are in some cases also microorganisms) , or a vascular plant, especially gymnosperms (particularly conifers) and angiosp ' erms .
  • Angiosperms may be monocots or dicots.
  • the plants of greatest interest are rice, wheat, corn, alfalfa, soybeans, potatoes, peanuts, tomatoes, melons, apples, pears, plums, pineapples, fir, spruce, pine, cedar, and oak.
  • the target organism is a microorganism, it may be algae, bacteria, fungi, or a. virus (although the biological activity of a virus must be determined in a virus-infected cell) .
  • the microorganism may be human or other animal or plant pathogen, oiS-it may be nonpathogenic. It may be a soil or water organism, or one which normally lives inside other living things. If the .target organism is an animal, it may be a vertebrate or a nonvertebrate animal. Nonvertebrate animals are chiefly of interest when they act as pathogens or parasites, and the drugs are intended to act as biocidic or biostatic agents. Nonvertebrate- animals of interest include worms, mollusks,- and arthropods.
  • the target organism may also be a vertebrate animal, i.e., a mammal, bird, reptile, fish or amphibian.
  • the target animal preferably belongs to the order Primata (humans, apes and monkeys), Artiodactyla (e.g., cows, pigs, sheep, goats, horses), Rodenta (e.g., mice, rats) Lagomorpha (e.g., rabbits, hares), or Carnivora (e.g., cats, dogs) .
  • the target animals are preferably of the orders Anseriformes (e.g., ducks, geese, swans) or Galliformes (e.g., quails, grouse, pheasants, turkeys and chickens) .
  • the target animal is preferably of the order Clupeiformes (e.g., sardines, shad, anchovies, whitefish, salmon) .
  • Target Tissues refers to any whole animal, physiological system, whole organ, part of organ, miscellaneous tissue, cell, or cell component (e.g., the- cell membrane) of a target animal in which biological activity may be measured. Routinely in mammals one would choose to compare and contrast the biological impact on virtually any and all tissues which express the subject receptor protein.
  • the main tissues to use are: brain, heart, lung, kidney, liver, pancreas, skin, intestines, adipose, stomach, skeletal muscle, adrenal glands, breast, prostate, vasculature, retina, cornea, thyroid gland, parathyroid glands, thymus, bone marrow, bone, etc.
  • B cells B cells, T cells, macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils, mast cells, platelets, megakaryocytes, erythrocytes, bone marrow stomal cells, fibroblasts, neurons, astrocytes, neuroglia, microglia, epithelial cells (from any organ, e.g. skin, breast, prostate, lung, intestines etc) , cardiac muscle cells, smooth muscle cells, striated muscle cells, osteoblasts, osteocytes, chondroblasts, chondrocytes, keratinocytes, melanocytes, etc.
  • target organism and the "target tissue”.
  • Screening Assays intended to determine the binding or the biological activity of a substance are called preliminary screening assays. Screening assays will typically be either in vitro (cell-free) assays (for binding to an immobilized receptor) or cell-based assays (for alterations in the phenotype of the cell) . They will not involve screening of whole multicellular organisms, or isolated organs. The comments on diagnostic biological assays apply mutatis mutandis to screening cell-based assays.
  • in vitro is descriptive of an event, such as binding or enzymatic action, which occurs within a living organism.
  • the organism in question may, however, be genetically modified.
  • the term in vi tro refers to an event which occurs outside a living organism. Parts of an organism (e.g., a membrane, or an isolated biochemical) are used, together with artificial substrates and/or conditions.
  • the term in vitro excludes events occurring inside or on an intact cell, whether of a unicellular or multicellular organism.
  • In vivo assays include both cell-based assays, and organismic assays.
  • the cell-based assays include both assays on unicellular organisms, and assays on isolated cells or cell cultures derived from multicellular organisms.
  • the cell cultures may be mixed, provided that they are not organized into tissues or organs.
  • organismic assay refers to assays on whole multicellular organisms, and assays on isolated organs or tissues of such organisms.
  • the in vitro assays of the present invention may be applied to any suitable analyte-containing sample, and may be qualitative or quantitative in nature.
  • sample will normally be a biological fluid, such as blood, urine, lymph, semen, milk, or cerebrospinal fluid, or a fraction or derivative thereof, or a biological tissue, in the form of, e.g., a tissue section or homogenate.
  • a biological fluid or tissue it may be taken from a human or other mammal, vertebrate or animal, or from a plant.
  • the preferred sample is blood, or a fraction or derivative thereof.
  • the assay may be a binding assay, in which one step involves the binding of a diagnostic reagent to the analyte, or a reaction assay, which involves the reaction of a reagent with the analyte.
  • the reagents used in a binding assay may be classified as to the nature of their interaction with analyte: (1) analyte analogues, or (2) analyte binding molecules (ABM) . They may be labeled or insolubilized.
  • the assay may look for a direct reaction between the analyte and a reagent which is reactive with the analyte, or if the analyte is an enzyme or enzyme inhibitor, for a reaction catalyzed or inhibited by the analyte.
  • the reagent may be a reactant, a catalyst, or an inhibitor for the reaction.
  • An assay may involve a cascade of steps in which the product of one step acts as the target for the next step. These steps may be binding steps, reaction steps, or a combination thereof .
  • SPS Signal Producing System
  • the assay In order to detect the presence, or measure the amount, of an analyte, the assay must provide for a signal producing system (SPS) in which there is a detectable difference in the signal produced, depending on whether the analyte is present or absent (or, in a quantitative assay, on the amount of the analyte) .
  • SPS signal producing system
  • the detectable signal may be one which is visually detectable, or one detectable only with instruments. Possible signals include production of colored or luminescent products, alteration of the characteristics (including amplitude or polarization) of absorption or emission of radiation by an assay component or product, and precipitation or agglutination of a component or product.
  • signal is intended to include the discontinuance of an existing signal, or a change in the rate of change of an observable parameter, rather than a change in its absolute value.
  • the signal may be monitored manually or automatically.
  • the signal is often a product of the reaction.
  • a binding assay it is normally provided by a label borne by a labeled reagent.
  • a label may be, e.g., a radioisotope, a fluorophore, an enzyme, a co-enzyme, an enzyme substrate, an electron-dense compound, an agglutinable particle.
  • the radioactive isotope can be detected by such means as the use of a gamma counter or a scintillation counter or by autoradiography.
  • Isotopes which are particularly useful for the purpose of the present invention include 3 H, 125 I, 131 l, 35 S, 14 C, 2 P and 33 P. 12 ⁇ I is preferred for antibody labeling.
  • the label may also be a fluorophore.
  • fluorescent labeled reagent When the fluorescently labeled reagent is exposed to light of the proper wave length, its presence can then be detected due to fluorescence .
  • fluorescent labeling compounds are fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerythrin, phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, o- phthaldehyde and fluorescamine.
  • fluorescence-emitting metals such as 125 Eu, or others of the lanthanide series, may be incorporated into a diagnostic reagent using such metal chelating groups as diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA) of ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid (EDTA) .
  • DTPA diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid
  • EDTA ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid
  • the label may also be a chemiluminescent compound.
  • the presence of the chemiluminescently labeled reagent is then determined by detecting the presence of luminescence that arises during- the course of a chemical reaction.
  • particularly useful chemiluminescent labeling compounds are luminol , isolumino, theromatic acridinium ester, imidazole, acridinium salt and oxalate ester.
  • a bioluminescent compound may be used for labeling. Bioluminescence is a type of chemiluminescence found in biological systems in- which a catalytic protein increases the efficiency of the chemiluminescent reaction.
  • bioluminescent protein The presence of a bioluminescent protein is determined by detecting the presence of luminescence.
  • Important bioluminescent compounds for purposes of labeling are luciferin, luciferase and aequorin.
  • Enzyme labels such as horseradish peroxidase and alkaline phosphatase, are preferred.
  • the signal producing system must also include a substrate for the enzyme. If the enzymatic reaction product is not itself detectable, the SPS will include one or more additional reactants so that a detectable product appears.
  • An enzyme analyte may act as its own label if an enzyme inhibitor is used as a diagnostic reagent.
  • Binding assays may be divided into two basic types, heterogeneous and homogeneous.
  • heterogeneous assays the interaction between the affinity molecule and the analyte does not affect the label, hence, to determine the amount or presence of analyte, bound label must be separated from free label.
  • homogeneous assays the interaction does affect the activity of the label, and therefore analyte levels can be deduced without the need for a separation step.
  • the ABM is insolubilized by coupling it to a macromolecular support, and analyte in the sample is allowed to compete with a known ' quantity of a labeled or specifically labelable analyte analogue.
  • analyte analogue is a molecule capable of competing with analyte for binding to the ABM, and the term is intended to include analyte itself. It may be labeled already, or it may be labeled subsequently by specifically binding the label to a moiety differentiating the analyte analogue from analyte.
  • the solid and liquid phases are separated, and the labeled analyte analogue in one phase is quantified. The higher the level of analyte analogue in the solid phase, i.e., sticking to the ABM, the lower the level of analyte in the sample.
  • both an insolubilized ABM, and a labeled ABM are employed.
  • the analyte is captured by the insolubilized ABM and is tagged by the labeled ABM, forming a ternary complex.
  • the reagents may be added to the sample in either order, or simultaneously.
  • the ABMs may be the same or different.
  • the amount of labeled ABM in the ternary complex is directly proportional to the amount of analyte in the sample.
  • the two embodiments described above are both heterogeneous assays. However, homogeneous assays are conceivable. The key is that the label be affected by whether or not the complex is formed.
  • a label may be conjugated, directly or indirectly (e.g., through a labeled anti-ABM antibody), covalently (e.g., with SPDP) or noncovalently, to the ABM, to produce a diagnostic reagent.
  • the ABM may be conjugated to a solid phase support to form a solid phase ("capture") diagnostic reagent.
  • Suitable supports include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, ⁇ natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, agaroses, and magnetite.
  • the nature of the carrier can be either soluble to some extent or insoluble for the purposes of the present invention.
  • the support material may have virtually any possible structural configuration so long as the coupled molecule is capable of binding to its target.
  • the support configuration may be spherical, as in a bead, or" cylindrical, as in the inside surface of a test tube, or the external surface of a rod.
  • the surface may be flat such as a sheet, test strip, etc.
  • a biological assay measures or detects a biological response of a biological entity to a substance.
  • the biological entity may be a whole organism, an isolated organ or tissue, freshly isolated cells, an immortalized cell line, or a subcellular component (such as a membrane; this term should not be construed as including an isolated receptor) .
  • the entity may be, or may be derived from, an organism which occurs in nature, or which is modified in some way. Modifications may be genetic (including radiation and chemical mutants, and genetic engineering) or somatic (e.g., surgical, chemical, etc.). In the case of a multicellular entity, the modifications may affect some or all cells.
  • the entity need not be the target organism, or a derivative thereof, if there is a reasonable correlation between bioassay activity in the assay entity and biological activity in the target organism.
  • the entity is placed in a particular environment, which may be more or less natural.
  • a culture medium may, but need not, contain serum or serum substitutes, and it may, but need not, include a support matrix of some kind, it may be still, or agitated.
  • It may contain particular biological or chemical agents, or have particular physical parameters (e.g., temperature), that are intended to nourish or challenge the biological entity. There must also be a detectable biological marker for the response.
  • the most common markers are cell survival and proliferation, cell behavior* (clustering, motility) , cell morphology (shape, color) , and biochemical activity (overall DNA synthesis, overall protein synthesis, and specific metabolic activities, such as utilization of particular nutrients, e.g., consumption of oxygen, production of C0 2 , production of organic acids, uptake or discharge of ions) .
  • the direct signal produced by the- biological marker may be transformed by a signal producing system into a different signal which is more observable, for example, a fluorescent or colorimetric signal.
  • the entity, environment, marker and signal producing system are chosen to achieve a clinically acceptable level of sensitivity, specificity and accuracy.
  • the goal will be to identify substances which mediate the biological activity of a natural biological entity, and the assay is carried out directly with that entity.
  • the biological entity is used simply as a model of some more complex (or otherwise inconvenient to work with) biological entity.
  • the model biological entity is used because activity in the model system is considered more predictive of activity in the ultimate natural biological entity than is simple binding activity in an in vitro system.
  • the model entity is used instead of the ultimate entity because the former is more expensive or slower to work with, or because ethical considerations forbid working with the ultimate entity yet.
  • the model entity may be naturally occurring, if the model entity usefully models the ultimate entity under some conditions.
  • Transgenic animals such as transgenic mice, rats, and rabbits, have been found useful as model systems.
  • the receptor may be functionally connected to a signal (biological marker) producing system, which may be endogenous or exogenous to the cell.
  • signal biological marker
  • the binding of a peptide to the target protein results in a screenable or selectable phenotypic change, without resort to fusing the target protein (or a ligand binding moiety thereof) " to an endogenous protein.
  • the target protein is endogenous to the host cell, or is substantially identical to an endogenous receptor so that it can take advantage of the latter's native signal transduction pathway.
  • sufficient elements of the signal transduction pathway normally associated with the target protein may be engineered into the cell so that the cell signals binding to the target protein.
  • a chimera receptor a hybrid of the target protein and an endogenous receptor
  • the chimeric receptor has the ligand binding characteristics of the target protein and the signal transduction characteristics of the endogenous receptor.
  • the normal signal transduction pathway of the endogenous receptor is subverted.
  • the endogenous receptor is inactivated, or the conditions of the assay avoid activation of the endogenous receptor, to improve the signal-to-noise ratio. See Fowlkes USP 5,789,184 for a yeast system.
  • Another type of "one-hybrid” system combines a peptide: DNA-binding domain fusion with an unfused target receptor that possesses an activation domain.
  • the cell-based assay is a two hybrid system.
  • This term implies that the ligand is incorporated into a first hybrid protein, and the receptor into a second hybrid protein.
  • the first hybrid also comprises component A of a signal generating system, and the second hybrid comprises component B of that system.
  • Components A and B by themselves, are insufficient to generate a signal. However, if the ligand binds the receptor, components A and B are brought into su ficiently close proximity so that they can cooperate to generate a signal .
  • Components A and B may naturally occur, or be substantially identical to moieties which naturally occur, as components of a single naturally occurring biomolecule, or they may naturally occur, or be substantially identical to moieties which naturally occur, as separate naturally occurring biomolecules which interact in nature.
  • two-Hybrid System Transcription Factor Type
  • one member of a peptide ligand: receptor binding pair is expressed as a fusion to a DNA-binding domain (DBD) from a transcription factor (this fusion protein is called the “bait"), and the other is expressed as a fusion to a transactivation domain (TAD) (this fusion protein is called the "fish", the "prey”, or the "catch”) .
  • the transactivation domain should be complementary to the DNA-binding domain, i.e., it should interact with the latter so as to activate transcription of a specially designed reporter gene that carries a binding site for the DNA-binding domain.
  • the two fusion proteins must likewise be complementary.
  • This complementarity may be achieved by use of the complementary and separable DNA-binding and transcriptional activator domains of a single transcriptional activator protein, or one may use complementary domains derived from different proteins.
  • the domains may be identical to the native domains, or mutants thereof.
  • the assay members may be fused directly to the DBD or TAD, or fused through an intermediated linker. . . .
  • the target DNA operator may be the. native operator sequence, or a mutant operator. Mutations in the operator may be coordinated with mutations in the DBD and the TAD.
  • a suitable transcription activation system is one comprising the DNA-binding domain from the bacterial repressor LexA and the activation domain from the yeast transcription factor Gal4, with the reporter gene operably linked to the LexA operator. It is not necessary to employ the intact target receptor; j st the ligand-binding moiety is sufficient.
  • the two fusion proteins may be expressed from the same or different vectors.
  • the activatable reporter gene may be expressed from, the same vector as either fusion protein (or both proteins) , or from a third vector.
  • Potential DNA-binding domains include Gal4, LexA, and mutant domains substantially identical to the above.
  • Potential activation domains include E.
  • the assay system will include a signal producing system, too.
  • the first element of this system is a reporter gene operably linked to an operator responsive to the DBD and TAD of choice. The expression of this reporter gene will result, directly or indirectly, in a selectable or screenable phenotype (the signal).
  • the signal producing ' system may include, besides the reporter gene, additional genetic or biochemical elements which cooperate in the production of the signal. Such an element could be, for example, a selective agent in the cell growth medium.
  • the system may include more than one reporter gene.
  • the sensitivity of the system may be adjusted by, e.g., use of competitive inhibitors of any step in the activation or signal production process, increasing or decreasing the number of operators, using a stronger or weaker DBD or TAD,. etc.
  • the assay is said to be a selection.
  • the signal merely results in a detectable phenotype by which the signaling cell may be differentiated from the same cell in a nonsignaling state (either way being a living cell)
  • the assay is a screen.
  • the term -' ⁇ screening assay may be used in a broader sense to include a selection.
  • narrower sense we will use the term “nonselective screen” .
  • Screening and selection may be for or against the peptide: target protein or compound: target protein interaction.
  • Preferred assay cells are microbial (bacterial, yeast, algal, protozooal) , invertebrate, vertebrate (esp. mammalian, particularly human) .
  • the best developed two- hybrid assays are yeast and mammalian systems.
  • two hybrid assays are used to determine whether a protein X and a protein Y interact, by virtue of their ability to reconstitute the interaction of the DBD and the TAD.
  • augmented two-hybrid assays have been used to detect interactions that depend on a third, non- protein ligand.
  • two-hybrid assays see Brent and Finley, Jr., Ann. Rev. Genet., 31:663-704 (1997); Fremont- Racine, et al., Nature Genetics, 277-281 (16 July 1997); Allen, et al . , TIBS, 511-16 (Dec. 1995); LeCrenier, et al .
  • reporter Enzyme type In another embodiment, the components A and B reconstitute an enzyme which is not a transcription factor.
  • the effect of the reconstitution of the enzyme is a phenotypic change which may be a screenable change, a selectable change, or both.
  • Radio-labeled ABM may be administered to the human or animal subject. Administration is typically by injection, e.g., intravenous or arterial or other means of administration in a quantity sufficient to permit subsequent dynamic and/or static imaging using suitable radio-detecting devices.
  • the dosage is the smallest amount capable of providing a diagnostically effective image, and may be determined by means conventional in the art, using known radio-imaging agents as a guide. Typically, the imaging is carried out on the whole body of the subject, or on that portion of the body or organ relevant to the condition or disease under study. The amount of radio-labeled ABM accumulated at a given point in time in relevant target organs can then be quantified.
  • a particularly suitable radio-detecting device is a scintillation camera, such as a gamma camera.
  • a scintillation camera is a stationary device that can be used to image distribution of radio-labeled ABM.
  • the detection device in the camera senses the radioactive decay, the distribution of which can be recorded.
  • Data produced by the imaging system can be digitized.
  • the digitized information can be analyzed over time discontinuously or continuously.
  • the digitized data can be processed to produce images, called frames, of the pattern of uptake of the radio-labeled ABM in the target organ at a discrete point in time. I most continuous (dynamic) studies, quantitative data is obtained by observing changes in distributions of radioactive decay in target organs over time.
  • a time-activity analysis of the data will illustrate uptake through clearance of the radio-labeled binding protein by the target organs with time .
  • the radioisotope must be selected with a view to obtaining good quality resolution upon imaging, should- be safe for diagnostic use in humans and animals, and should preferably have a short physical half-life so as to decrease the amount of radiation received by the body.
  • the radioisotope used should preferably be pharmacologically inert, and, in the quantities administered, should- " not ' have any substantial physiological effect .
  • the ABM may be radio-labeled with different isotopes of iodine, for example 13 I, 125 I, or 131 I (see for example, U.S. Patent 4,609,725).
  • the extent of radio-labeling must, however be monitored, since it will affect the calculations made based on the imaging results (i.e. a diiodinated ABM will result in twice the radiation count of a similar monoiodinated ABM over the same time frame) .
  • radioisotopes other than 125 I for labeling in order to decrease the total dosimetry exposure of the human body and to optimize the detectability of the labeled molecule (though this radioisotope can be used if circumstances require) . Ready availability for clinical use is also a factor. Accordingly, for human applications, preferred radio-labels are for example, 99 ⁇ Tc, 67 Ga, 68 Ga, 90 Y, ⁇ In, 113ra In, 123 I, 18S Re, 18S Re or 211 At .
  • the radio-labeled ABM may be prepared by various methods. These include radio-halogenation by the chloramine - T method or the lactoperoxidase method and subsequent purification by HPLC (high pressure liquid chromatography) , for example as described by J. Gutkowska et al in
  • Radio-labeling can be used, such as IODOBEADSTM.
  • IODOBEADSTM There are a number of different methods of delivering the radio-labeled ABM to the end-user. It may be administered by any means that enables the active agent to reach the agent's site of action in the body of a mammal. Because proteins are subject to being digested when administered orally, parenteral administration, i.e., intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, would ordinarily be used to optimize absorption of an ABM, such as an antibody, which is a protein.
  • mice Animal Models . Obesity and subsequent " hyperinsulinemia and hyperglycemia were induced by feeding a group of 3 week old mice (50 C57BL/6 males) a high-fat diet (Bio-Serve, Frenchtown, NJ, #F1850 High Carbohydrate-High Fat; 56% of calories from fat, 16% from protein and 27% from carbohydrates) . Another group of 3 week old mice (20 C57B1/6 males) were fed the normal control diet (PMI Nutrition International Inc., Brentwood, MO, Prolab RMH3000; 14% of calories from, fat, 16% from protein and 60% from carbohydrates) . The mice were placed onto the respective diets immediately following weaning. Animal, weights were determined weekly.
  • a high-fat diet Bio-Serve, Frenchtown, NJ, #F1850 High Carbohydrate-High Fat; 56% of calories from fat, 16% from protein and 27% from carbohydrates
  • PMI Nutrition International Inc. Brentwood, MO, Prolab RMH3000
  • the mice were placed onto the respective diet
  • Fasting blood-glucose and plasma insulin measurements were determined after 2, 4, 8 and 16 weeks on the respective diets. Normal weight, normal fasting blood glucose and normal fasting plasma insulin levels are defined as the respective mean values of the animals fed the control diet. Two of the "most typical" animals were selected for each group (Control, hyperinsulinemic and Diabetic) at each time point ( 2,4, 8, and 16 weeks after commencement of diet) for sacrifice. The selected mice were sacrificed and pancreas tissue obtained and immediately processed for RNA isolation. Fasting Blood Glucose Levels.
  • mice were fasted 8 hours and blood glucose levels was measured from a drop of blood taken from the tip of the tail of fasted (8 hr) mice using a Lifescan Genuine One Touch glucometer. All measurements occurred between 2:00 p and 5:00 pm.
  • Plasma insulin measurements Plasma insulin measurements. Blood was collected from the tail of fasted (8 hr) mice into a heparinized capillary tube and stored on ice. All collections occurred between 2:00 pm and 5:00 pm. Plasma was separated from red blood cells by centrifugation for 10 minutes at 8000 x g and then stored at -2 ' 0'C. Insulin concentrations were determined using the Ultra-Sensitive Rat Insulin ELISA kit (ALPCO) and rat insulin standards (ALPCO) essentially as instructed by the manufacturer. Values were adjusted by a factor of 1.23 as determined by the manufacturer to correct for the species difference in cross- reactivity with the antibody.
  • ALPCO Ultra-Sensitive Rat Insulin ELISA kit
  • ALPCO rat insulin standards
  • RNA isolation Total RNA was isolated from pancreas using the RNA STAT-60 Total RNA/mRNA Isolation Reagent according to the manufacturer's instructions (Tel-Test, Friendswood, TX) .
  • RNA was quantified and assessed for quality on a Bioanalyzer RNA 6000 Nano chip (Agilent) .
  • Each chip contained an interconnected set of gel-filled channels that allowed for molecular sieving of nucleic acids. Pin- - electrodes in the chip were used to create electrokinetic forces capable of driving molecules through these micro- channels to perform electrophoretic separations. Ribosomal peaks were measured by fluorescence signal and displayed in an electropherogram. A successful total RNA sample featured 2 distinct ribosomal peaks (18S and 28S rRNA) . Biotinylated cRNA Hybridization Target.
  • RNA was prepared for use as a hybridization target as described in the manufacturer's instructions for CodeLink Expression Bioarrays (TM) (Amersham Biosciences) .
  • the CodeLink Expression Bioarrays utilize nucleic acid hybridization of a biotin-labeled complementary RNA(cRNA) target with DNA oligonucleotide probes attached to a gel matrix.
  • the biotin-labeled cRNA target is prepared by a linear amplification method.
  • Poly (A) + RNA (within the total RNA population) is primed for reverse transcription by a DNA oligonucleotide containing a T7 RNA polymerase promoter 5' to a- (dT) 24 sequence.
  • the cDNA serves as the template in an in vi tro transcription- (IVT) reaction to produce the target cRNA.
  • IVT in vi tro transcription-
  • the IVT is performed in the presence of biotinylated nucleotides to label the target cRNA. This procedure results in a 50-200 fold linear amplification of the input poly (A) + RNA.
  • the oligonucleotide probes were provided by the Codelink Uniset Mouse I Bioarray (Amersham, product code 300013) . Amine-terminated oligonucleotide probes are attached to a three-dimensional polyacrylamide gel matrix. There are 10,000 oligonucleotide probes, each specific to a well-characterized mouse gene. Each mouse gene is representative of a unique gene cluster from the fourth quarter 2001 Genbank Unigene build. There are also 500 control probes. The sequences of the probes are proprietary to Amersham. However, for each probe, Amersham identifies the corresponding mouse gene by NCBI accession number, OGS, LocusLink, Unigene Cluster ID, and description (name) .
  • Hybridization Using the cRNA target, the hybridization reaction mixture is prepared and loaded into array chambers for bioarray processing as set forth in the manufacturer's instructions for CodeLink Gene Expression BioarraysTM (Amerhsam Biosciences) . Each sample is hybridized to an individual microarray. Hybridization is at 37°C. The hybridization buffer is prepared as set forth in the Motorola instructions. Hybridization to the microarray is detected with an avidinated fluorescent reagent, Streptavidin-Alexa Fluor ® 647 (Amersham) .
  • mice Normal mice compared to hyperinsulinemic mice at 2, 4, 8 and 16 weeks on normal vs. high-fat diet.
  • mice compared to hyperinsulinemic/hyperglycemic mice at 2, 4, 8 and 16 weeks on normal vs. high-fat diet .
  • Hyperinsulinemic compared to hyperinsulinemic/hyperglycemic mice at 2 , 4, 8 and 16 weeks on high-fat diets.
  • Nucleotide sequences and predicted amino acid sequences were compared to public domain databases using the Blast 2.0 program (National Center for Biotechnology Information, National Institutes of Health) . Nucleotide sequences were displayed using ABI prism Edit View 1.0.1 (PE Applied Biosystems, Foster City, CA) . Nucleotide database searches were conducted with the then current version of BLASTN 2.0.12, see Altschul, et al . , "Gapped BLAST and PSI-BLAST: a new generation of protein database .search programs", Nucleic Acids Res., 25:3389-3402 (1997) . Searches employed the default parameters, unless otherwise stated.
  • blastN For blastN searches, the default was the blastN matrix (1,-3), with gap penalties of 5 for existence and 2 for extension. Protein database searches were conducted with the then- current version of BLAST X, see Altschul et al . (1997), supra. Searches employed the default parameters, unless otherwise stated.
  • the scoring matrix was BLOSUM62, with gap costs of 11 for existence and 1 for extension.
  • the standard low complexity filter was used. "ref” indicates that NCBI's RefSeq is the source database. The identifier that follows is a RefSeq accession number, not a GenBank accession number. "RefSeq sequences are derived from GenBank and provide non-redundant curated data representing our current knowledge of known genes.
  • Northern analysis may be used to confirm the results.
  • Favorable and unfavorable genes, identified as described above, or fragments thereof, will be used as probes in Northern hybridization analyses to confirm their differential expression.
  • Total RNA isolated from subject mice will be resolved by agarose gel electrophoresis through a 1% agarose, 1 % formaldehyde denaturing gel, transferred to positively charged nylon membrane, and hybridized to a probe labeled with [32P] dCTP that was generated from the aforementioned gene or fragment using the Random Primed DNA Labeling Kit (Roche, Palo Alto, CA) , or to a probe labeled with digoxigenin (Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Indianapolis, IN), according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Real-Time RNA Analysis may also.be used for confirmation.
  • RNA will be converted to cDNA and then probed with gene-specific primers made for each clone.
  • "Real-time” incorporation of fluorescent dye will be measured to determine the amount of specific transcript present in each sample. Sample differences (control vs. hyperinsulinemic, hyperinsulinemic vs. diabetic, or control vs. diabetic) will be evaluated. Confirmation using several independent animals is desirable.
  • NISH nonisotopic in si tu hybridizations
  • si tu hybridizations may also be performed on mouse tissues using cRNA probes generated from differentially expressed DNAs. These cRNA's will hybridize, to their corresponding messenger RNA' s present in cells and will provide information regarding the particular cell types within a tissue that is expressing the particular gene as well as the relative level of gene expression.
  • the cRNA probes may be generated by in vi tro transcription of template cDNA by Sp6 or T7 RNA polymerase in the presence of digoxigenin-11-UTP (Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Mannheim, Germany; Pardue, M.L. 1985. In: In situ hybridization, Nucleic acid hybridization, a practical approach: IRL Press, Oxford, 179- 202) .
  • Transgenic Animals Transgenic expression may be used to confirm the results.
  • a mouse is engineered to overexpress the favorable or unfavorable mouse gene in question.
  • a mouse is engineered to express the corresponding favorable or unfavorable human gene.
  • a nonhuman animal other than a mouse such as a rat, rabbit, goat, sheep or pig, is engineered to express the favorable or unfavorable mouse or human gene.
  • tissue sections can also be analyzed using Tissuelnformatics, Inc.'s TissueAnalyticsTM software.
  • a single representative section may be cut from each tissue block, placed on a slide, and stained with H&E.
  • Digital images of each slide may be acquired using an research microscope and digital camera (Olympus E600 microscope and Sony DKC-ST5) . These images may be acquired at 20x magnification with a resolution of 0.64 mm/pixel.
  • a hyperquantitative analysis may be performed on the resulting images : First a digital image analysis can identify and annotate structural objects in a tissue using machine vision.
  • Mathematical statistics provides a rich set of additional tools to analyze time resolved data sets of hyperquantitative and gene expression profiles for similarities, including rank correlation, the calculation of regression and correlation coefficients, and clustering. Continuous functions may also be fitted through the data points of individual gene and tissue feature data. Relation between gene expression and hyper-quantitative tissue data may be linear or non-linear, in synchronous or asynchronous arrangements .
  • Example 1 Obesity is increasing at an alarming rate in the United States. In parallel, the incidence of type II diabetes is also rising. We are interested in defining alterations in gene expression that correlate with the development of these conditions in the hopes of reversing these dangerous trends. Insulin plays a major role in regulating blood glucose - levels. It stimulates the uptake of glucose in adipose tissue and striated muscle for storage as intracellular triglycerides and glycogen. Insulin also inhibits the release of glucose from the liver. Normally, this would prevent the rise in blood sugar concentration that occurs after eating. However, in the early stages of type 2 diabetes, resistance to insulin is seen. Initially, production and secretion of insulin from the pancreas increases to compensate for the tissue resistance.
  • HF diet results in significant, progressive increases in body weight and fasting insulin levels in comparison to consumption of the Std diet.
  • Fasting glucose levels of mice on the HF diet were dramatically increased at the first time point assayed (2 weeks) and remained high through the duration of the experiment (16 weeks) .
  • RNA was extracted from the pancreas at each time point.
  • pancreatic genes involved in the development of type 2 diabetes we used microarray analysis to compare RNA expression levels of 10,000 genes in pancreas of high fat diet fed and control diet fed mice at various time points in the progression of type 2 diabetes.
  • Microarray analysis provides a more global picture of gene regulation, allowing the identification of families or groups of genes showing similar expression patterns that potentially imply similar or coordinated roles in disease progression.
  • 115 were up-regulated and 91 down-regulated greater than two-fold in comparisons between 5 the diabetic and non-diabetic mice.
  • Glutathione peroxidase 1 (Gpxl, NM_008160) was one of the most down-regulated genes when comparing HF to Std mice. . It decreased dramatically over the 16 week study.
  • microarray analysis combined with time point sampling can reveal subtle yet consistent changes in gene expression and identify altered metabolic pathways.
  • glutathione peroxidase, S-transferase and synthetase genes represent an interesting family "for further study in pancreas expression, especially in relation to obesity and
  • the master tables reflect applicants' analysis of the gene chip data.
  • Col. 1 The mouse gene (upper) and mouse protein (lower) database accession #s.
  • Col. 2 The corresponding mouse Unigene Cluster, as of the 4 th Quarter 2001 build.
  • Col. 5 The name of the related human protein.
  • Col. 7 The E-value for the alignment performed by the BLAST program. It is worth noting that Unigene considers a Blastx 15 E Value of less than le-6 to be a "match" to the reference sequence of a cluster.
  • bit score and E-value for the alignment is with respect to the alignment of the mouse
  • Master Table 1 is divided into three subtables on the basis of the behavior in col. 3. If a gene has at least one
  • Master Table 2 has just three columns.
  • Col. 2 behavior. Same as col. 3 in Master table 1, Col . 3 : Human protein classes . Based on the related human proteins defined in Master Table 1, Master Table 2 generalizes, if possible as to classes of human proteins which are expected to have similar behavior. For a given mouse gene, several human protein classes may be listed because of the diversity of the human proteins found to be related. In some cases, the stated human protein classes may be hierarchial, e.g., one may be a subset of another. In other cases, the stated classes may be non-overlapping but related. And in yet other cases, the stated classes may be non-overlapping and unrelated. Combinations of the above are also possible.
  • One of the entries should- be a Homo sapiens gene (considered by Unigene to be the most related human gene) ; click on its Unigene record link. Additional information of interest may be accessed by searching with the mouse gene accession # in the Mouse Gene Informatics database, at http://www.informatics.jax.org/.
  • Subtable 1A Favorable Mouse Genes/Proteins and Corresponding Human Genes/Proteins
  • ras homolog gene family member C; Aplysia RAS-related homolog 9(oncogene RHO H9); Aplysia ras-related homolog 9; RhoC; RAS homolog gene family, NP_786886.1 member C (oncogene RHO H9) P08134 RHOCJHUMAN Transforming protein RhoC (H9) TVHURC GTP-binding protein rhoC CAA29969.1 rhoC coding region (AA 1-193) AAC33179.1 GTPase AAH07245.1 ras homolog gene family, member C AAH09177.1 ras homolog gene family, member C AAM21119.1 AF498972_1 small GTP binding protein RhoC ras homolog gene family, member A; Aplysia ras-related homolog 12; Rho12; NP_001655.1 RhoA; Ras homolpg.gene family, member A (oncogene RHO H12
  • NP_055792.1 apoptotic chromatin condensation inducer in the nucleus; acinus AAD56724.1 acinusL BAA31645.2 KIAA0670 protein T00365 hypothetical protein KIAA0670 - human (fragment) AAD56725.1 acinusS CAD62309.1 unnamed protein product AAD56726.1 acinusS lysophospholipase I; lysophospholipase 1 ; lysophospholipid-specific NP_006321.1 lysophospholipase; acyl-protein thioesterase-1 AAC31610.1 lysophospholipase AAD26993.1 lysophospholipase AAG10063.1 AF291053_1 acyl-protein thioesterase-1 AAH08652.1 AAH08652 lysophospholipase I AAH10397.1 AAH10397 lysophospholipase I A Chain A, Crystal Structure Of The Human
  • Subtable IC Mixed Mouse Genes/Proteins and the Corresponding Human Proteins
  • Subtable 2A Classes Corresponding to Favorable Mouse
  • caspase 7 apoptosis-related cysteine protease caspase 7 isoform alpha caspase 7 isoform alpha precursor; ICE-like apoptotic protease 3; apoptotic protease MCH-3; Lice2 alpha/beta/gamma; (ICE-LAP3); (CMH-1) caspase 7 isoform delta caspase 7 isoform delta, large subunit; ICE-like apoptotic protease 3; apoptotic protease MCH-3; Lice2 alpha/beta/gamma Lice2 alpha Lice2 beta cysteine protease Lice2 gamma cysteine protease Mch3 isoform alpha F:(C-IR)+3.24 phosphorylase uridine phosphorylase Uver-specific uridine phosphorylase Similar to uridine phosphorylase Similar to uridine phosphorylase similar to uridine phosphorylase; similar
  • G-protein coupled receptor mediates neurotensin, such as hypotension, hyperglycemia, hypothermia, antinociception, and regulation of intestinal motflity and secretion neurotensin receptor neurotensin receptor 1
  • Neurotensin receptor type 1 (NT-R-1) (High-affinity levocabastine-insensitive neurotensin receptor) (NTRH) neurotensin receptor 2 neurotensin receptor 2; neurotensin receptor, type 2; levocabastine-sensitive neurotensin receptor; (NT-R-2); (NTR2 receptor) Similar to neurotensin receptor 2 hypothetical protein FLJ20152 binding protein SM-11044 binding protein Similar to S.cerevisiae EMP70 protein precursor (S25110) isomerase protein disulfide isomerase protein protein dsulfide isomerase-related protein protein disulfide isomerase-related protein 5 Protein disulfide isomerase A6 precursor (Protein disulfide isomerase P5) human P5 P5 protein precursor binding
  • CD36 antigen coUagen type I receptor, thrombospondin receptor
  • CD36 antigen coUagen type I receptor, tlirombospondin receptor
  • CD36 antigen coUagen type I receptor, thrombospondin rece ⁇ tor-Uke 2
  • lysosomal integral membrane protein E lysosomal integral membrane protein E Lysosome membrane protein E (LIMP TT) (85 kDa lysosomal membrane sialoglycoprotein) (LGP85) (CD36 antigen-like 2) 85kDa lysosomal sialoglycoprotein glycoprotein GPElb/GPrV Platelet glycoprotein TV (GPTV) (GPIEB) (CD36 antigen) (PAS TV) (PAS-4 protein) F:(C-D)+2.56 Kinase protein kinase serine/threonine protein
  • Uprin Uprin-alpha Liprins interact with members of LAR family of fransmembrane protein tyrosine phosphatases interaction may regulate the disassembly of focal adhesion and thus help orchestrate cell-matrix interactions Hprin-alpha2 M ⁇ rin-alpha4 similar to Uprin alpha 4 [Rattus norvegicus] PTPRF interacting protein alpha 1 isoform b; LAR-interacting protein 1 LAR-interacting
  • Subtable 2B Unfavorable Mouse Genes/Proteiris and Human Protein Classes
  • dJ8L15.1 homeodomam-interacting protein kinase 3 Fas-interacting serme/threonine kinase 3 receptor sperm receptor zona peUucida ZP2 zona pellucida ZP2 glycoprotein zona peUucida glycoprotein 2 preproprotein; zona pellucida sperm-binding protein 2 precursor; zona pellucida protein A Zona peUucida sperm-binding protein 2 precursor (Zona peUucida glycoprotein ZP2) (Zona peUucida protein A) spe ⁇ n-binding glycoprotein ZP2 precursor phosphatase protein phosphatase FYVE dotna -confaihing dual specificity protein phosphatase FYVE-DSPla FYVE domam-containing dual specificity protein phosphatase FYVE-DSPlb FYVE dornam-containing dual specificity protein phosphatase FYVE-DSPlc FYVE domam-containing dual specificity protein phosphatas
  • ⁇ 70 ribosomal S6 kinase alpha-I Ribosomal protein S6 kinase alpha 1 (S6K-alpha 1) (90 kDa ribosomalprotein S6 kinase 1) (p90-RSK 1) (Ribosomal S6 kinase 1)(RSK-1) (pp90RSKl) p70 ribosomal S6 kinase alpha-II Ribosomal protein S6 kinase alpha 3 (S6K-alpha 3) (90 kDa ribosomal protein S6 kinase 3) (p90-RSK 3) (Ribosomal S6 kinase 2) (RSK-2) (pp90RSK2) (Insuhri-stimulated protein kinase 1) (ISPK-1) p70 ribosomal S6 kinase beta Ribosomal protein S6 kinase beta 2 (S6K-
  • Acetylcholinesterase hydrophiUc form precursor Acetylcholinesterase precursor (AChE) acetylcholinesterase precursor, brain spUce form acetylcholinesterase acetylcholinesterase Pi-linked form precursor apoptosis-related acetylcholinesterase neuroUgin 2 similar to neuroUgin 2 [Rattus norvegicus] neuroUgin 4; neuroUgin X neuroUgin X neuroUgin Y NLGN4 protein U:(C-D)2.53 Protease type I integral membrane glycoprotein and aspartic protease APP beta-secretase beta-site APP cleaving enzyme beta-site APP-cleaving enzyme 1 isoform A preproprotein; beta-site amyloid beta A4 precursor protein-cleaving enzyme; APP beta-secretase; aspartyl protease 2; beta-site amyloid precursor protein cleaving enzyme; memapsin
  • Subtable 2C Mixed Mouse Genes/Proteins and Human Protein Classes
  • Ci tation of documents herein is not intended as an admission that any ,of the documents cited herein is pertinent prior art, or an admission that the cited documents is considered material to the patentabili ty of any of the claims of the present application . All statements as to the date or representation as to the contents of these documents is based on the information available to the applicant and does not consti tute any admission as to the correctness of the dates or contents of these documents .
  • the appended claims are to be trea ted as a non-limi ting reci tation of preferred embodiments.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)

Abstract

Mouse genes differentially expressed in comparisons of normal vs. hyperinsulinemic, hyperinsulinemic vs. type 2 diabetic, and normal vs. type 2 diabetes pancreas by gene chip analysis have been identified, as have corresponding human genes and proteins. The human molecules, or antagonists thereof, may be used for protection against hyperinsulinemia or type 2 diabetes, or their sequelae.

Description

DIAGNOSIS OF HYPERINSULINEMIA AND TYPE. I DIABETES AND PROTECTION AGAINST SAME BASED ON GENES DIFFERENTIALLY EXPRESSED IN PANCREAS CELLS (12.1) Cross -Reference to Related Applications Anti -Aging Applications . Mice with a disrupted growth hormone receptor/binding protein gene enjoy an increased lifespan. In U.S. Prov. Ap l . 60/485,222, filed July 8, 2003 (Kopchickδ) mouse genes differentially expressed in comparisons of gene expression in growth hormone receptor/binding protein gene-disrupted mouse livers and normal mouse livers were identified, as were corresponding human genes and proteins . It was suggested that the human molecules, or antagonists thereof, could be used for protection against faster-than-normal biological aging, or to achieve slower-than-normal biological aging. It was eilso taught that the human molecules may also be used as markers of biological aging. In provisional application Ser. No. 60/474,606, filed June 2, 2003 (our docket Kopchick7-USA) , our research group used a gene chip to study the,genetic changes in the liver of C57B1/6J mice that occur at frequent intervals of the aging process. Differential hybridization techniques were used to identify mouse genes that are differentially expressed in mice, depending upon their age. The level of gene expression of approximately 10,000 mouse genes (from the Amersham Codelink UniSet Mouse I Bioarray, product code: 300013) in the liver of mice with average ages of 35, 49, 56, 77, 118, 133, 207, 403, 558 and 725 days was determined. In essence, complementary RNA derived from mice of different ages was screened for hybridization with oligonucleotide probes each specific to a particular mouse gene, each gene in turn representative of a particular mouse gene cluster (Uhigene) . Mouse genes which were differentially expressed (younger vs. older), as measured by different levels of hybridization of the respective cRNA samples with the particular probe corresponding to that mouse gene, were identified. Related human genes and proteins were identified by sequence comparisons to the mouse gene or protein. In the international appl . Kopchick7A-PCT, filed June 2, 2004, we added some additional studies of CIDE-A (see below) . In a like manner, the effect of aging on the expression of genes in mouse skeletal muscle was studied, see provisional application Ser. No. 60/566,068, filed April 29, 2004 (our docket Kopchickl4-USA) .
Aπ i-DiaJbetes Applications . In U.S. Provisional Appl. Ser. No. 60/458,398 (our docket Kelderl-USA) , filed March 31, 2003, members of our research group describe the identification of genes differentially expressed in normal vs. hyperinsulinemic, hyperinsulinemic vs. type II diabetic, -.or normal vs. type II diabetic mouse liver. Forward- and reverse-substracted cDNA libraries were prepared, clones were isolated, and differentially expressed cDNA inserts were sequenced and compared with sequences in publicly ... available sequence databases . The corresponding mouse and human genes and proteins were identified. The purpose of our research group's provisional application Ser. No. 60/460,415 (our docket: Kσpchick6- USA) , filed April 7, 2003, was similar, but complementary ~ RNA, derived from RNA of mouse liver, was screened against a mouse gene chip. See also 60/506,716, filed Sept. 30, 2003 (Kopchickδ .1) . Gene chip analyses have also been used to identify genes differentially expressed in normal vs. hyperinsulinemic, hyperinsulinemic vs. type II diabetic, or normal vs. type II diabetic mouse pancreas, see U.S. Provisional Appl. 60/517,376, filed Nov. 6, 2003 (Kopchickl2) and muscle, see U.S Provisional Appl. 60/547,512, filed Feb. 26, 2004 (Kopchickl5) . Other differential hybridization applications . The use of differential hybridization to identify genes and proteins is also described in our research group's Ser. No. PCT/US00/12145 (Kopchick 3A-PCT) , Ser. No. PCT/US00/12366 (Kopchick4A-PCT) , and Ser. No. 60/400,052 (Kopchick5)-. All of the foregoing applications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
BACKGROUND"OF THE INVENTION
Field of the Invention The invention relates to various nucleic acid molecules and proteins, and their use in (1) diagnosing hyperinsulinemia and type II diabetes, or conditions associated with their development, and (2) protecting mammals (including humans) against them.
Description of the Background Art Anatomy and Physiology of the Pancreas The pancreas is an elongated, tapered organ located across the back of the abdomen, behind the stomach. The right side of the organ (called the head) is the widest part of the organ and lies in the curve of the duodenum, the first division of the small intestine. The tapered left side (called the body of the pancreas) extends slightly upward and ends near the spleen (called the tail) . The pancreas is covered with a very thin connective tissue capsule which extends inward as septa, partitioning the gland into lobules. The pancreas is composed of two major types of tissue. The bulk of the pancreas is composed of pancreatic exocrine cells and their associated ducts. The pancreatic exocrine cells are arranged in grape-like clusters called acini. The exocrine cells are packed with membrane-bound secretory granules which contain digestive enzymes that are exocytosed into the lumen of the acinus. Exocrine secretions from acini flow successively through intercalated ducts, intralobular ducts, interlobular ducts and finally into the duodenum through the main pancreatic duct.
The enzymes secreted by the exocrine tissue in the pancreas help break down carbohydrates, fats, proteins, and acids in the duodenum. The three major classes are proteases, pancreatic lipases and amylase. These enzymes travel down the pancreatic duct into the bile duct in an inactive form. When they enter the duodenum, they are activated. The exocrine tissue also secretes a bicarbonate to neutralize stomach acid in the duodenum. Secretion from the exocrine pancreas is regulated predominantly by three enzymes secreted by the enteric endocrine system: cholecystokinin, secretin, and gastrin. Embedded within the exocrine tissue are roughly one million small clusters of cells called the Islets of Langerhans, which are the endocrine cells of the pancreas. The Islets of Langerhans are composed of four hormone- producing cell types: insulin-producing beta cells, glucagon-producing alpha cells, somatostatin-producing delta cells, and pancreatic polypeptide (PP) -producing cells. Beta cells make up -70% of the cells in the islet and tend to be more centrally located. Alpha cells make up most of the rest of the islet and are generally near the periphery of the.islet. Delta cells tend to be in the periphery of the islet, as are the least abundant PP-producing cells . Insulin has the following functions: 1) It increases the rate of glucose metabolism, and glucose that is not - needed immediately by the cells is changed into glycogen for storage (in the liver, skeletal muscles, and skin) , and fat (especially for storage in the adipose tissue and liver) ; 2) It decreases the glucose level in the blood .and increases glucose transport to skeletal, heart, smooth muscle, and fat cells. It does not affect glucose transport to the brain or red blood cells; 3) It increases transport of amino acids into the cells and causes an increase in protein synthesis; 4) It works along with growth hormone to promote growth. With a lack of insulin, the liver will start breaking down glycogen and forming new glucose (gluconeogenesis) . Fats will also be released into the blood in the form of free fatty acids. Amino acids will be released into the blood and very little protein synthesis will take place.
Over time with a lack of insulin, acetone and ketone bodies will occur (due to largely burning fats instead of carbohydrates) - this can lead to a state of acidosis. Also "protein wasting" occurs and can lead to extreme weakness, weight loss, and organ dysfunction. Glucagon' s main function is to break down glycogen into glucose and to simulate gluconeogenesis, thus increasing the blood glucose level. When blood glucose levels drop below 70 mg per 100 ml of blood, glucagon is secreted in large quantities to prevent hypoglycemia and make sure the brain is getting enough glucose (its major nutrient) . If left uncontrolled, glucagon could deplete the liver of glycogen within four hours . Epinephrine and cortisol released by the adrenals also raise blood sugar, as does growth hormone released from the anterior pituitary.
Diseases affecting the Pancreas Diabetes. A deficiency of insulin in the body results in diabetes mellitus, which affects about 13 million individuals in the United States. It is characterized by a high blood glucose (sugar) level and glucose spilling into the urine due to a deficiency of insulin. As more glucose concentrates in the urine, more water is excreted, resulting in extreme thirst, rapid weight loss, drowsiness, fatigue, a.nd possibly dehydration. Because the cells of the diabetic cannot use glucose for fuel, the body uses stored protein and fat for energy, which leads to a buildup of acid (acidosis) in the blood. If this condition is prolonged, the person can fall into a diabetic coma, characterized by deep labored breathing and fruity-odored breath. There are two types of diabetes mellitus, Type I and Type II. Type II diabetes is the predominant form found in the Western world; fewer than 8% of diabetic Americans have the type I disease.
Type I diabetes . In Type I diabetes, formerly called juvenile-onset or insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, the pancreas cannot produce insulin. People with Type I diabetes must have daily insulin injections. But they need to avoid taking too much insulin because that can lead to insulin shock, which begins with a mild hunger. This is quickly followed by sweating, shallow breathing, dizziness, palpitations, trembling, and mental confusion. As the blood sugar falls, the body tries to compensate by breaking down fat and protein to make more sugar. Eventually, low blood sugar leads to a decrease in the sugar supply to the brain, resulting in a loss of consciousness. Eating a sugary food can prevent insulin shock until appropriate medical measures can be taken. Type I diabetics are often characterized by their low or absent levels of circulating endogenous insulin, i.e., hypoinsulinemia (1) . Islet, cell antibodies causing damage to the pancreas are frequently present at diagnosis. Injection of exogenous insulin is required to prevent ketosis and sustain life.
Type' II diabetes . Type -II diabetes, formerly called adult-onset or non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM) , can occur at any age. The pancreas can produce insulin, but the cells -do not respond to it. Type II diabetes is a metabolic disorder that affects approximately 17 million Americans. It is estimated that another 10 million individuals are "prone" to becoming diabetic, These vulnerable individuals can become resistant to insulin, a pancreatic hormone that signals glucose (blood sugar) uptake by fat and muscle . In order to maintain normal glucose levels, the islet cells of the pancreas produce more insulin, resulting in a condition called hyperinsulinemia. When the pancreas can no longer produce enough insulin to compensate for the insulin resistance, and thereby maintain normal glucose levels, hyperglycemia (elevated blood glucose) results, and type II diabetes is diagnosed. Early Type II diabetics are often characterized by hyperinsulinemia and resistance to insulin. Late Type II diabetics may be normoinsulinemic or hypoinsulinemic. Type II diabetics are usually not insulin dependent or prone to ketosis under normal circumstances. Little is known about the disease progression from the normoinsulinemic state to the hyperinsulinemic state, and from the hyperinsulinemic state to the Type II diabetic state. As stated above, type II diabetes is a metabolic disorder that is characterized by insulin resistance and impaired glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (2,3,4). However, Type II diabetes and atherosclerotic disease are viewed as consequences of having the insulin resistance syndrome (IRS) for many years (5) . The current theory of the pathogenesis of Type II diabetes is often referred to. as the "insulin resistance/islet cell exhaustion" theory. According to this theory, a condition causing insulin resistance compels the pancreatic islet cells to hypersecrete insulin in order to maintain glucose homeostasis. However, after many years of hypersecretion, the islet cells eventually fail and the symptoms of clinical diabetes are manifested. Therefore, this theory implies that, at some point, peripheral hyperinsulinemia will be an antecedent of Type II diabetes. Peripheral hyperinsulinemia can be viewed as the difference- between what is produced by the β cell minus that which is taken up by the liver. Therefore, peripheral hyperinsulinemia can be caused by increased β cell production, decreased hepatic uptake or some combination --of both. It is also important to note that it is not possible to determine the origin of insulin resistance once it is established since the onset of peripheral hyperinsulinemia leads to a condition of global insulin resistance. Multiple environmental and genetic factors are involved in the development of insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia and type II diabetes. An important risk factor for the development of insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia and type II diabetes is obesity, particularly visceral obesity (6,7,8). Type II diabetes exists world-wide, but in developed societies, the prevalence has risen as the average age of the population increases and the average individual becomes more obese .
Obesi ty and Diabetes . Obesity is a serious arid growing problem in the United States. Obesity-related health risks include high blood pressure, hardening of the arteries, cardiovascular disease, and Type II diabetes (also known as non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, Type II diabetes) (9, 10,11) . Recent studies show that 85% of the individuals with Type II diabetes are obese (12) . Treatment of Diabetes . For many years, treatment was insulin therapy for Type I and oral sulfonylureas and/or insulin therapy for Type II. Metformin (glucophage) was the first antidiabetic drug • approved by FDA (May 1995) for the treatment of Type II diabetes since the oral sulfonylureas were introduced in 1984. Metformin promotes the use of insulin already in the blood. This May 1995 approval was followed by the September 1995 approval of another antidiabetic drug, Acarbose (precose) . It slows down the digestion and absorption of complex sugars, which reduces blood sugar levels after meals. Before 1982, insulin was purified from beef or pork pancreas. This was a problem for those diabetics allergic to animal insulin. Researchers produced a synthetic insulin called humulin. Approved by FDA in 1982, it was the first genetically engineered consumer health product manufactured for diabetics. Synthetic insulins can be produced in unlimited quantities. Another possible treatment for diabetes includes surgically replacing the pancreas' endocrine tissues (islets of Langerhans) with healthy islet of Langerhans tissue grafts. Since 1988, 45 patients worldwide have undergone successful transplantation.
Complications . Complications of diabetes (end organ damage) include retinopathy, neuropathy, and nephropathy (traditionally designated as microvascular complications) as well as atherosclerosis (a macrovascular complication) . Early stages of hyperglycemia can usually be controlled by an alteration in diet and increasing the amount of exercise, but drug treatment, including insulin, may be required. It has been shown that meticulous blood glucose control can often slow down or halt the progression of diabetic complications if caught early enough (1) . However, tight metabolic control is extremely difficult to achieve. Cystic Fibrosis The major problem of cystic fibrosis, the number' one genetic killer disease of children in the United States, is that the body overproduces thick, sticky mucus. The mucus ■ blocks the pancreatic ducts, which impedes the flow of the pancreatic juices from the pancreas into the duodenum of the small intestines. Food cannot be properly digested. Without treatment, children with cystic fibrosis suffer from malnutrition and constant diarrhea; their average life expectancy is 21. Pancreatic enzyme preparations are usually used to minimize the disease's effects on the pancreas. Pancreatic juices contain enzymes for digesting all three major food types (proteins, carbohydrates and fats) , as well as quantities of bicarbonate ions, which pla an important role in neutralizing the acid emptied by the stomach into the duodenum. The most important enzyme for fat digestion is pancreatic lipase, which is capable of changing fat into glycerol fatty acids and cholesterol. Hormones regulate pancreatic secretions. Food enters the small intestine. The hormones secretin and cholecystokinin cause the pancreas to create large quantities' of fluid containing bicarbonate ions, which neutralizes the acid stomach contents.
Pancreatitis Another common disease associated with the exocrine function of the pancreas is pancreatitis (inflammation of the pancreas), which can be either acute or chronic. The most common cause of acute pancreatitis is blockage by a gallstone of the main secretory duct from the pancreas as well as the common bile duct. When this happens, large quantities of pancreatic secretions pool in the pancreas and can digest the entire pancreas within a few hours . But because the islets of Langerhans are not adversely affected, the pancreas can continue secreting insulin. Acute pancreatitis is a condition demanding immediate medical attention. It is characterized by abdominal pain, vomiting, abdominal swelling and gas, fever, muscle aches, and a drop in blood pressure. When appropriately treated, the effects of acute pancreatitis usually calm down within five to seven days. Treatment includes stopping oral consumption and providing nourishment only with intravenous fluids. Chronic pancreatitis occurs when acute pancreatitis continues until pancreatic function is greatly diminished. Symptoms include persistent pain in the upper abdomen which can radiate to the back and last for days or weeks, with mild jaundice (yellow skin and eyes) and rapid weight loss. A person can have recurrent attacks over several years. This may result in secondary bacterial infections of the pancreas, calcium deficiencies, and Type II diabetes.
Pancreatic Cancer Pancreatic cancer is the fourth leading cause of cancer deaths in the United States, affecting about 27,000 persons yearly. It is second only to colon cancer as a cause of death from gastrointestinal malignancy. It affects men twice as frequently as women and is more likely to develop after the age of 40. Pancreatic cancer risks increase with chronic pancreatitis, diabetes mellitus, genetic factors (more common in blacks than whites) , smoking,-^excess alcohol consumption, high-fat diets, and exposure to industrial chemicals such as urea, naphthalene or benzidine. Symptoms include weight loss, abdominal pain, nausea, loss of appetite, itching, jaundice, and constipation. Abdominal stress may improve or worsen after eating, and the pain may increase after lying down. Because its symptoms mimic many other common health problems, it often goes undetected until it is too late to treat effectively. When early diagnosis and early treatment are possible, however, survival chances increase. Imaging with endoscopic ultrasound may aid early diagnosis. Researchers are also rapidly building a library of potential genetic markers that indicate the onset of pancreatic cancer. Treatment includes chemotherapeutic drugs and traditional surgical techniques.
Animal Models Transgenic Mouse Models of Diabetes or Diabetes Resistance . McGrane, et al . , J. Biol. Chem. 263:11443-51 (1988) and Chen, et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 269:15892-7 (1994) describe the genetic engineering of mice to express bovine growth hormone (bGH) or human growth hormone (hGH) , respectively. These mice exhibited an enhanced growth phenotype. They also developed kidney lesions similar to those seen in diabetic glomerulosclerosis, see Yang, et al . , Lab. Invest., 68:62-70 (19-93). Ogueta, et al . , J. Endocrinol., 165: 321-8 (2000) reported that transgenic mice expressing bovine GH develop arthritic disorder and self- antibodies. Growth hormone has many roles, ranging from regulation of protein, fat and carbohydrate metabolism to growth promotion. GH is produced in the somatrophic cells of the anterior pituitary and exerts its effects either through the GH-induced action of IGF-I, in the case of growth promotion, or by direct interaction with the GHR on target cells including liver, muscle, adipose, and kidney cells. Hyposecretion of GH during development leads to dwarfism, and hypersecretion before puberty leads to gigantism. In adults, hypersecretion of GH results in acro egaly, a clinical condition characterized by enlarged facial bones, hands, feet, fatigue and an increase in weight. Of those individuals with acromegaly, 25% develop type II diabetes. This may be due to insulin resistance caused by the high circulating levels of GH leading to high circulating levels of insulin (Kopchick et al . , Annual Rev. Nutrition 1999. 19:437-61) . A further mode of GH action may be through the transcriptional regulation of a number of genes contributing to the physiological effects of GH.
Growth hormone genes and the proteins encoded by them can be converted into growth hormone antagonists by mutation, see Kopchick USP 5,350,836. Transgenic mice have been made that express the GH antagonists bGH-G119R or hGH G120R, and which exhibit a dwarf phenotype. Chen, et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 263:15892-7 (1994); Chen, et al . , Mol. Endocrinol, 5:1845-52 (1991); Chen, et al . , Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 87:5061-5 (1990) . These mice did not develop kidney lesions. See Yang (1993), supra . Chen, et al . , Endocrinol, 136:660-7 (1995) compared the effect of streptozotocin treatment in normal nontransgenic mice, and in mice transgenic for (1) a GH receptor antagonist, the G119R mutant of bovine growth hormone or (2) the E117L-mutant of bGH. (According to Chen's ref. 24, these large GH transgenic streptozotocin-treated mice constitute an animal model for diabetes.) Glomerulosclerosis was seen in diabetic (STZ-treated) nontransgenic mice and in diabetic bGH-E117L mice, but not in diabetic bGH-G119R (GH antagonist) mice. Two of the proteins which mediate growth hormone activity are the growth hormone receptor and the growth hormone binding protein, encoded by the same gene in mice(GHR/BP) . It is possible to genetically engineer mice so that the gene encoding these proteins is disrupted ("knocked-out" ; inactivated), see Zhou, et al . , Proc. Nat. Acad.- Sci. (USA), 94:13215-20 (1997). Zhou, et al. inactivated the GHR/BP gene by replacing the 3 ' portion of exon 4 (which encodes a portion of the GH binding domains) and the 5 ' region of intron 4 with a neomycin gene cassette . The modified gene was introduced into the target mice by homologous recombination. Like mice expressing a GH antagonist, homozygous GHR/BP-KO mice exhibit a dwarf phenotype. GHR/BP-KO mice, made diabetic by streptozotocin treatment, are protected from the development of diabetes- associated nephropathy. Bellush, et al . , Endocrinol., 141:163-8 (2000) . High-Fat Diets . High-fat diets have been shown to induce both obesity and Type II diabetes in laboratory animals (13) . Surwit and colleagues demonstrated that male C57BL/6J mice are extremely sensitive to the diabetogenic effects of a high-fat diet when initiated at weaning. At six months of age, high-fat fed animals had significantly elevated fasting blood-glucose and insulin levels and also demonstrated a decrease in insulin sensitivity (14) . Ahren and colleagues (15) reported evidence of insulin resistance as well as diminished glucose-stimulated insulin release, after feeding with a high-fat diet for 12 weeks. These mice also showed elevated levels of total cholesterol, triglycerides, and free fatty acids, another hallmark of Type II diabetes.
Identification of genes involved in hyperinsulinemia and type II diabetes, gnerally Our attention recently has focused on the generation of pancreas mRNA expression profiles and the identification of genes involved in the genesis of the obesity-induced hyperinsulinemia and type-II diabetes. To date, no one has attempted to study the actual progression from the normal condition to that of hyperinsulinemia or from hyperinsulinemia to Type II diabetes in an attempt to identify genes that are up-regulated or down-regulated in the pancreas as -the disease progresses. In previous studies aimed at identifying genes involved in diabetes-induced glomerulosclerosis, differential display and traditional subtractive hybridization techniques were used (16-20) . While effective for the identification of a few genes (e.g. hmuncl3, PED/PEA-15, lactate dehydrogenase, amiloride sensitive sodium channel, ubiquitin-like protein, mdr 1, and a-amyloid protein precursor as well as a few novel genes), these techniques can be quite labor intensive. The PCR-based method of subtractive hybridization- requires less starting material, and allows the simultaneous isolation of all differentially expressed cDNAs into two groups (up-regulated and down-regulated) . However, the PCR-based method of subtractive hybridization is also quite labor-intensive, produced large numbers of false positive candidates and ultimately resulted in the identification of a relatively limited number of differentially expressed genes, (see Kelderl-USA application) . In order to expand the number of genes that can be analyzed simultaneously, several groups have begun to utilize DNA microarray analysis to measure differences in gene expression between normal and diseased states. However, these experiments have been limited in regards to the number of experimental conditions analyzed. DNA microarray analysis has been performed on normal, obese and diabetic mice (21) . Also, the obesity and diabetes in the mouse models examined were caused by a specific endogenous genetic mutation (22) . The differentially expressed genes in the above models may be very different from genes differentially expressed due to diet-induced obesity and Type-II diabetes.
The use of differential expression and related techniques to identify genes useful in the treatment of diabetes has been reviewed by Perfetti, et al.", Diabetes Technol . & Therapeut., 5(3): 421-3 (2003). Bernal-Mizrachi, et al . , Diabetes Metab. Res. Rev. 19: 32-42 (2003).
Other papers of interest include: Wada, et al . , "Gene expression profile in streptozotocin-induced diabetic mice kidneys undergoing glomerulosclerosis", Kidney Int, 59:1363-73 (2001); Song, et al . , "Cloning of a novel gene in the human kidney homologous to rat muncl3S: its potential role in diabetic nephropathy" , Kidney Int ., -53 : 1689-95 (1998); Page, et al . , "Isolation of diabetes-associated kidney genes using differential display", Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 232:49-53 (1997). Peradi, "Subtractive hybridization claims: An efficient technique to detect overexpressed mRNAs in diabetic nephropathy," Kidney Int. 53:926-31 (1998). Condorelli, EMBO ., 17:3858-66 (1998).
Differential Expression in Pancreas Lim, et al . , Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 299: 806-12 (2002) studied gene expression in the pancreas of rats subjected to a 90% partial pancreatectomy (Px) (said to be a hyperglycemia-linked type II diabetes model) . A total of 180 putative differentially expressed cDNAs were found. Tables list cDNAs over-expressed in normal rat pancreas (table 2) or in the diabetes model (table 3) . The highest expression ratio was 3.5 for the normal-favored genes and 3.0 for the Px-favored genes. This was similar to an earlier study, Laybutt, et al., J. Biol. Chem., 277: 10912-10921 (2002). See also Shalev, et al., "Oligonucleotide microarray analysis of intact human pancreatic islets: identification of glucose-responsive gnees and a highly-regulated TGFbeta signaling pathway, Endocrinology, 143(9): 3695-8 (Sept. 2002); Mulder, et al . , Differential changes in islet amyloid polypeptide (anylin) and insulin mRNA expression after high fat diet-induced insulin resistance in C57BL/6J mice," Metabolism, 49(12): 1518-22 (Dec. 2000).
Apoptosis and CIDE-A Apoptosis is a form of programmed cell death that occurs in an active and controlled manner to eliminate unwanted cells. Apoptotic cells undergo an orchestrated cascade of morphological changes such as membrane blebbing, nuclear shrinkage, chromatin condensation, and formation of apoptotic bodies which then undergo phagocytosis by neighboring cells. One of the hallmarks of cellular apoptosis is the cleavage of chromosomal DNA into discrete oligonucleosomal size fragments. This orderly removal of unwanted cells minimizes the release of cellular components that may affect neighboring tissue. In contrast, membrane rupture and release of cellular components during necrosis often leads to tissue inflammation. The process of apoptosis is highly conserved and involves the activation of the caspase cascade. Cohen, GM. (1997) Caspases: the executioners of apoptosis. Biochem. J. 326:1-16; Budihardjo, I., Oliver, H. , Lutter, M. , Luo, X., Wang, X. (1999) Biochemical pathways of caspase activation during apoptosis. Annnu. Rev. Cell. Dev. Biol.15:269-290; Jacobson, M.D., Weil, M. , Raff, M.C. (1997) Programmed cell death in animal development. Cell 88:347-354. Caspases are a family of serine proteases that are synthesized as inactive proenzymes. Their activation by apoptotic signals such as CD95 (Fas) death receptor activation or tumor necrosis factor results in the cleavage of specific target proteins and execution of the apoptotic program. Apoptosis may occur by either an extrinsic pathway involving the activation of cell surface death receptors (DR) or by an intrinsic mitochondrial pathway. Yoon, J-H. Gores G.J. (2002) Death receptor-mediated apoptosis and the liver. J. Hepatology 37:400-410. These pathways are not mutually exclusive and some cell types require the activation of both pathways for maximal apoptotic signaling. In type-I cells, death receptor activation leads to the recruitment and activation of caspases-8/10 and the rapid cleavage and activation of caspase-3 in a mitochondrial-independent manner. Hepatocytes are members of the Type-II cells in which mitochondria are essential for DR-mediated apoptosis Scaffidi, C, Fulda, S., Srinivasan, A.-., Friesen, C, Li, F., Tomaselli, K.J., Debatin, K.M. , -Krammer, P.H., Peter, M.E. (1998) Two CD95 (APO-l/Fas) signaling pathways. EMBO J. 17:1675-1687. In this pathway, the pro-apoptotic protein Bid is truncated by activated caspases-8/10 and translocates to the mitochondria. Luo, X., Budihardjo, I., Zou, H., Slaughter, C, Wang, X. (1998) Bid, a Bcl2 interacting protein, mediates cytochrome c release from mitochondria in response to activation of cell surface death receptors. Cell 94:481-490; Li, H. , Zhu, H. , Xu, C.J., Yuan, J. (1998) Cleavage of BID by caspase 8 mediates the mitochondrial damage in the Fas pathway of apoptosis. Cell 94:491-501. This translocation leads to mitochondrial cytochrome c release and eventual activation of caspases-3 and 7 via cleavage by activated caspase-9. One of the substrates for activated caspase-3 is the DNA fragmentation factor (DFF) . DFF is composed of a 45 kDa regulatory subunit (DFF45) and a 40 kDA catalytic subunit (DFF40) . Liu, X., Zou, H. , Slaughter, C, Wang, X. (1997) DFF, a heterodimeric protein that functions downstream of caspase-3 to trigger DNA fragmentation during apoptosis. Cell 89:175-184. DFF45 cleavage by activated caspase-3 results in its dissociation from DFF40 and allows the caspase-activated DNAse (CAD) activity of DFF40 to cleave chromosomal DNA into oligonucleosomal size fragments. Liu, X., Li, P., Widlak, P., Zou, H., Luo, X., Garrard, W.T., Wang, X. (1998) The 40-kDa subunit of DNA fragmentation factor induces DNA fragmentation and chromatin condensation during apoptosis. Proc. Natl. Acad.. Sci. USA. 95:8461-8466; Halenbeck, R. , MacDonald, H. , Roulston, A., Chen, T.T., Conroy, L., Williams, L.T. (1998) CPAN, a human nuclease regulated by the caspase-sensitive inhibitor DFF45. Curr Biol. 8:537-540; Nagata, S. (2000) Apoptotic DNA fragmentation. Exp. Cell Res. 256:12-8. Recently, a novel family of cell-death-inducing DFF45- like effectors (CIDEs) have been identified that includes CIDE-A, CIDE-B and CIDE-3/FSP2. Inohara, N. , Koseki, T., Chen, S., Wu, X., Nunez, G. (1998) CIDE, a novel family of cell death activators with homology to the 45 kDa subunit of the DNA fragmentation factor. EMBO J. 17 :25"26-2533 ; Danesch, U. , Hoeck, W., Ringold, G.M. (199"2) Cloning and transcriptional regulation of a novel adipocyte-specific gene,- FSP27. CAAT-enhancer-binding protein (C/EBP) and
C/EBP-like proteins interact with sequences required for differentiation-dependent expression. J. Biol. Chem. 267:7185-7193; Liang, L. , Zhao, M. , Xu, Z., Yokoyama, K.K., Li, T. (2003) Molecular cloning and characterization of CIDE-3, a novel member of the cell-death-inducing DNA- fragmentation-factor (DFF45) -like effector family. Biochem. J. 370:195-203.
The CIDEs contain an N-terminal domain that shares homology with the N-terminal region of DFF45 and may represent a regulatory region via protein interaction. See Inohara, supra; Lugovskoy, A. . , Zhou, P., Chou, J.J., McCarty, J.S., Li, P., Wagner, G. (1999) Solution structure of the CIDE-N domain of CIDE-B and a model for CIDE-N/CIDE-N interactions in the DNA fragmentation pathway of apoptosis. Cell 9:747- 755. The family members also share a C-terminal domain that is necessary and sufficient for inducing cell death and DNA fragmentation; see Inohara supra. The overexpression of CIDE-A induces cell death that can be inhibited by DFF45. However, CIDE-A-induced apoptosis is not inhibited by caspase-8 inhibitors thereby suggesting the presence of additional, caspase-independent, pathway (s) for the induction of apoptosis, see Inohara supra. Previous reports have indicated that human and mouse CIDE-A are expressed in several tissues such as brown adipose tissue (BAT) and heart and are localized to the mitochondria, iZhou, Z., Yon Toh, S., Chen, Z., Guo, K., Ng, C.P., Ponniah, S., Lin, S.C, Hong, W., Li, P. (2003) Cidea-deficient mice have lean phenotype and are resistant to obesity. Nat. Genet. 35:49- 56. . In addition to the ability to induce apoptosis, CIDE- A can interact and inhibit UCP1 in BAT and may therefore play a role in regulating energy balance, see Zhou supra. Previous reports have indicated that CIDE-A is not expressed in either adult human or mouse liver tissue, see ^ Inohara supra, Zhou supra.
The human protein cell death activator CIDE-A is of particular interest because of its highly dramatic -change in liver expression with age, first demonstrated in our Kopchick7 application, supra. CIDE-A expression is elevated in older normal mice. CIDE-A expression was studied,.for normal C57BI/6J. mouse ages 35, 49, 77, 133, 207, 403■and 558 days. Expression is low at the first five data points, then rises sharply at 403 days, and again at 558 days. CIDE-A was therefore classified as an "unfavorable protein", i.e., it was taught that an antagonist to CIDE-A could retard biological aging.
In Kopchick7A-PCT we reported that CIDE-A is also prematurely expressed in hyperinsulinemic and type-II diabetic mouse liver tissue. CIDE-A expression also correlates with liver steatosis in diet-induced obesity, hyperinsulinemia and type-II diabetes. These observations suggest an additional pathway of apoptotic cell death in Non-Alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD) and that CIDE-A may play a role in this serious disease and potentially in liver dysfunction associated with type-II diabetes. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Differential hybridization techniques have been used to identify mouse genes that are differentially expressed in the pancreas of mice, depending upon their development of hyperinsulinemia or type II diabetes. In essence, complementary RNA derived from normal mice, or mouse models of hyperinsulinemia or type II diabetes, was screened for hybridization with oligonucleotide probes each specific to a particular mouse database DNA, the latter being identified, by database accession number, by the gene manufacturer. Each database DNA in turn was also identified by the gene chip manufacturer as representative of a particular mouse gene cluster (Unigene) . In most cases, this database DNA sequence is a full length genomic DNA or cDNA sequence, and is therefore either identical to, or otherwise encodes the same protein as does, a natural full-length genomic DNA protein coding sequence. Those which don't present at least a partial sequence of a natural gene or its cDNA equivalent. For the sake of simplicity, all of these mouse database DNA sequences, whether full-length or partial, and whether cDNA or genomic DNA, are referred to herein as "mouse genes". When only the genomic sequence is intended, we will refer specifically to "genomic DNA" or "gDNA" . The sequences in the protein databases are determined either by directly sequencing the protein or, more commonly, by sequencing a DNA, and then determining the translated amino acid sequence in accordance with the Genetic Code. All of the mouse sequences in the mouse polypeptide database are referred to herein as "mouse proteins" regardless of whether they are in fact full length sequences. Mouse genes which were differentially expressed (normal vs. hyperinsulinemic,^ hyperinsulinemic vs. diabetic, or normal vs. diabetic), as measured by different levels of hybridization of the respective cRNA samples with the particular probe corresponding to that mouse gene) were identi ied. Since the progression is from normal to hyperinsulinemic, and thence from hyperinsulinemic to type II diabetic, one may define mammalian subjects as being more favored or less favored, with normal subjects being more favored than hyperinsulinemic subjects, and hyperinsulinemic subjects being more favored than type II diabetic subjects. The subjects' state may then be correlated with their gene expression activity. The terms "normal" and "control" are used interchangeably in this specification, unless expressly stated otherwise. The control or normal subject is a mouse which is normal vis-a-vis fasting insulin and fasting glucose levels. The term "normal", as used herein, means normal relative to those parameters, and does not necessitate that the mouse be normal in every respect . A mouse gene is said to have exhibited a favorable behavior if, for a particular mouse age of observation, its average level of. expression in mice- which are in a more favored state is higher than that in mice which are in a less favored state. A mouse gene is said to have exhibited an unfavorable behavior if, for a particular mouse age of observation, its average level of expression in mice which are in a more favored state is lower than that in mice which are in a less favored state. When we observe the mice at several different ages, it is possible for their expression behavior to vary from time point to time point. For a given comparison of subjects, e.g., normal vs. hyperinsulinemic, we classify the mouse gene as favorable or unfavorable on the basis of the direction of the largest expression 'change, and it is the magnitude of this largest expression change, expressed as a ratio of greater to lesser, which is set forth in the Master Table 1 data for that mouse gene. Thus, if at 2 weeks, there was a 3-fold favorable behavior, and at 8 weeks, there was a 4-fold unfavorable behavior, and at all other time points, the behavior was weaker than 3-fold, the mouse gene would be classified as an unfavorable gene with respect to the subject comparison in question. It will be appreciated that it may be that if the mouse gene were observed at an age other than one of the ages noted in the Examples, we would have observed a still stronger differential expression behavior. Nonetheless, we must classify the mouse genes on the basis of the behavior which we actually observed, not the behavior which might have been observed at some other age.
We are particularly interested in mouse genes which exhibit strongly favorable or unfavorable differential expression behaviors. A behavior is considered strong if the ratio of the higher level to the lower level is at least two-fold. However, a mouse gene may still be identified as favorable or unfavorable even if none of its observed behaviors are substantial as defined above. In general, we consider the consistency of its behaviors (that is, are all or most of the differential expression behaviors at different- ages in the same direction,, e.g. , hyperinsulinemic higher than control) , the magnitude of the behaviors (higher the better) , and the expression behavior of structurally or functionally related mouse genes (a mouse gene is more likely to be identified as favorable on the basis of a weakly favorable behavior if it is related to other mouse genes which exhibited favorable, especially strongly favorable, behavior) . If we considered a mouse gene with only weak differential expression behavior to be worthy of consideration on the basis of these criteria, then we listed it in Master Table 1 in the appropriate subtable. Preferably, the differential behavior observed is both I strong and consistent . Preferably, if related mouse genes were tested, they exhibit the same direction of differential expression behavior.
A mouse gene which was more strongly expressed in hyperinsulinemic tissue than in either normal or type II diabetic tissue (i.e., C<HI, HI>D) will be deemed both
"unfavorable", by virtue of the control :hyperinsulinemic comparison, and "favorable" , by virtue of the hyperinsulinemic:diabetic comparison. This is one of several possible "mixed" expression patterns. Thus, we can subdivide the "favorables" into wholly and partially favorables. Likewise, we can subdivide the unfavorables into wholly and partially unfavorabies . The genes/proteins with "mixed" expression patterns are, by definition, both partially favorable and partially unfavorable. In general, use of the wholly favorable or wholly unfavorable genes/proteins is preferred to use of the partially favorable or partially unfavorable ones. It is evident from the foregoing that mixed genes/proteins are those exhibiting a combination of favorable and unfavorable behavior. A mixed gene/protein can be used as would a favorable gene/protein if its favorable behavior outweighs the unfavorable. It can be used as would an unfavorable gene/protein if its unfavorable behavior outweighs the favorable. Preferably, they are used in conjunction with other agents that affect their balance of favorable and unfavorable behavior. Use of mixed genes/proteins is, in general, less desirable than use of purely favorable or purely unfavorable genes/proteins, but . it is not excluded. .. It should be noted that a mouse gene is classified on the basis of the strongest C-HI behavior among the ages tested, the strongest HI-D behavior among the ages tested, and the strongest. C-D behavior among the ages tested. If at least one of these three behaviors is significantly favorable, and none of the others of these three behaviors is significantly unfavorable, the mouse gene will be classified as wholly favorable and listed in subtable 1A of Master Table 1. However, that does not mean that it may not have exhibited a weaker but unfavorable expression behavior at some tested age. The "favorable" , "unfavorable" and "mixed" mouse proteins of the present invention include the mouse database proteins listed in the Master Table in the same row as a particular "favorable", "unfavorable" or "mixed" mouse gene, respectively. These proteins may be the exact translation product of the identified mouse gene (database DNA) . However, if they were sequenced directly, they could be shorter or longer than that translation product. They could also differ in sequence from the exact translation product as a result of post-translational modifications. The mouse proteins of interest also include mouse proteins which, while not listed in the table, correspond to (i.e., homologous to, i.e., which could be aligned in a statistically significant manner to) such mouse proteins or genes, and mouse proteins which are at least substantially identical or conservatively identical to the listed mouse proteins.
Related human genes (database DNAs) and proteins were identified by searching a database comprising human DNAs or proteins for sequences corresponding to (i.e., homologous to, i.e., which could be aligned in a statistically significant manner to) the mouse gene or protein. More than one human protein may be identified as corresponding to a particular mouse chip probe and to a particular mouse÷gene. Note that the terms "human genes" and "human proteins" are used in a manner analogous to that already discussed in the case of "mouse genes" and "mouse proteins". ■ As used herein, the term "corresponding" does not mean identical, but rather implies the existence of a statistically significant sequence similarity, such as one sufficient to qualify the human protein or gene as a homologus protein or DNA as defined below. The greater the degree of relationship as thus defined (i.e., by the statistical significance of each alignment used to connect the mouse cDNA to the human protein or gene, measured by an E value), the more close the correspondence. The connection may be direct (mouse gene to human protein) or indirect (e.g., mouse gene to human gene, human gene to human protein) .By "mouse gene", we mean the mouse gene from which the gene chip DNA in question was derived. In general, the human genes/proteins which most closely correspond, directly or indirectly, to the mouse genes are preferred, such as the one(s) with the highest, top two highest, top three highest, top four highest, top five highest, and top ten highest E values for the final alignment in the connection process. The human genes/proteins deemed to correspond to our mouse genes are identified in the Master Tables. Note that it is possible to identify homologous full- length human genes and proteins, if they are present in the database, even if the query mouse DNA or protein sequence is not a full-length sequence. If there is no homologous full-length human gene or protein in the database, but there is a partial one, the latter may nonetheless be useful. For example, a partial protein may still have' biological activity, and a molecule which binds the partial protein may also bind the full- length protein so as to antagonize a biological activity of the full-length protein. Likewise, a partial human gene may encode a partial protein which has biological activity, or the gene may be useful in the design of a hybridization probe or in the design of a therapeutic antisense DNA. The partial genes and protein sequences may of course also be used in the design of probes intended to identify the full length gene or protein sequence.
For the sake of convenience, we refer to a human protein as favorable if (1) it is listed in Master Table 1 as corresponding to a favorable mouse gene, or (2) it is at least substantially identical or conservatively identical to a listed protein per (1) , or (3) it is a member of a human protein class listed in Master Table 2 (if provided) as corresponding to a favorable mouse gene. We define a human protein as unfavorable in an analogous manner. We may further identify a human protein as being wholly favorable (see mouse genes of subtable 1A, wholly unfavorable (see mouse genes of subtable IB), or mixed, i.e., both partially favorable and partially unfavorable (see mouse genes of subtable IC) . Likewise, a human gene which encodes a particular human protein may be classified in the same way as the human protein which it encodes. However, it should be noted that this classification is not based on the direct study of the expression of the human gene/protein, of course, the human genes/proteins of ultimate interest will be the ones whose change in level of expression is, in fact, correlated, directly or inversely, with the change of state (normal, hyperinsulinemic, diabetic) of the subject.
After identifying related human genes and proteins, one may formulate agents useful in screening humans at risk for progression toward hyperinsulinemia or toward type II ^diabetes, or protecting humans at risk thereof from progression from a normoinsulinemic state to a hyperinsulinemic state, or from either to a type II diabetic state. Agents which bind the "favorable" and "unfavorable" nucleic acids (e.g., the agent is a substantially complementary nucleic acid hybridization probe) , or the corresponding proteins (e.g., an antibody vs. the protein) may be used to evaluate whether a human subject is at increased or decreased risk for progression toward type II diabetes. A subject with one or more el-evated "unfavorable" and/or one or more depressed "favorable" genes/proteins is at increased risk, and one with one or more elevated "favorable" and/or one or more depressed "unfavorable" genes/proteins is at decreased risk. One may further take into account whether the subject is normoinsulinemic or hyperinsulinemic at the time of the assay. If the subject is non-diabetic and normoinsulinemic, we are especially interested in the "favorable" and "unfavorable" genes/proteins corresponding to mouse genes differentially expressed in hyperinsulinemic vs. normal pancreas. If the subject is already hyperinsulinemic, yet non-diabetic, we are especially interested in the "favorable" and "unfavorable" genes/proteins corresponding to mouse genes differentially expressed in type II diabetic vs. hyperinsulinemic pancreas. The assay may be used as a preliminary screening assay to select subjects for further analysis, or as a formal diagnostic assay. The identification of the related genes and proteins may also be useful in protecting humans against these disorders . Thus, Applicants contemplate: (1) use of the "favorable" mouse DNAs (or fragments thereof) of the Master Tables (below) to isolate or identify related human DNAs; (2) use of human DNAs, related to favorable mouse DNAs, to express the corresponding human proteins; ' (3) use of the corresponding human proteins (and mouse proteins, if biologically active in humans) , to protect against the disorder (s); (4) use of the corresponding mouse or human proteins, or nucleic acid probes derived from the mouse or human genes, in diagnostic agents, in assays to measure progression toward hyperinsulinemia or type II diabetes, or protection against the disorder (s), or to estimate" related end organ damage such as kidney damage; and (5) use of the corresponding human or mouse genes therapeutically in gene therapy, to protect against the disorder (s) . Moreover Applicants contemplate: (1) use of the "unfavorable" mouse DNAs (or fragments thereof) of the Master Tables to isolate or identify related human DNAs; (2) use of the complement to the "unfavorable" mouse DNAs or related human DNAs, as antisense molecules to inhibit expression of the related human DNAs; (3) use of the mouse or human DNAs to express the corresponding mouse or human proteins; (4) use of the corresponding mouse or human proteins, in diagnostic agents, to measure progression toward hyperinsulinemia or type II diabetes, or protection against the disorder (s), or to estimate related end organ damage such as kidney damage; (5) use of the corresponding mouse or human proteins in assays to determine whether a substance binds to (and hence may neutralize) the protein; and (6) use of the neutralizing substance to protect against the disorder (s) .
Thus, DNAs of interest include those which specifically hybridize to the aforementioned mouse or human genes, and are thus of interest as hybridization assay reagents or for antisense therapy. They also include synthetic DNA sequences which encode the same polypeptide as is encoded by the database DNA, and thus are useful for producing the polypeptide in cell culture or in situ (i.e., gene therapy) . Moreover, they include DNA sequences which encode polypeptides which are substantially structurally identical or conservatively identical in amino acid sequence to the mouse and human proteins identified in the Master Table 1, subtables 1A or IC. Finally, they include DNA sequences which encode peptide (including antibody) antagonists of the proteins of Master Table 1, subtables IB or IC.
The related human DNAs may be identified by comparing the mouse sequence (or its AA translation product) to known human DNAs (and their AA translation products) .
Related human DNAs also may be identified by- screening human cDNA or genomic DNA .libraries using the mouse gene of the Master Table, or a fragment thereof, as a probe. If the mouse gene of Master Table 1 is not full-length, and there is no closely corresponding full-length mouse gene in the sequence databank, then the mouse DNA may first be used as a hybridization probe to screen a mouse cDNA library to isolate the corresponding full-length sequence. Alternatively, the mouse DNA may be used as a probe to screen a mouse genomic DNA library.
Our animal models of hyperinsulinemia and diabetes are also obese. It is possible that the genes found to be favorable act indirectly by inhibiting obesity. Likewise, it is possible that the genes found to be unfavorable act indirectly by accentuating obesity. Consequently, it is within the compass of the present invention to use the favorable genes and proteins, or to use antagonists of the unfavorable genes and proteins, to protect against obesity, as well as against sequelae of obesity such as hyperinsulinemia and diabetes. Since type II diabetes is an age-related disease, the agents of the present invention may be used in conunction with known anti-aging or anti-age-related disease agents. It is of particular interest to use the agents of the present invention in conjunction with an agent disclosed in one of the related applications cited above, in particular, an antagonist to CIDE-A, the latter having been taught in Kopchick7 and Kopchick7A-PCT.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figure 1. Body weight gain (1(a)), fasting glucose (1(b)) and fasting insulin (1 (c) ) levels of mice on the HF or Std diets. Results reflect mean ± SE of 50 mice on the high fat (HF) diet and 20 mice on the standard (Std) diet.
Figure 2. Pancreatic xpression levels of glutathione peroxidase 1 (Gpxl, NM_008160) using RNA isolated from pancreas of individual diabetic HF mice and corresponding Std mice at different time points.
Figure 3-. Pancreatic expression levels for additional glutathione peroxidase, S-transferase and synthetase genes exhibiting a consistent decrease in expression in the HF mice in comparison to Std mice at all four time points (top panel) or at three of the four time points (bottom panel) .
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION
Full-Length vs. Partial Length Genes/Proteins A "full length" gene is here defined as (1) a naturally occurring DNA sequence which begins with an initiation codon (almost always the Met codon, ATG) , and ends with a stop codon in phase with said initiation codon (when introns, if any, are ignored) , and thereby encodes a naturally occurring polypeptide with biological activity, or a naturally occurring precursor thereof, or (2) a synthetic DNA sequence which encodes the same polypeptide as that which is encoded by (1) . The gene may, but need not, include introns. A "full-length" protein is here defined as a naturally occurring protein encoded by a full-length gene, or a protein derived naturally by post-translational modification of such a protein. Thus, it includes mature proteins, proproteins, preproteins and preproproteins . It also includes substitution and extension mutants of such naturally occurring proteins.
Subjects A mouse is considered to be a diabetic subject if, regardless of its fasting plasma insulin level, it has a fasting plasma glucose level of at least 190 mg/dL. A mouse is considered to be a hyperinsulinemic subject if its fasting plasma insulin level is at least 0.67 ng/mL and it does not qualify as a diabetic subject. A mouse is considered to be "normal" if it is neither diabetic nor hyperinsulinemic. Thus, normality is defined in a very limited manner. A mouse is considered "obese" if its weight is at least 15% in excess of the mean weight for mice of its age and sex. A mouse which does not satisfy this standard may be characterized as "non-obese", the term "normal" being reserved for use in reference to glucose and insulin levels as previously described.
A human is considered a diabetic subject if, regardless of his or her fasting plasma insulin level, the fasting plasma glucose level is at least 126 mg/dL. A human is considered a hyperinsulinemic subject if the fasting plasma insulin level is more than 26 micro International Units/mL (it is believed that this is equivalent to 1.08 ng/mL) , and does not qualify as a diabetic subject. A human is considered to be "normal" if it is neither diabetic nor hyperinsulinemic. Thus, normality is defined in a very limited manner. A human is considered "obese" if the body mass index (BMI) (weight divided by height-squared) is at least 30 kg/m2. A human who does not satisfy this standard may be characterized as "non-obese", the term "normal" being reserved for use in reference to glucose and insulin levels as previously described-. A human is considered overweight if the BMI is at least 25 jg/m2. Thus, we define overweight to include obese individuals,, consistent with the recommendations of the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases (NIDDK) . A human who does not satisfy ι this standard may be characterized as "non-overweight . "
According to the Report of the Expert Committe on the
Diagnosis and Classification of Diabetes Mellitus, Diabetes
Care 20: 1183-97 (1997), the following are risk factors for diabetes type II: older (e.g., at least 45; see below) excessive weight (see below) first-degree relative with diabetes mellitus member of high risk ethnic group (black, Hispanic, Native American, Asian) history of gestational diabetes mellitus or delivering a baby weighing more than 9 pounds (4.032 kg) hypertensive (>1 0/90 mm Hg)
HDL cholesterol level >35 mg/dL (0.90 mmol/L) triglyceride level >=250 mg/dL (2.83 mmol/L) Hence, in a preferred embodiment, the diagnostic and protective methods of the present invention are applied to human subjects exhibiting one or more of the aforementioned risk factors. Likewise, in a preferred embodiment, they are applied to human subjects who, while not- diabetic, exhibit impaired glucose homeostasis (110 to <126 mg/dL) .
The risk of diabetes increases with age. Hence, in successive preferred embodiments, the age of the subjects is at least 45, at least 50, at least 55, at least 60, at least 65, at least 70, and at least 75. With regard to.-excessive weight, NIDDK says that "The relative risk of diabetes increases by approximately 25 percent for each additional unit of BMI over 22." Hence, in successive preferred embodiments, the BMIs of the human subjects is at least 23, at least 24, at least 25 (i.e., overweight by our criterion) , at least 26, at least 27, at least 28, at least 29, at least 30 (i.e., obese), at least 31, at least 32, at least 33, at least 34, at least 35, at least 36, at least 37, at least 38, at least 39, at least 40, or over 40.
Age-Related Diseases
Age-related (senescent) diseases include certain cancers, atherosclerosis, diabetes (type 2) , osteoporosis, hypertension, depression, Alzheimer's, Parkinson's, glaucoma, certain immune system defects, kidney failure, and liver steatosis. In general, they are diseases for which the relative risk (comparing a subpopulation over age 55 to a suitably matched population under age 55) is at least 1.1. Preferably, the agents of the present invention protect against one or more age-related diseases for at least a subpopulation of mature (post-puberty) adult subjects.
Direct and Indirect Utility of Identified Nucleic Acid Sequences and Related Molecules The mouse or human genes (or fragments thereof) may be used directly. For diagnostic or screening purposes, they (or specific binding fragments thereof) may be labeled and used as hybridization probes. For therapeutic purposes, they (or specific binding fragments thereof) may be used as antisense reagents to inhibit the expression of"the corresponding gene, or of a sufficiently homologous gene of another species . If the- database DNA appears to be a" full-length cDNA or gDNA, that is, it encodes an entire," functional, naturally occurring protein, then it may be used in the expression of that protein. Likewise, if the corresponding human gene is known in full-length, it may be used to express the human protein. Such expression may be in cell culture, with the protein subsequently isolated and administered exogenously to subjects who would benefit therefrom, or in vivo, i.e., administration by gene therapy. Naturally, any DNA encoding the same protein may be used for the same purpose, and a DNA encoding a protein which a fragment or a mutant of that naturally occurring protein which retains the desired activity, may be used for the purpose of producing the active fragment or mutant. The encoded protein of course has utility therapeutically and, in labeled or immobilized form, diagnostically. The genes may also be used indirectly, that is, to identify other useful DNAs, proteins, or other molecules. We have attempted to determine whether the mouse genes disclosed herein have significant similarity to any known human DNA, and whether, in any of the six possible combinations of reference frame and strand, they encode a protein similar to a known human protein. If so, then it follows that the known human protein, and DNAs encoding that protein, may be used in a similar manner. In addition, if the known human protein is known to have additional homologues, then those homologous proteins, and DNAs encoding them, may be used in a similar manner.
There thus are several ways that a human protein homologue of interest can be identified by database searching, including but not limited to:
1) a DNA->DNA (BlastN) search for human database DNAs closely related to the mouse gene identifies a known human gene, and the sequence of the human protein is deduced by the Genetic Code;
2) a DNA->Protein (BlastX) search for human database proteins closely related to the translated DNA of the mouse gene identifies a known human protein; and
3) the sequence of the mouse protein is known. or is deduced by the Genetic Code, and a Protein->Protein (BlastP) search for closely related database proteins identifies a known human protein.
Once a known human gene is identified, it may be used in further BlastN or BlastX searches to identify other human genes or proteins. Once a known human protein is identified, it may be used in further BlastP searches to identify other human proteins.
Searches may also take cognizance, intermediately, of known genes and proteins other than mouse or human ones, e.g., use the mouse sequence to identify a known rat sequence and then the rat sequence to identify a human one.
If we have identified a mouse gene, and it encodes a mouse protein which appears similar to a human protein, then that human protein may be used (especially in humans) for purposes analogous to the proposed use of the mouse protein in mice. Moreover, a specific binding fragment of an appropriate strand of the corresponding human gene (gDNA or cDNA) could be labeled and used as a hybridization probe (especially against samples of human mRNA or cDNA) . In determining whether the disclosed genes (gDNA or cDNA) have significant similarities to known DNAs (and their translated AA sequences to known proteins) , one would generally use the disclosed gene as a query sequence, in a search of a sequence database. The results of several such searches are set forth in the Examples . Such results are dependent., to some degree, on the search parameters. Preferred parameters are set forth in Example 1. The results are also dependent on the content of the database. While the raw similarity score of a particular target (database) sequence will not vary with content (as long as it remains in the database) , its informational value (in bits), expected value, and relative ranking can change. Generally speaking, the changes are small.
It will be appreciated that the nucleic acid and- protein databases keep growing. Hence a later search may identify high scoring target sequences which were not- uncovered by an earlier search because the target sequences were not previously part of a database. Hence, in a preferred embodiment, the cognate DNAs and proteins include not only those set forth in the examples, but those which would have been highly ranked (top ten, more preferably top three, even more preferably top two, most preferably the top one) in a search run with the same parameters on the date of filing of this application.
If the known mouse or human database DNA appears to be a partial sequence (that is, partial relative to a cDNA or gDNA encoding the whole naturally occurring protein) , it may be used as a hybridization probe to isolate the full-length DNA. If the partial DNA encodes a biologically functional fragment of the cognate protein, it may be used in a manner similar to the full length DNA, i.e., to produce the functional fragment.
If we have indicated that an antagonist of a protein or other molecule is useful, then such an antagonist may be obtained by preparing a combinatorial library, as described below, of potential antagonists, and screening the library members or binding to the protein or other molecule in question. The binding members may then be further screened for the ability to antagonize the biological activity of the target. The antagonists may be used therapeutically, or, in suitably labeled or immobilized form, diagnostically. If the identified mouse or human database DNA is related to a known protein, then substances known to interact with that protein (e.g., agonists, antagonists, substrates, receptors, second messengers, regulators, and so forth) , and binding molecules which bind them, are also of utility. Such binding molecules can likewise be identified by screening a combinatorial library.
Isolation of Full Length DNAs Using Partial "DNAs as probes If it is determined that a DNA of the present invention is a partial DNA, and the cognate full length DNA is not listed in a sequence database, the available DNA may be used as a hybridization probe to isolate the full-length DNA from a suitable DNA library. Stringent hybridization conditions are appropriate, that is, conditions in which the hybridization temperature is 5-10 deg. C. below the Tm of the DNA as a perfect duplex.
Identification and Isolation of Homologous Genes Using a DNA Probe It may be that the sequence databases available do not include the sequence of any homologous gene (cDNA or gDNA) , or at least of the homologous gene for a species of interest. However, given the cDNAs set forth above, one may readily obtain the homologous gene. The possession of one DNA (the "starting DNA") greatly facilitates the isolation of homologous DNAs. If only a partial DNA is known, this partial DNA may first be used as a probe to isolate the corresponding full length DNA for the same species, and that the latter may be used as the starting DNA in the search for homologous genes. The starting DNA, or a fragment thereof, is used as a hybridization probe to screen a cDNA or genomic DNA library for clones containing inserts which encode either the entire homologous protein, or a recognizable fragment thereof. The minimum length of the hybridization probe is dictated by the need for specificity. If the size of the library in bases is L, and the GC content is 50%, then the probe should have a length oif at least 1, where L = 41. This will yield, on average, a single perfect match in random DNA of L bases. The human cDNA library is about 108 bases and the human genomic DNA library is about 1010 bases. The library is preferably derived from an organism which is known, on biochemical evidence, to produce a .homologous protein, and more preferably from the genomic DNA or mRNA of cells of that organism which are likely to be relatively high producers of that protein. A cDNA library (which is derived from an mRNA library) is especially preferred. If the organism in question is known to have substantially different codon preferences from that of the organism whose relevant cDNA or genomic DNA is known, a synthetic hybridization probe may be used which encodes the same amino acid sequence but whose codon utilization is more similar to that of the DNA of the target organism. Alternatively, the synthetic probe may employ inosine as a substitute for those bases which are most likely to be divergent, or the probe may be a mixed probe which mixes the codons for the source DNA with the preferred codons (encoding the same amino acid) for the target organism. By routine methods, the Tm of a perfect duplex of starting DNA is determined. One may then select a hybridization temperature which is sufficiently lower than the perfect duplex Tm to allow hybridization of the starting DNA (or other probe) to a target DNA which is divergent from the starting DNA. A 1% sequence divergence typically lowers the Tm of a duplex by 1-2°C, and the DNAs encoding homologous proteins of different species typically have sequence identities of around 50-80%. Preferably, the library is screened under conditions where the temperature is at least 20°C, more preferably at least 50°C, below the perfect duplex Tm. Since salt reduces the Tm, one ordinarily would carry out the search for DNAs encoding highly homologous proteins under relatively low salt hybridization conditions, e.g., <1M NaCl. The higher the salt concentration, and/or the lower the temperature, the greater the sequence divergence which is tolerated. For the use of probes to identify homologous genes in other species, see, e.g., Schwinn, et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 265:8183-89 (1990.) (hamster 67-bp cDNA probe vs. human leukocyte genomic library; human 0.32kb DNA probe vs. bovine brain cDNA library, both with hybridization at 42°C in 6xSSC) ; Jenkins et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 265:19624-31 (1990) (Chicken.770-bp cDNA probe vs. human genomic libraries; hybridization at 40°C in 50% formamide and 5xSSC) ; Murata et al., J. Exp. Med., 175:341-51 (1992) (1.2-kb mouse cDNA probe v. human eosinophil cDNA library; hybridization at 65°C in 6xSSC) ; Guyer et al . , J. Biol. Chem., 265:17307-17 (1990) (2.95-kb human genomic DNA probe vs. porcine genomic DNA library; hybridization at 42 °C in 5xSSC) . The conditions set forth in these articles may each be considered suitable for the purpose of isolating homologous genes .
Correspond±ng (Homologous) Proteins and DNAs In the case of a gene chip, the manufacturer- of the gene chip determines which DNA to place at each position on the chip. This DNA may correspond in sequence to a genomic DNA, a cDNA,. or a fragment of genomic or cDNA, and may be natural, synthetic or partially natural and partially synthetic in origin. The manufacturer of the gene chip will normally identify the DNA for a mouse gene chip as corresponding to a particular mouse gene, in which case it will be assumed that the alignments of chip DNA to mouse gene satisfies the homology criteria of the invention. Usually, the gene chip manufacturer will provide a sequence database accession number for the mouse DNA. If so, to identify the corresponding mouse protein, we will first inspect the database record for that mouse DNA. Often, the mouse protein accession number will appear in that record or in a linked record. If it doesn't, the corresponding mouse protein can be identified by performing a BlastX search on a mouse protein database with the mouse database DNA sequence as the query sequence. Even if the protein sequence is not in the database, if the DNA sequence comprises a full-length coding sequence, the corresponding protein can. be identified by translating the coding sequence in accordance with the Genetic Code. A human protein can be said to be identifiable as corresponding (homologous) to a gene chip DNA if it is identified as corresponding (homologous) to the mouse gene (gDNA or cDNA, whole or partial) identified by the gene chip manufacturer as corresponding to that gene chip DNA.
-In turn, it is identifiable as corresponding (homologous) to said identified mouse gene, if
(1) it can be aligned by BlastX directly to that mouse gene, and/or
(2) it is encoded by a human gene, or can be aligned to a human, gene by BlastX, which in turn can be aligned by BlastN to said mouse gene and/or
(3) it can be aligned by BlastP to a mouse protein, the latter being encoded by said mouse gene, or aligned to said mouse gene BlastX,
where any alignment by BlastN, BlastP or BlastX is in accordance with the default parameters set forth below, and the expected value (E) of each alignment (the probability that such an alignment would have occurred by chance alone) is less than e-10. (Note that because this is a negative exponent, a value such as e-50 is less than e-10.)
Desirably, two or all three of these conditions (l)-(3) are satisfied for the corresponding (homologous) human genes and proteins .
A human gene is corresponding (homologous) to a mouse gene chip DNA, and hence to said identified mouse gene (or cDNA) and protein, if it encodes a corresponding (homologous) human protein as defined above, or it can be aligned by BlastN to said mouse gene. Preferably, for at least one of" conditions (l)-(3), the E value is less than e-50, more preferably less than e-60, still more preferably less than"'e-70, even more preferably less than e-80, considerably more preferably less than e-90, and most preferably less than e-100. Desirably, it is true for two or even all three 'of these conditions.
In constructing Master table 1, we generally used a BlastX (mouse gene vs. human protein) alignment E value cutoff of e,-50. However,^ if there were no human proteins with 'that good an alignment to the mouse DNA in question, or if there were other reasons for including a particular human protein (e.g., a known functionality supportive of the observed differential cognate mouse protein expression) , then a human protein with a score worse (i.e., higher) than e-50 may appear in Master Table 1.
If the manufacturer of the gene chip identifies the gene chip DNA as corresponding to an EST, or other DNA which is not a full-length mouse gene or cDNA, a longer (possibly full length) mouse gene or cDNA may be identified by a BlastN search of the mouse DNA database. Alternatively, the identified DNA may be used to conduct a BlastN search of a human DNA database, or a BlastX search of a mouse or human protein database . Thus, more generally, a human protein can be said to be identifiable as corresponding (homologous) to a gene chip DNA, or to a DNA identified by the manufacturer as corresponding to that gene chip DNA, if
(l1) it can t>e aligned directly to the gene chip or corresponding manufacturer identified DNA by BlastX. and/or
(2 ' ) it can be aligned to a human gene/cDNA by BlastX, whose genomic DNA (gDNA) or cDNA (DNA complementary to messenger RNA) in turn can be aligned to the gene chip or corresponding manufacturer identified DNA by BlastN, and/or
(3 ' ) it can be aligned to a mouse gene/cDNA by BlastX, whose gDNA or cDNA in turn can be aligned to the gene chip or corresponding manufacturer identified DNA by BlastN, and/or (4') it can be aligned to a mouse protein by BlastP, which in turn can be aligned to the gene chip or corresponding manufacturer identified DNA by BlastX, .and/or
(5') it can be aligned to a mouse protein by BlastP, which in turn can be aligned to a mouse gene/cDNA by BlastX, whose gDNA or cDNA can in -turn be aligned to the gene chip or corresponding manufacturer identified DNA by BlastN;
where any alignment by BlastN, BlastP, or BlastX is in accordance with the default parameters set forth below, and the expected -value (E) of each alignment (the probability that such an alignment would have occurred by chance alone) is less than e-10. (Note that because this is a negative exponent, a value such as e-50 is less than e-10.)
Preferably, two, three, four or all five of conditions (l')-(5r) are satisfied. Preferably, for at least one of conditions (l')-(5')7 for at least the final alignment (i.e., vs. the human protein) , the E value is less than e-50, more preferably less than e-60, , still more preferably less than e-70, even more preferably less than e-80, considerably more preferably less than e-90, and most preferably less than e-100. Desirably, one or more of these standards of preference are met for two, three, four or all five of conditions (1')- (5 ' ) . In particular, for those conditions in which the gene chip or corresponding manufacturer identified DNA is indirectly connected to the human protein by virtue of two or more successive alignments, the E value is preferably, so limited for all of said alignments in the connecting chain.
A human gene corresponds (is homologous) to a gene chip DNA or manufacturer identified corresponding DNA if it encodes a homologous human protein as defined above, or if it can be aligned either directly to that DNA, or indirectly through a mouse gene which can be aligned to said DNA, according to the conditions set forth above. Master table 1 assembles a list of human protein corresponding to each of the mouse DNAs/proteins identified as related to the chip DNA. These human proteins form a set and can be given a percentile rank, with respect to E value, within that set . The human proteins of the present invention preferably are those scorers with a percentile rank of at least 50%, more preferably at least 60%, still more preferably at least 70%, even more preferably at least 80%, and most preferably at least 90%. For each mouse gene (gDNA or cDNA) in Master Table 1, there is a particular human protein which provides the best alignment match as measured by BlastX, i.e., the human protein with the best score (lowest e-value) . These human proteins form a subset of the set above and can be given a percentile rank within that subset, e.g., the human proteins with scores in the top 10% of that subset have a percentile rank of 90% or higher. The human proteins of the present invention preferably are those best scorer subset proteins with a percentile rank within the subset of at least 50%, more preferably at least 60%, still more preferably at least 70%, even more preferably at least 80%, and most preferably at least 90%.
BlastN and BlastX report very low expected values as "0.0". This does not truly mean that the expected value is exactly zero (since any alignment could occur by chance), but merely that it is so infinitesimal that it is not reported. The documentation does not state the cutoff value, but alignments with explicit E values as low as e-178 (624 bits) have been reported as nonzero values, while a score of 636 bits was reported as "0.0".
Functional.ly homologous human proteins are also of interest. A hmman protein may be said to be functionally homologous to the mouse gene if the human protein has at least one biological activity in common with the mouse protein encoded by said mouse gene. The human proteins of interest also include those that are substantially and/or conservatively identical (as defined below) to the homologous and/or functionally homologous human proteins defined above.
Degree of Differential Expression The degree of differential expression may be expressed as the ratio of the higher expression level to the lower expression level. Preferably, this is at least 2-fold, and more preferably, it is higher, such as at least 3-fold, at least 4-fold, at least 5-fold, at least 6-fold, at least 7- fold, at least 8 -fold, at least 9-fold, or at least 10-fold.
Most preferably, the human protein of interest corresponds to a mouse gene for which the degree of differential expression places it among the top 10% of the mouse genes in the appropriate subtable.
Relevance of Favorable and Unfavorable Genes
If a gene is down-regulated in more favored mammals, or up-regulated in less favored mammals, (i.e./ an "unfavorable gene") then several utilities are apparent. First, the complementary strand. of the gene, or a portion thereof, may be used in labeled form as a hybridization probe to detect messenger RNA and thereby monitor the level of expression of the gene in a subject. Elevated levels are indicative of progression, or propensity to progression, to a less favored state, and clinicians may take appropriate preventative, curative or ameliorative action. Secondly, the messenger RNA product (or equivalent cDNA) , the protein product, or a binding molecule specific for that product (e.g., an antibody which binds the product) , or a downstream product which mediates the activity (e.g., a signaling intermediate) or a binding molecule (e.g., an antibody) therefor, may be used, preferably in labeled or immobilized form, as an assay reagent in an assay for~said nucleic acid product, protein product, or downstream product (e.g., a signaling intermediate) . Again, elevated levels are indicative of a present or future problem. Thirdly, an agent which down-regulates expression of the gene may be used to reduce levels ~όf the corresponding protein and thereby inhibit further damage. This agent could inhibit transcription of the gene in the subject, or translation of the corresponding messenger RNA. Possible inhibitors of transcription and translation include antisense molecules and repressor molecules. The agent could also inhibit a post-translational modification (e.g., glycosylation, phosphorylation, cleavage, GPI attachment) required for activity, or post-translationally modify the protein so as to inactivate it. Or it could be an agent which down- or up-regulated a positive or negative regulatory gene, respectively. Fourthly, an agent which is an antagonist of the messenger RNA product or protein product of the gene, or of a downstream product through which its activity is manifested (e.g., a signaling intermediate), may be used to inhibit its activity. This antagonist could be an antibody, a peptide, a peptoid, a nucleic acid, a peptide nucleic acid (PNA) oligomer, a small organic molecule of a kind for which a combinatorial library exists (e.g., a benzodiazepine) , etc. An antagonist is simply a binding molecule which, by binding, reduces or abolishes the undesired activity of its target. The antagonist, if not an oligomeric molecule, is preferably less than lOO'O daltons, more preferably less than 500 daltons. Fifthly, an agent which degrades, or abets the degradation of, that messenger RNA, its protein product or a downstream product which mediates its activity (e.g., a signaling intermediate) , may be used to curb the effective period of activity of the protein. If a gene is u -regulated in more favored mammals, or down-regulated in less favored animals then the utilities are converse to those stated above. First, the complementary strand-of the gene, or a portion thereof, may be used in labeled form as a hybridization probe to detect messenger RNA and thereby monitor the level of expression of the gene in a subject.
Depressed levels are indicative of damage, or possibly of a propensity to damage, and clinicians 'may"take appropriate preventative, curative or ameliorative action. Secondly, the messenger RNA product, the equivalent cDNA, protein product, or a binding molecule specific for those products, or a downstream product, or a signaling intermediate, or a binding molecule therefor, may be used, preferably in labeled or immobilized form, as an assay reagent in an assay for said protein product or downstream product. Again, depressed levels are indicative of a present or future problem. Thirdly, an agent which up-regulates expression of the gene may be used to increase levels of the corresponding protein and thereby inhibit further progression to a less favored state. By way of example, it could be a vector which carries a copy of the gene, but which expresses the gene at higher levels than does the endogenous expression system. Or it could be an agent which up- or down-regulates a positive or negative regulatory gene. Fourthly, an agent which is an agonist of the protein product of the gene, or of a downstream product through which its activity (of inhibition of progression to a less favored state) is manifested, or of a signaling intermediate may be used to foster its activity. Fifthly, an agent which inhibits the degradation of that protein product or of a downstream product or of a signaling intermediate may be used to increase the effective period of activity of the protein.
Mutant Proteins The present invention also contemplates mutant proteins (peptides) which are substantially identical (as defined below) to the parental protein (peptide) . In general, the fewer the mutations, the more likely the mutant protein is to retain the activity of the parental protein. The effect of mutations is usually (but not always) additive. Certain individual mutations are more likely to be tolerated than others. A protein is more likely to tolerate a mutation which (a) is a substitution rather than an insertion or deletion; (b) is an insertion or deletion at the terminus, rather than internally, or, if internal, is at a domain boundary, or a loop or turn, rather than in an alpha helix or beta strand; (c) affects a surface residue rather than an interior residue; (d) affects a part of the molecule distal to the binding site; (e) is a substitution of one amino acid for another of similar size, charge, and/or hydrophobic!ty, and does not destroy a disulfide bond, or other crosslink; and (f) is at a site which is subject to substantial variation among a family of homologous proteins to which the protein of interest belongs.
These considerations can be used to design functional mutants .
Surface vs . Interior Residues Charged amino acid residues almost always lie on the surface of the protein. For uncharged residues, there is less certainty, but in general, hydrophilic residues are partitioned to the surface and hydrophobic residues to the interior. Of course, for a membrane protein, the membrane- spanning segments are likely to be rich in hydrophobic residues. Surface residues may be identified experimentally by various labeling techniques, or by 3-D structure mapping techniques like X-ray diffraction and NMR. A 3-D model of a homologous protein can be helpful . -,'
Binding Si te Residues Residues forming the binding site may be identified, by (1) comparing the effects of labeling the surface residues before and after complexing the protein to its target, (2) labeling the binding site directly with affinity ligands, (3) fragmenting-..the protein and testing the fragments for binding activity, and (4) systematic mutagenesis (e.g., alanine-scanning mutagenesis) to determine which mutants destroy binding. If the binding site of a homologous protein is known, the binding site may be postulated by analogy. Protein libraries may be constructed and screened that a large family (e.g., 108) of related -mutants may be evaluated simultaneously. Hence, the mutations are preferably conservative modifications as defined below.
"Substantially Identical" A mutant protein (peptide) is substantially identical to a reference protein (peptide) if (a) it has at least 10% of a specific binding activity or a non-nutritional biological activity of the reference protein, and (b) is at least 50% identical in amino acid sequence to the reference protein (peptide) . It is "substantially structurally identical" if condition (b) applies, regardless of (a) . Percentage amino acid identity is . determined by aligning the mutant and reference sequences according to a rigorous dynamic programming algorithm which globally aligns their sequences to maximize their similarity, the similarity being scored as the sum of scores for each aligned pair according to an unbiased PAM250 matrix, and a penalty for each internal gap of -12 for the first null of the gap and - 4 for each additional null of the same ga . The percentage identity is the number of matches expressed as a percentage of the adjusted (i.e., counting inserted nulls) length of the reference sequence. A mutant DNA sequence is substantially identical to a reference DNA sequence if they are."structural sequences, and encoding mutant and reference proteins which are substantially identical as described above. If instead they are regulatory sequences, they are substantially identical if the mutant sequence has at least 10% of the regulatory activity of the reference sequence, and is at least 50% identical in nucleotide sequence to the reference sequence . Percentage identity is determined as for proteins except that matches" are scored +5 , mismatches - 4, the gap open penalty is -12, and the gap extension penalty (per additional null) is -4. More preferably, the sequence is not merely substantially identical but rather is at least 51%, at least 66%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98% or at least 99% identical in sequence to the reference sequence. DNA sequences may also be considered "substantially identical" if they hybridize to each other under stringent conditions, i.e., conditions at which the Tm of the heteroduplex of the one strand of the mutant DNA and the more complementary strand of the reference DNA is not in excess of 10°C. less than the Tm of the reference DNA ho oduplex. Typically this will correspond to a percentage identity of 85-90%. "Conservative Modifications" "Conservative modifications" are defined as (a) conservative substitutions of amino acids as hereafter defined; or (b) single or multiple insertions (extension) or deletions (truncation) of amino acids at the termini . Conservative modifications are preferred to other modifications . Conservative substitutions are preferred to other conservative modifications. "Semi-Conservative Modifications" are modifications which are not conservative, but which are (a) semi- conservative substitutions as hereafter defined; or (b) single or multiple insertions or deletions internally, but at interdomain boundaries, in loops or in other segments of relatively high mobility. Semi-conservative modifications are preferred to nonconservative modifications. Semi- conservative substitutions are preferred to other semi- conservative modifications. Non-conservative substitutions are preferred to other non-conservative modifications. The term "conservative" is used here in an a priori sense, i.e., modifications which would be expected to preserve 3D structure and activity, based on analysis of the naturally occurring families of homologous proteins and of past experience with the effects of deliberate mutagenesis, rather than post facto, a modification already known to conserve activity. Of course, a modification which is conservative a priori may, and usually is, also conservative post facto. Preferably, except at the termini, no more than about five amino acids are inserted or deleted at a particular locus, and the modifications are outside regions known to contain binding sites important to activity. Preferably, insertions or deletions are limited to the termini . A conservative substitution is a substitution of one amino acid for another of the same exchange group, the exchange groups being defined as follows I Gly, Pro, Ser, Ala (Cys) (and any nonbiogenic, neutral amino acid with a hydrophobicity not exceeding that of the aforementioned a.a.'s) II Arg, Lys, His (and any nonbiogenic, positively- 5 charged amino acids) III Asp, Glu, Asn, Gin (and any nonbiogenic negatively-charged amino acids) IV Leu, Ile, Met, Val (Cys) (and any nonbiogenic, aliphatic, neutral amino acid with a
10 hydrophobicity too high for I above) V Phe, Trp, Tyr (and any nonbiogenic, aromatic neutral amino acid with a hydrophobicity too high for I above) . Note that Cys belongs to both I and IV. 15 Residues Pro, Gly and Cys have special conformational roles. Cys participates in formation of disulfide bonds. Gly imparts flexibility to the chain. Pro imparts rigidity to the chain and disrupts ot helices. These residues may be essential in certain regions of the polypeptide, but 20 substitutable elsewhere. One, two or three conservative substitutions are more likely to be tolerated than a larger number. "Semi-conservative substitutions" are defined herein as being substitutions within supergroup I/II/III or within 25 supergroup IV/V, but not within a single one of groups I-V. They also include replacement of any other amino acid with alanine. If a substitution is not conservative, it preferably is semi-conservative. "Non-conservative substitutions" are substitutions 30 which are not "conservative" or "semi-conservative" . "Highly conservative substitutions" are a subset of conservative substitutions, and are exchanges of amino acids within the groups Phe/Tyr/Trp, Met/Leu/lle/Val, His/Arg/Lys, Asp/Glu and Ser/Thr/Ala. They are more likely to be 35. tolerated than other conservative substitutions. Again, the smaller the number of substitutions, the more likely they are to be tolerated.
"Conservatively Identical" A protein (peptide) is conservatively identical to a reference protein (peptide) it differs from the latter, if at all, solely by conservative modifications, the protein (peptide remaining at least seven amino acids long if the reference protein (peptide) was at least seven amino acids long. A protein is at least semi-conservatively identical to a reference protein (peptide) if it differs from the latter, if at all, solely by semi-conservative or conservative modifications. A protein (peptide) is nearly conservatively identical to a reference protein (peptide) if it differs from the latter, if at all, solely by one or more conservative modifications and/or a single nonconservative substitution. It is highly conservatively identical if it differs, if at all, solely by highly conservative substitutions. Highly conservatively identical proteins are preferred to those merely conservatively identical . An absolutely identical protein is even more preferred.
The core sequence of a reference protein . (peptide) is the largest single fragment which retains at least 10% of a particular specific binding activity, if one is specified, or otherwise of at least one specific binding activity of the referent. If the referent has more than one specific binding activity, it may have more than one core sequence, and these may overlap or not . If it is taught that a peptide of the present invention may have a particular similarity relationship (e.g., markedly identical) to a reference protein (peptide) , preferred peptides are those which comprise a sequence having that relationship to a core sequence of the reference protein (peptide) , but with internal insertions or deletions in either sequence excluded. Even more preferred peptides are those whose entire sequence has that relationship, with the same exclusion, to a core sequence of that reference protein (peptide) . Library The term "library" generally refers to a collection of chemical or biological entities which are related in origin, structure, and/or function, and which can be screened simultaneously for a property of interest. Libraries may be classified by how they are constructed (natural vs. artificial diversity; combinatorial vs. noncombinatorial) , how they are screened (hybridization, expression, display) , or by the nature of the screened library members (peptides, nucleic acids, etc.). In a "natural diversity" library, essentially all of the diversity arose without human intervention. This would be true, for example, of messenger RNA extracted from a non- engineered cell . In a "synthetic diversity" library, essentially all of the diversity arose deliberately as a result of human intervention. This would be true for example of a combinatorial library.; note that a small level of natural diversity could still arise as a result of spontaneous mutation. It would also be true of a noncombinatorial library of compounds collected from diverse sources, even if they were all natural products. In a "non-natural diversity" library, at least some of the diversity arose deliberately through human intervention. In a "controlled origin" library, the source of the diversity is limited in some way. A limitation might be to cells of a particular individual, to a particular species, or to a particular genus, or, more complexly, to individuals of a particular species who are of a particular age, sex, physical condition, geographical location, occupation and/or familial relationship. Alternatively or additionally, it might be to cells of a particular tissue or organ. Or it could be cells exposed to particular pharmacological, environmental, or pathogenic conditions. Or the library could be of chemicals, or a particular class of chemicals, produced by such cells. In a "controlled structure" library, the library members are deliberately limited by the production conditions to particular chemical structures. For example, if they are oligomers, they may be limited in length and' monomer composition, e.g. hexapeptides composed of the twenty genetically encoded amino acids.
Hybridization Library In a hybridization library, the library members are nucleic acids, and are screened using a nucleic acid hybridization probe. Bound nucleic acids may then be amplified, cloned, and/or sequenced.
Expression Library In an expression library, the screened library members are gene expression products, but one may also speak of an underlying library of genes encoding those products. The library is made by subcloning DNA encoding the library members (or portions thereof) into expression vectors (or into cloning vectors which subsequently are used to construct expression vectors) , each vector comprising an expressible gene encoding a particular library member, introducing the expression vectors into suitable cells, and expressing the genes so the expression products are produced. In one embodiment, the expression products are secreted, so the library can be screened using an affinity reagent, such as an antibody or receptor. The bound expression products may 3oe sequenced directly, or their sequences inferred by, e.g., sequencing at least the variable portion of the encoding DNA. In a second embodiment, the cells are lysed, thereby exposing the expression products, and the latter are screened with the affinity reagent. In a third embodiment, the cells express the library members in such a manner that they are displayed on the surface of the cells, or on the surface of viral particles produced by the cells. (See display libraries, below) . In a fourth embodiment, the screening is not for the ability of the expression product to bind to an affinity reagent, but rather for its ability to alter the phenotype of the host cell in a particular detectable manner. Here, the screened library members are transformed cells, but there is a first underlying library of expression products which mediate the behavior of the cells, and a second underlying library of genes which encode those products.
Display Library In a display library, the library members are each conjugated to, and displayed upon, a support of some kind. The support may be living (a cell or virus) , or nonliving (e.g., a bead or plate) . If the support is a cell or virus, display will normally be effectuated by expressing a fusion protein which comprises the library member, a carrier moiety allowing integration of the fusion protein into the surface of the cell or virus, and optionally a lining moiety. In a variation on this theme, the cell coexpresses a first fusion comprising the-library member and a linking moiety Ll, and a second fusion comprising a linking moiety L2 and the carrier moiety. Ll and L2 interact to associate the first fusion with the second fusion and hence, indirectly, the library member with the surface of the cell or virus.
Soluble Library In a soluble library, the library members are free in solution. A soluble library may be produced directly, or one may first make a display library and then release the library members from their supports.
Encapsulated Library In an encapsulated library, the library members are inside cells or liposomes. Generally speaking, encapsulated libraries are used to store the library members for future use; the members are extracted in some way for screening purposes. However, if they differentially affect the phenotype of the cells, they may be screened indirectly by screening the cells.
cDNA Library A cDNA library is usually prepared by extracting RNA from cells of particular origin, fractionating the RNA to isolate the messenger RNA (mRNA has a poly (A) tail, so this is usually done by oligo-dT affinity chromatography) , synthesizing complementary DNA (cDNA) using reverse transcriptase, DNA polymerase, and other enzymes, subcloning the cDNA into vectors, and introducing the vectors into cells. Often, only mRNAs or cDNAs of particular sizes will be used, to make it more likiely that the cDNA encodes a functional polypeptide. A cDNA library explores the natural diversity of the transcribed DNAs of cells from a particular source. It is not a combinatorial library. A cDNA library may be used to make a hybridization library, or it may be used as an (or to make) expression library.
Genomic DNA Library A genomic DNA library -i s made by extracting DNA from a particular source, fragmenting the DNA, isolating fragments of a particular size range, subcloning the DNA fragments into vectors , and introducing the vectors into cells . Like a cDNA library, a genomic DNA library is a natural diversity library, and not a combinatorial library . A genomic DNA library may be used the same way as a cDNA library .
Synthetic DNA library A synthetic DNA library may be screened directly (as a hybridization library) , or used in the creation of an expression or display library of peptides/proteins .
Combinatorial Libraries The term " combinatorial library" refers to a library in which the individual members are either systematic or random combinations of a limited set of basic elements , the properties of each member being dependent on the choice and location of the elements incorporated into it . Typically, the members of the library are at least capable of being screened simultaneously . Randomization may be complete or partial; some positions may be randomized and others predetermined, and at random positions, the choices may be limited in a predetermined manner. The members of a combinatorial library may be oligomers or polymers of some kind, in which the variation occurs through the choice of monomeric building block at one or more positions of the oligomer or polymer, and possibly in terms of the connecting linkage, or the length of the oligomer or polymer, too. Or the members may be nonoligomeric molecules with a standard core structure, like the 1,4 -benzodiazepine structure, with the variation being introduced by the choice of substituents at particular variable sites on the core structure. Or the members may be nonoligomeric molecules assembled like a jigsaw puzzle, but wherein each piece has both one or more variable moieties (contributing to library diversity) and one or more constant moieties (providing the functionalities for coupling the piece in question to other pieces) . Thus, in a typical combinatorial library, chemical building blocks are at least partially randomly combined into a large number (as high- as 1015) of different compounds,which are then simultaneously screened for binding (or other) activity against one or more targets . In a "simple combinatorial library", all of the members belong to the same class of compounds (e.g., peptides) and can be synthesized simultaneously. A "composite combinatorial library" is a mixture of two or more simple libraries, e.g., DNAs and peptides, or peptides, peptoids, and PNAs, or benzodiazepines and carbamates. The number of component simple libraries in a composite library will, of course, normally be smaller than the average number of members in each simple library, as otherwise the advantage of a library over individual synthesis is small. Libraries of thousands, even millions, of random oligopeptides have been prepared by chemical synthesis (Houghten et al . , Nature, 354:84-6(1991)), or gene expression (Marks et al., J Mol Biol, 222:581-97(1991)), displayed on chromatographic supports (Lam et al . , Nature, 354:82-4(1991)), inside bacterial cells (Colas et al . , Nature, 380:548-550(1996)), on bacterial pili (Lu, Bio/Technology, 13:366-372(1990)), or phage (Smith, Science, 228:1315-7(1985)), and screened for binding to a variety of targets including antibodies (Valadon et al . , J Mol Biol, 261:11-22(1996)), cellular proteins (Schmitz et al . , J Mol Biol, 260:664-677(1996)), viral proteins (Hong and
Boulanger, Embo J, 14:4714-4727(1995)), bacterial proteins (Jacobsson and Frykberg, Biotechniques, 18:878-885(1995)-), nucleic acids (Cheng et al . , Gene, 171:1-8(1996)), and plastic (Siani et al . , J Chem Inf Comput Sci, 34:588- 593(1994)). Libraries of proteins (Ladner, USP 4,664,989), peptoids (Simon et al . , Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A, 89:9367-71(1992)), nucleic acids (Ellington and Szostak, Nature, 246:818(1990)), carbohydrates, and small organic molecules (Eichler et al . , . Med Res Rev, 15:481-96(1995)) have also been prepared or suggested or drug screening purposes . The first combinatorial libraries were composed of peptides or proteins, in which all or selected amino acid positions were randomized. Peptides and proteins can exhibit high and specific binding activity, and can act as catalysts; In consequence, they are of great importance in biological systems. Nucleic acids have also been used in combinatorial libraries. Their great advantage is the ease with which a nucleic acid with appropriate binding activity can be amplified. As a result, combinatorial libraries composed of nucleic acids can be of low redundancy and hence, of high diversity. There has also been much interest in combinatorial libraries based on small molecules, which are more suited to pharmaceutical use, especially those which, like benzodiazepines, belong to a chemical class which has already yielded useful pharmacological agents . The techniques of combinatorial chemistry have been recognized as the most efficient means for finding small molecules that act on these targets. At present, small molecule combinatorial chemistry involves the synthesis of either pooled or discrete molecules that present varying arrays of functionality on a common scaffold. These compounds are grouped in libraries that are then screened against the target of interest either for binding or for inhibition of biological activity. The size of a library is the number of molecules in it. • The simple diversity of a library is the number of unique structures in it . There is no formal minimum or maximum diversity. If the library has a very low diversity, the library has little advantage over just synthesizing and screening the members individually. If the library is of very high diversity, it may be inconvenient to handle, at least without automatizing the process. The simple diversity of a library is preferably at least 10, 10E2, 10E3, 10E4, 10E6, 10E7, 10E8 or 10E9, the higher the better under most circumstances?. The simple diversity is usually not more than 10E15, and more usually not more than 10E10. The average sampling level is the size divided by the simple diversity. The expected average sampling level must be high enough to provide a reasonable assurance that, if a given structure were expected, as a consequence of the library design, to be present, that the actual average sampling level will be high enough so that the structure, if satisfying the screening criteria, will yield a positive result when the library is screened. Thus, the preferred average sampling level is a function of the detection limit, which in turn is a function of the strength of the signal to be screened. There are more complex measures of diversity than simple diversity. These attempt to take into account the degree of structural difference between the various unique sequences. These more complex measures are usually used in the context of small organic compound libraries, see below. The library members may be presented as solutes in solution, or immobilized on some form of support. In the latter case, the support may be living (cell, virus) or nonliving (bead, plate, etc.). The supports may be separable (cells, virus particles, beads) so that binding and nonbinding members can be separated, or nonseparable (plate) . In the latter case, the members will normally be placed on addressable positions on the support. The advantage of a soluble library is that there is no carrier moiety that could interfere with the binding of the members to the support. The advantage of an immobilized library is that it is easier to identify the structure of the members which were positive . When screening a soluble library, or one with a separable support, the target is usually immobilized. When screening a library on a nonseparable support, the target will usually be labeled.
Oligonucleotide Libraries An oligonucleotide library is a combinatorial library, at least some of whose members are single-stranded oligonucleotides having three o more nucleotides connected by phosphodiester or analogous bonds. The oligonucleotides may be linear, cyclic or branched, and may include non- nucleic acid moieties. The nucleotides are riot limited to the nucleotides normally found in DNA or RNA. ' For examples of nucleotides modified to increase nuclease resistance and chemical stability of aptamers , see Chart 1 in Osborne and Ellington, Chem. Rev., 97: 349-70 (1997) . For screening of RNA, see Ellington and Szostak, Nature, 346: 818-22 (1990). There is no formal minimum or maximum size for these oligonucleotides. However, the number of conformations which an oligonucleotide can assume increases exponentially with its length in bases. Hence, a longer oligonucleotide is more likely to be able to fold to adapt itself to a protein surface. On the other hand, while very long molecules can be synthesized and screened, unless they provide a much superior affinity to that of shorter molecules, they are not likely to be found in the selected population, for the reasons explained by Osborne and Ellington (1997) . Hence, the libraries of the present invention are preferably composed of oligonucleotides having a length of 3 to 100 bases, more preferably 15 to 35 bases. The oligonucleotides in a given library may be of the same or of different lengths . Oligonucleotide libraries have the advantage that libraries of very high diversity (e.g., 1015) are feasible, and binding molecules are readily amplified in vitro by polymerase chain reaction (PCR) . Moreover, nucleic acid molecules can have very high specificity and affinity to targets . In a preferred embodiment, this invention prepares and screens oligonucleotide libraries by the SELEX method, as described in King and Famulok, Molec. Biol. Repts., 20: 97- 107 (1994) ; L. Gold, C. Tuerk. Methods of producing nucleic acid ligands, US#5595877; Oliphant et al . Gene 44:177 (1986) . The term "aptamer" is conferred on those oligonucleotides which bind the target protein. Such aptamers may be used to characterize the target protein, both directly (through identification of the aptamer and the points of contact between the aptamer and the protein) and indirectly (by use of the aptamer as a ligand to modify the chemical reactivity of the protein) .~ In a classic oligonuclotide, each nucleotide (monomeric unit) is composed of a phosphate group, a sugar moiety, and either a purine or a pyrimidine base. In DNA, the sugar is deoxyribose and in RNA it is ribose. The nucleotides are linked by 5 '-3' phosphodiester bonds. The deoxyribose phosphate backbone of DNA can be modified to increase resistance to nuclease and to increase penetration of cell membranes. Derivatives such as mono- or dithiophosphates, methyl phosphonates, boranophosphates, formacetals, carbamates, siloxanes, and dimethylenethio- - sulfoxideo- and-sulfono- linked species are known in the art.
Peptide Library A peptide is composed of a plurality of amino acid residues joined together by peptidyl (-MHCO-) bonds. A biogenic peptide is a peptide in which the residues are all genetically encoded amino acid residues; it is not necessary that the biogenic peptide actually be produced by gene expression. Amino acids are the basic building blocks with which peptides and proteins are constructed. Amino acids possess both, an amino group (-NH2) and a carboxylic acid group (- COOH) . Many amino acids, but not all, have the alpha amino acid structure NH2-CHR-COOH, where R is hydrogen, or any of a variety of functional groups. Twenty amino acids are genetically encoded: Alanine, Arginine, Asparagine, Aspartic Acid, Cysteine, Glutamic Acid, Glutamine, Glycine, Histidine, Isoleucine, Leucine, Lysine, Methionine, Phenylalanine, Proline, Serine, Threonine, Tryptophan, Tyrosine, and Valine. Of these, all save Glycine are optically isomeric, however, only the L- form is found in humans. Nevertheless, the D-forms of these amino acids do have biological significance; D-Phe, for example, is a known analgesic. Many other amino acids are also known, including: 2- Aminoadipic acid; 3-Aminoadipic acid; beta-Aminopropionic acid; 2-Aminobutyric acid; 4-Aminobutyric acid (Piperidinic acid) ;6-Aminocaproic acid; 2-Aminoheptanoic acid; 2- Aminoisobutyric acid, 3-Aminoisobutyric acid; 2-Aminopimelic acid; 2,4-Diaminobutyric acid; Desmosine; 2,2'- Diaminopimelic acid; 2 ,3-Diaminopropionic acid; N-
Ethylglycine; N-Ethylasparagine; Hydroxylysine; allo- Hydroxylysine; 3-Hydroxyproline; 4-Hydroxyproline; Isodesmosine; allo-Isoleucine; N-Methylglycine (Sarcosine) ; N-Methylisoleucine; N-Methylvaline; Norvaline; Norleucine; and Ornithine. Peptides are constructed by condensation of amino acids and/or smaller peptides. The amino group of one amino acid (or peptide) reacts with the carboxylic acid group of a second amino acid (or peptide) to form a peptide (-NHCO-) bond, releasing one molecule of water. Therefore, when an amino acid is incorporated into a peptide, it should, technically speaking, be referred to as an amino acid residue . The core of that residue is the moiety which excludes the -NH and -CO linking functionalities which connect it to other residues. This moiety consists of one or more main chain atoms (see below) and the attached side chains . The main chain moiety of each amino acid consists of the -NH and -CO linking functionalities and a core main chain moiety. Usually the latter is a single carbon atom. •However, the core main chain moiety may include additional carbon atoms, and may also include nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atoms, which together form a single chain. In a preferred embodiment, the core main chain atoms consist solely of carbon atoms. The side chains are attached to the core main chain atoms. For alpha amino acids, in which the side chain is attached to the alpha carbon, the C-l, C-2 and N-2 of each residue form the repeating unit of the main chain, and the word "side chain" refers to the C-3 and higher numbered carbon atoms and their substituents. It also includes H atoms attached to the main chain atoms . Amino acids may be classified according to the number of carbon atoms which appear in the main chain between the carbonyl carbon and amino nitrogen atoms which participate in the peptide bonds. Among the 150 or so amino acids which occur in nature, alpha, beta, gamma and delta amino acids are known. These have 1-4 intermediary carbons. Only alpha amino acids occur in proteins. Proline is a special case of an alpha amino acid; its side chain also binds to the peptide bond nitrogen. For beta and higher order amino acids, there is a choice as to which main chain core carbon a side chain other than H is attached to. The preferred attachment site is the C-2 (alpha) carbon, i.e., the one adjacent to the carboxyl carbon of the -CO linking functionality. It is also possible for more than one main chain atom to carry a side chain other than H. However, in a preferred embodiment, only one main chain core atom carries a side chain other than H. A main chain carbon atom may carry either one or two side chains; one is more common-. A side chain may be attached to a main chain carbon atom by a single or a double bond; the former is more common. A simple combinatorial peptide library is one whose members are peptides having three or more amino acids connected via peptide bonds. The peptides may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and may covalently or noncovalently include nonpeptidyl moieties. The amino acids are not limited to the naturally occurring or to the genetically encoded axnino acids. A biased peptide library is one in which one or more (but not all) residues of the peptides are constant residues.
Cyclic Peptides Many naturally occurring peptides are cyclic. Cyclization is a common mechanism for stabilization of peptide conformation thereby achieving improved association of the peptide with its ligand and hence improved biological activity. Cyclization is usually achieved by intra-chain - cystine formation, by formation of peptide bond between side chains or between N- and C- terminals. Cyclization was usually achieved by peptides in solution, but several publications have appeared that describe cyclization of peptides on beads. A peptide library may be an oligope tide library or a protein library.
Oligopep tides Preferably, the oligopeptides are at least five, six, seven or eight amino acids in length. Preferably, they are composed of less than 50, more preferably less than 20 amino acids. In the case of an oligopeptide library, all or just some of the residues may be variable. The oligopeptide may be unconstrained, or constrained to a particular conformation by, e.g., the participation of constant cysteine residues in the formation of a constraining disulfide bond.
Proteins Proteins, like oligopeptides, are composed of a plurality of amino acids, but the term protein is usually reserved for longer peptides, which are able to fold into a stable conformation. A protein may be composed of two or more polypeptide chains, held together by covalent or noncovalent crosslinks. These may occur in a homooligomeric or a heterooligomeric state. A peptide is considered a protein if it (1) is at least 50 amino acids long, or (2) has at least two stabilizing covalent crosslinks (e.g., disulfide bonds). Thus, conotoxins are considered proteins. Usually, the proteins of a protein library will be characterizable as having both constant residues (the same for all proteins in the library) and variable residues (which vary from member to member) . This is simply because, for a given range of variation at each position, the sequence 'space (simple diversity) grows exponentially with the number of residue positions, so at some point it becomes inconvenient for all residues of a peptide to be variable positions. Since proteins are usually larger than oligopeptides, it is more common for protein libraries than oligopeptide libraries to feature variable positions. In the case of a protein library, it is desirable to focus the mutations at those sites which are tolerant of mutation. These may be determined by alanine scanning mutagenesis or by comparison of the protein sequence to that of homologous proteins of similar activity. It is also more likely that mutation of surface residues will directly affect binding. Surface residues may be determined by inspecting a 3D structure of the protein, or by labeling the surface and then ascertaining which residues have received labels. They may also be inferred' by identifying regions of high hydrophilicity within the protein. Because proteins are often altered at some sites but not others, protein libraries can be considered a special case of the biased peptide library. There are several reasons that one might screen a protein library instead of an oligopeptide library, including (1) a particular protein, mutated in the library, has the desired activity to some degree already, and (2) the oligopeptides are not expected to have a sufficiently high affinity or specificity since they do not have a stable conformation. When the protein library is based on a parental protein which does not have the desired activity, the parental protein will usually be one which is of high stability (melting point >= 50 deg. C.) and/or possessed of hypervariable regions. The variable domains of an antibody possess hypervariable regions and hence, in some embodiments, the protein library comprises members which comprise a mutant of
VH or VL chain, or a mutant of an antigen-specific binding fragment of such a chain. VH and VL chains are usually each about 110 amino acid residues, and are held in proximity' by a disulfide bond between the adjoing CL and CHI regions to form a variable domain. Together, the VH, VL, CL and CHI form an Fab fragment . In human heavy chains, the hypervariable regions are at
31-35, 49-65, 98-111 and 84-88, but only the first three are involved in antigen binding. There is variation among VH and VL chains at residues outside the hypervariable regions, but to a much lesser degree . A sequence is considered a mutant of a VH or VL chain if it is at least 80% identical to a naturally occurring VH or VL chain at all residues outside the hypervariable region. In a preferred embodiment, such antibody library members comprise both at least one VH chain and at least one
VL chain, at least one of which is a mutant chain, and which chains may be derived from the same or different antibodies.
The VH and VL chains may be covalently joined by a suitable linker moiety, as in a "single chain antibody" , or they may be noncovalently joined, as in a naturally occurring variable domain. If the joining is noncovalent, and the library is displayed on cells or virus, then either the VH or the VL chain may be fused to the carrier surface/coat protein. The complementary chain may be co-expressed, or added exogenously to the library. The members may further comprise some or all of an antibody constant heavy and/or constant light chain, or a mutant thereof .
Peptoid Library A peptoid is an analogue of a peptide in which one or more of the peptide bonds (-NH-CO-) are replaced by pseudopeptide bonds, which may be the same or different. It is not necessary that all of the peptide bonds be replaced, i.e., a peptoid may include one or more conventional amino acid residues, e.g., proline. A peptide bond has two small divalent linker elements, -NH- and -CO-. Thus, a preferred class of psuedopeptide bonds are those which consist of two small divalent linker elements. Each may be chosen independently from the group consisting of amine (-NH-) , substituted amine (-NR-) , carbonyl (-CO-) , thiocarbonyl (-CS-) ,methylene (-CH2-) , monosubstituted methylene (-CHR-) , disubstituted methylene (-CR1R2-), ether (-0-)" and thioether (-S-) . The more preferred pseudopeptide bonds include: N-modified -NRCO- Carba Ψ -CH2-CH2- Depsi Ψ -C0-0- Hydroxyethylene Ψ -CH0H-CH2- Ketomethylene Ψ -C0-CH2- Methylene-Oxy -CH2-0- Reduced -CH2-NH- Thiomethylene -CH2-S- Thiopeptide -CS-NH- Retro-Inverso -CO-NH-
A single peptoid molecule may include more than one kind of pseudopeptide bond. For the purposes of introducing diversity into a peptoid library, one may vary (1) the side chains attached to the core main chain atoms of the monomers linked by the pseudopeptide bonds, and/or (2) the side chains (e.g., the - R of an -NRCO-) of the pseudopeptide bonds. Thus, in one embodiment, the monomeric units which are not amino acid residues are of the structure -NR1-CR2-CO-, where at least one of RI and R2 are not hydrogen. If there is variability in the pseudopeptide bond, this is most conveniently done by using an -NRCO- or other pseudopeptide bond with an R group, and varying the R group. In this event, the R group will usually be any of the side chains characterizing the amino acids of peptides, as previously discussed. If the R group of the pseudopeptide bond is not variable, it will usually be small, e.g., not more than 10 atoms (e.g., hydroxyl, amino, carboxyl, methyl, ethyl, propyl) . -If the conjugation chemistries are compatible, a simple combinatorial library may include both peptides and ■ peptoids .
Peptide Nucleic Acid Library A PNA oligomer is here defined as one comprising a plurality of units, at least one of which is a PNA monomer which comprises a side chain comprising a nucleobase. For nucleobases, see USP 6,077,835. The classic PNA oligomer is composed of (2- aminoethyl) glycine units, with nucleobases attached by methylene carbonyl linkers. That is, it has the structure H- (-HN-CH2-CH2-N(-CO-CH2-B) -CH2-CO-)n -OH where the outer parenthesized substructure is the PNA monomer. In this structure, the nucleobase B is separated from the backbone N by three bonds, and the points of attachment of the side chains are separated by six bonds. The nucleobase may be any of the bases included in the nucleotides discussed in connection with oligonucleotide libraries. The bases of nucleotides A, G, T, C and U are preferred. A PNA oligomer may further comprise one or more amino acid residues, especially glycine and proline. One can readily envision related molecules in which (1) the -C0CH2- linker is replaced by another linker, especially one composed of two small divalent linkers as defined previously, (2) a side chain is attached to one of the three main chain carbons not participating in the peptide bond (either instead or in addition to the side chain attached to the N of the classic PNA) ; and/or (3) the peptide bonds are replaced by pseudopeptide bonds as disclosed previously in the context of peptoids . PNA oligomer libraries have been made; see e.g. Cook, 6,204,326.
Small Organic Compound Library The small organic compound library ("compound library", for short) is a combinatorial library whose members are suitable for use as drugs if, indeed, they have the ability to mediate a biological activity of the target protein. Peptides have certain disadvantages as drugs. These include susceptibility to degradation by serum proteases, and difficulty n penetrating cell membranes. Preferably, all or most of the compounds of the compound library avoid, or at least do not suffer to the same degree, one or moire of the pharmaceutical disadvantages of peptides. In designing a compound library, it is helpful to bear in mind the methods of molecular modification typically used to obtain new drugs. Three basic kinds of modification may be identified: disjunction, in which a lead drug is simplified to' identify its component pharmacophoric moieties; conjunction, in which two or more known pharmacophoric moieties, which may be the same or different, are associated, covalently or noncovalently, to form a new drug; and alteration, in which one moiety is replaced by another which may be similar or different, but which is not in effect a disjunction or conjunction. The use of the terms "disjunction", "conjunction" and "alteration" is intended only to connote the structural relationship of the end product to the original leads, and not how the new drugs are actually synthesized, although it is possible that the two are the same. The process of disjunction is illustrated by the evolution of neostigmine (1931) and edrophonium (1952) from physostigmine (1925) . Subsequent conjunction is illustrated by demecarium (1956) and ambenonium (1956) . Alterations may modify the size, polarity, or elect-ron distribution of an original moiety. Alterations include ring closing or opening, formation of lower or higher homologues, introduction or saturation of double bonds, introduction of optically active centers, introduction, removal or replacement of bulky groups, isosteric or bioisosteric substitution, changes in the position or orientation of a group, introduction of alkylating groups, and introduction, removal or replacement of groups with' a view toward inhibiting or promoting inductive (electrostatic) or conjugative (resonance) effects. Thus, the substituents may include electron acceptors and/or electron donors. Typical electron donors (+1) include -CH3, -CH2R, -CHR2, -CR3 and -COO". Typical electron acceptors (-1) include -NH3+, -NR3+, -N02, -CN, -COOH, -COOR, -CHO, -COR, ~-COR, -F, -CI, -Br, -OH, -OR, -SH, -SR, -CH=CH2, -CR=CR2, and -C=CH. The substituents may also include those which increase or decrease electronic density in conjugated systems. The' former (+R) groups include -CH3, -CR3, -F, -CI, -Br, -I, -OH, -OR, -0C0R, -SH, -SR, -NH2, -NR2, and -NHCOR. The later (-R) groups include -N02, -CN, -CHC, -COR, -COOH, -COOR, -CONH2, -S02R and -CF3. Synthetically speaking, the modifications may be achieved by a variety of unit processes, including nucleophilic and electrophilic substitution, reduction and oxidation, addition elimination, double bond cleavage, and cyclization. For the purpose of constructing a library, a compound, or a family of compounds, having one or more pharmacological activities (which need not be related to the known or suspected activities of the target protein) , may be disjoined into two or more known or potential pharmacophoric moieties. Analogues of each of these moieties may be identified, and mixtures of these analogues reacted so as to reassemble compounds which have some similarity to the original lead compound. It is not necessary that all members of the library possess moieties analogous to all of the moieties of the lead compound. The design of a library may be illustrated by the example of the benzodiazepines. Several benzodiazepine drugs, including chlordiazepoxide, diazepam and oxazepam, have been used aε^ anti-anxiety drugs. Derivatives of benzodiazepines have widespread biological activities; derivatives have been reported to act not only as anxiolytics, but also as anticonvulsants; cholecystokinin (CCK) receptor subtype A or B, kappa opioid receptor, platelet activating factor, and HIV transactivator Tat antagonists, and .GPIIblla, reverse transcriptase and ras farnesyltransferase inhibitors . The benzodiazepine structure has been disjoined into a 2-aminobenzophenone, an amino acid, and an alkylating agent. See Bunin, et al . , Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 91:4708 (1994) . Since only a few 2-aminobenzophenone derivatives are commercially- available, it was later disjoined into 2- aminoarylstannane, an acid chloride, an amino acid, and an alkylating agent. Bunin, et al . , Meth. Enzymol., 267:448 (1996) . The arylstannane may be considered the core structure upon which the other moieties are substituted, or all four may be considered equals which are conjoined to make each library member. A basic library synthesis plan and member structure is shown in Figure 1 of Fowlkes, et al . , U.S. Serial No. 08/740,671, incorporated by reference in its entirety. The acid chloride building block introduces variability at the R.1 site. The R2 site is introduced by the amino acid, and the R3 site by the alkylating agent. The R4 site is inherent in the arylstannane.- Bunin, et al . generated a 1, 4- benzodiazepine library of 11,200 different derivatives prepared from 20 acid chlorides, 35 amino acids, and 16 alkylating agents. (No diversity was introduced at R4; this group was- sed to couple the molecule to a solid phase.) According to the Available Chemicals Directory (HDL Information Systems, San Leandro CA) , over 300 acid chlorides, 80 Fmoc-protected amino acids and 800 alkylating agents were available for purchase (and more, of course, could be synthesized) . The particular moieties used were chosen to maximize structural dispersion, while limiting the numbers to those conveniently synthesized in the wells of a microtiter plate. In choosing between structurally similar compounds, preference was given to the least substituted compound. The variable elements included both aliphatic and aromatic groups. Among the aliphatic groups, both acyclic and cyclic (mono- or poly-) structures, substituted or not, were tested. (While all of the acyclic groups were linear, it would have been feasible to introduce a branched aliphatic). The aromatic groups featured either single and multiple rings, fused or not, substituted or not, and with heteroatoms or not. The secondary substitutents included - NH2, -OH, -OMe, -CN, -CI, -F, and -COOH. While not used, spacer moieties, such as -0-, -S-, -00-, -CS-, -NH-, and - NR-, could have been incorporated. Bunin et al . suggest that instead of using a 1, 4- benzodiazepine as a core structure, one may instead use a 1, 4-benzodiazepine-2, 5-dione structure. As noted by Bunin et al . , it is advantageous, although not necessary, to use a linkage strategy which leaves no trace of the linking functionality, as this permits construction of a more diverse library. Other combinatorial nonoligomeric compound libraries known or suggested in the art have been based on carbamates, mercaptoacylated pyrrolidines, phenolic agents, aminimides, N-acylamino ethers (made from amino alcohols, aromatic hydroxy acids, and carboxylic acids) , N-alkylamino ethers (made from aromatic hydroxy acids, amino alcohols and aldehydes) 1, 4-piperazines, and 1, 4-piperazine-6-ones. DeWitt, et al., Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. (USA), 90:6909-13 (1993) describe the simultaneous but separate, synthesis .of 40 discrete hydantoins and 40 discrete benzodiazepines.
They carry out their. synthesis on a solid support (inside a gas dispersion tube) , in an array format, as opposed to other conventional simultaneous synthesis techniques (e.g., in a well, or on a pin) . The hydantoins were synthesized by first simultaneously deprotecting and then treating each of five amino acid resins with each of eight isocyanates. The benzodiazepines were synthesized by treating each of five deprotected amino acid resins with each of eight 2-amino benzophenone imines . Chen, et al . , J. Am. Chem. Soc, 116:2661-62 (1994) described the preparation of a pilot (9 member) combinatorial library of formate esters. A polymer bead- bound aldehyde preparation was "split" into three aliquots, each reacted with one of three different ylide reagents.
The reaction products were combined, and then divided into three new aliquots, each of which was reacted with a different Michael donor. Compound identity was found to be determinable on a single bead basis by gas chromatography/mass spectroscopy analysis. Holmes, USP 5,549,974 (1996) sets forth methodologies for the combinatorial synthesis of libraries of thiazolidinones and metathiazanones . These libraries are made by combination of amines, carbonyl compounds, and thiols under cyclization conditions. Ellman, USP 5,545,568 (1996) describes combinatorial synthesis of benzodiazepines, prostaglandins, beta-turn mimetics, and glycerol-based compounds. See also Ellman, USP 5,288,514. Summerton, USP 5,506,337 (1996) discloses methods of preparing a combinatorial library formed predominantly of morpholino subunit structures. Heterocylic combinatorial libraries are reviewed generally in Nefzi, et al . , Chem. Rev., 97:449-472 (1997).
For pharmacological classes, see, e.g., Goth, Medical Pharmacology: Principles and Concepts (C.V. Mosby Co. : 8th ed. 1976) ; Korolkovas and Burckhalter, Essentials of Medicinal Chemistry (John Wiley & Sons, Inc.: 1976). For synthetic methods, see, e.g., Warren, Organic Synthesis.- The Disconnection Approach (John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. : 1982) ; Fuson, Reactions of Organic Compounds (John Wiley & Sons: 1966) ; Payne and Payne, How to do an Organic Synthesis (Allyn and Bacon, Inc.: 1969); Greene, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (Wiley-Interscienσe) . For selection of substituents, see e.g., Hansch and Leo, Substituent Constants for Correlation Analysis in Chemistry and Biology (John Wiley & Sons: 1979) . The library is preferably synthesized so that the individual members remain identifiable so that, if a member is shown to be active, it is not necessary to analyze it. Several methods of identification have been proposed, including: 5 (1) encoding, i.e., the attachment to each member of an identifier moiety which is more readily identified than the member proper. This has the disadvantage that the tag may itself influence the activity of the conjugate.0 (2) spatial addressing, e.g., each member is synthesized only at a particular coordinate on or in a matrix, or in a particular chamber. This might be, for example, the location of a particular pin, or a particular well on a,5. microtiter plate, or inside a "tea bag". The present invention is not limited to any particular form of identification. However, it is possible to simply characterize those members of the library which are found to be active, based 0 on the characteristic spectroscopic indicia of the various building blocks. Solid phase synthesis permits greater control over which derivatives are formed. However, the solid phase could interfere with activity. To overcome this problem,5 some or all of the molecules of each member could be liberated, after synthesis but before screening. Examples of candidate simple libraries which might be evaluated include derivatives of the following: Cyclic Compounds Containing One Hetero Atom 0 Heteronitrogen pyrroles pentasubstituted pyrroles - pyrrolidines pyrrolines5 prolines indoles beta-carbolines pyridines dihydropyridines 1,4-dihydropyridines pyrido [2 , 3-d] pyrimidines tetrahydro-3H-imidazo [4,5-c] pyridines Isoquinolines ' tetrahydroisoquinolines quinolones beta-lactams azabicyclo [4.3.0]nonen-8-one amino acid Heterooxygen furans tetrahydrofurans 2 , 5-disubstituted tetrahydrofurans pyrans hydroxypyranones tetrahydroxypyranones gamma-butyrolactones Heterosulfur sulfolenes Cyclic Compounds with Two or More Hetero atoms Multiple heteronitrogens imidazoles pyrazoles piperazines diketopiperazines arylpiperazines benzylpiperazines benzodiazepines l,4-benzodiazepine-2,5-diones hydantoins 5-alkoxyhydantoins dihydropyrimidines
1, 3-disubstituted-5, 6-dihydopyrimidine-2 , 4- diones cyclic ureas cyclic thioureas quinazolines chiral 3-substituted-quinazoline-2,4- diones triazoles 1,2,3-triazoles purines Heteronitrogen and Heterooxygen dikelomorpholines isoxazoles isoxazolines Heteronitrogen and Heterosulfur thiazolidines N-axylthiazolidines dihydrothiazoles 2-methylene-2,3-dihydrothiazates 2-aminothiazoles thiophenes 3-amino thiophenes 4-thiazolidinones 4-melathiazanones benzisothiazolones For details on synthesis of libraries, see Nefzi, et al., Chem. Rev., 97:449-72 (1997), and references cited therein.
Pharmaceutical Methods and Preparations The preferred animal subject of the present invention is a mammal. By the term "mammal" is meant an individual belonging to the class Mammalia. The invention is particularly useful in the treatment of human subjects, although it is intended for veterinary and nutritional uses as well. Preferred nonhuman subjects are of the orders Pri ata (e.g., apes and monkeys), Artiodactyla or
Perissodactyla (e.g., cows, pigs, sheep, horses, goats), Carnivora (e.g., cats, dogs), Rodenta (e.g., rats, mice, guinea pigs, hamsters), Lagomorpha (e.g., rabbits) or other pet, farm or laboratory mammals. The term "protection", as used herein, is intended to include "prevention," "suppression" and "treatment." "Prevention", strictly speaking, involves administration of the pharmaceutical prior to the induction of the disease (or other adverse clinical condition) . "Suppression" involves administration of the composition prior to the clinical appearance of the disease. "Treatment" involves administration of the protective composition after the appearance of the disease . it will be understood that in human and veterinary medicine, it is not always possible to distinguish between "preventing" and "suppressing" since the ultimate inductive event or events may be unknown, latent, or the patient is not ascertained until well after the occurrence of the event or events. Therefore, unless qualified, the term
"prevention" will be understood to refer to both prevention in the strict sense, and to suppression. The preventative or prophylactic use of a pharmaceutical usually involves identifying subjects who are at higher risk than the general population of contracting the disease, and administering the pharmaceutical to them in advance of the clinical appearance of the disease. The effectiveness of such use is measured by comparing the subsequent incidence or severity of the disease, or of particular symptoms of the disease, in the treated subjects against that in untreated subjects of the same high risk group . While high risk factors vary from disease to disease, in general, these include (1) prior occurrence of the disease in one or more members of the same family, or, in the case of a contagious disease, in individuals with whom the subject has come into potentially contagious contact at a time when the earlier victim was likely to be contagious, (2) a prior occurrence of the disease in the subject, (3) prior occurrence of a related disease, or a condition known to increase the likelihood of the disease, in the subject; (4) appearance of a suspicious level of a marker of the disease, or a related disease or condition; (5) a subject who is immunologically compromised, e.g., by radiation treatment, HIV infection, drug use,, etc., or (6) membership in a particular group (e.g., a particular age, sex, race, ethnic group, etc.) which has been epidemiologically associated with that disease. In some cases, it may be desirable to provide prophylaxis for the general population, and not just a high risk group. This is most likely to be the case when .essentially all are at risk of contracting the disease, the effects of the disease are serious, the therapeutic index of the prophylactic agent is high, and the cost of the agent is low. A prophylaxis or treatment may be curative, that is, directed at the underlying cause of a disease, or ameliorative, that is, directed at the symptoms of the disease, especially those which reduce the quality of life. It should also be understood that to be useful, the protection provided need not be absolute, provided that it is sufficient to carry clinical value. An agent which provides protection to a lesser degree than do competitive agents may still be of value if the other agents are ineffective for a particular individual, if it can be used in combination with other agents to enhance the level of protection, or if it is safer than competitive agents. It is desirable that there be a statistically significant (p=0.05 or less) improvement in the treated subject relative to an appropriate untreated control, and it is desirable that this improvement be at least 10%, more preferably at least 25%, still more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 100%, in some indicia of the incidence or severity of the disease or of at least one symptom of the disease. At least one of the drugs of the present invention may be administered, by any means that achieve their intended purpose, to protect a subject against a disease or other adverse condition. The form of administration may be systemic or topical. For example, administration of such a composition may be by various parenteral routes such as subcutaneous, intravenous, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intranasal, transdermal, or buccal routes. Alternatively, or concurrently, administration may be by the oral route. Parenteral administration can be by bolus injection or by gradual perfusion over time. A typical regimen comprises administration of an effective amount of the drug, administered over a period ranging from a single dose, to dosing over a period of hours, days, weeks, months, or years . ■It is understood that the suitable dosage of a drug of the present invention will be dependent upon the age, sex, health, and weight of the recipient, kind of concurrent treatment, if any, frequency of treatment, and the nature of the effect desired. However, the most preferred dosage can be tailored to the individual subject, as is understood and determinable by one of skill in the art, without undue' experimentation. This will typically involve adjustment of a standard dose, e.g., reduction of the dose if the patient has a low body weight. Prior to use in humans, a drug will first be evaluated for safety and efficacy in laboratory animals. In human clinical studies, one would begin with a dose expected to be safe in humans, based on the preclinical data for the drug in question, and on customary doses for analogous drugs (if any) . If this dose is effective, the dosage may be decreased, to determine the minimum effective dose, if desired. If this dose is ineffective, it will be cautiously increased, with the patients monitored for signs of side effects. See, e.g., Berkow et al, eds., The Merck Manual, 15th edition, Merck and Co., Rahway, N.J., 1987; Goodman et al . , eds., Goodman and Gilman ' s The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 8th edition, Pergamon Press, Inc., Elmsford, N.Y., (1990); Avery' s Drug Treatment : Principles and
Practice of Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics, 3rd edition, ADIS Press, LTD., Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, MD. (1987), Ebadi, Pharmacology, Little, Brown and Co., Boston, (1985) , which references and references cited therein, are entirely incorporated herein by reference. The total dose required for each treatment may be administered by multiple doses or in a single dose. The protein may be administered alone or in conjunction with other therapeutics directed to the disease or directed to other symptoms thereof. Typical pharmaceutical doses, for adult humans, are in the range of 1 ng to lOg per day, more often 1 mg to lg per day. The appropriate dosage form will depend on the disease, the pharmaceutical, and the mode of administration; possibilities include tablets, capsules, lozenges, dental pastes, suppositories, inhalants, solutions, ointments and parenteral depots. See, e.g., Berker, supra, Goodman, supra, Avery, supra and Ebadi, supra, which are entirely incorporated herein by reference, including all references cited therein. In the case of peptide drugs, the drug may be administered in the form of an expression vector comprising a nucleic acid encoding the peptide; such a vector, after incorporation into the genetic complement of a cell of the patient, directs synthesis of the peptide. Suitable vectors include genetically engineered poxviruses (vaccinia) , adenoviruses, adeno-associated viruses, herpesviruses and lentiviruses which are or have been rendered nonpathogenic . In addition to at least one drug as described herein, a pharmaceutical composition may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as excipients, carriers and/or auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. See, e.g., Berker, supra, Goodman, supra, Avery, supra and Ebadi, supra, 'which are entirely incorporated herein by reference, included all references cited therein.
Assay Compositions and Methods Target Organism The invention contemplates that it may be appropriate to ascertain or to mediate the biological activity of a substance of this invention in a target organism. The target organism may be a plant, animal, or microorganism. In the case of a plant, it may be an economic plant, in which case the drug may be intended to increase the disease, weather or pest resistance, alter the growth characteristics, or otherwise improve the useful characteristics or mute undesirable characteristics of the plant. Or it may be a weed, in which case the drug may be intended to kill or otherwise inhibit the growth of the plant, or to alter its characteristics to convert it from a weed to an economic plant. The plant may be a tree, shrub, crop, grass, etc. The plant may be an algae (which are in some cases also microorganisms) , or a vascular plant, especially gymnosperms (particularly conifers) and angiosp'erms . Angiosperms may be monocots or dicots. The plants of greatest interest are rice, wheat, corn, alfalfa, soybeans, potatoes, peanuts, tomatoes, melons, apples, pears, plums, pineapples, fir, spruce, pine, cedar, and oak. If the target organism is a microorganism, it may be algae, bacteria, fungi, or a. virus (although the biological activity of a virus must be determined in a virus-infected cell) . The microorganism may be human or other animal or plant pathogen, oiS-it may be nonpathogenic. It may be a soil or water organism, or one which normally lives inside other living things. If the .target organism is an animal, it may be a vertebrate or a nonvertebrate animal. Nonvertebrate animals are chiefly of interest when they act as pathogens or parasites, and the drugs are intended to act as biocidic or biostatic agents. Nonvertebrate- animals of interest include worms, mollusks,- and arthropods. The target organism may also be a vertebrate animal, i.e., a mammal, bird, reptile, fish or amphibian. Among mammals, the target animal preferably belongs to the order Primata (humans, apes and monkeys), Artiodactyla (e.g., cows, pigs, sheep, goats, horses), Rodenta (e.g., mice, rats) Lagomorpha (e.g., rabbits, hares), or Carnivora (e.g., cats, dogs) . Among birds, the target animals are preferably of the orders Anseriformes (e.g., ducks, geese, swans) or Galliformes (e.g., quails, grouse, pheasants, turkeys and chickens) . Among fish, the target animal is preferably of the order Clupeiformes (e.g., sardines, shad, anchovies, whitefish, salmon) .
Target Tissues The term "target tissue" refers to any whole animal, physiological system, whole organ, part of organ, miscellaneous tissue, cell, or cell component (e.g., the- cell membrane) of a target animal in which biological activity may be measured. Routinely in mammals one would choose to compare and contrast the biological impact on virtually any and all tissues which express the subject receptor protein. The main tissues to use are: brain, heart, lung, kidney, liver, pancreas, skin, intestines, adipose, stomach, skeletal muscle, adrenal glands, breast, prostate, vasculature, retina, cornea, thyroid gland, parathyroid glands, thymus, bone marrow, bone, etc. Another classification would be by cell type: B cells, T cells, macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils, mast cells, platelets, megakaryocytes, erythrocytes, bone marrow stomal cells, fibroblasts, neurons, astrocytes, neuroglia, microglia, epithelial cells (from any organ, e.g. skin, breast, prostate, lung, intestines etc) , cardiac muscle cells, smooth muscle cells, striated muscle cells, osteoblasts, osteocytes, chondroblasts, chondrocytes, keratinocytes, melanocytes, etc. Of course, in the case of a unicellular organism, there is no distinction between the "target organism" and the "target tissue".
Screening Assays Assays intended to determine the binding or the biological activity of a substance are called preliminary screening assays. Screening assays will typically be either in vitro (cell-free) assays (for binding to an immobilized receptor) or cell-based assays (for alterations in the phenotype of the cell) . They will not involve screening of whole multicellular organisms, or isolated organs. The comments on diagnostic biological assays apply mutatis mutandis to screening cell-based assays.
In Vitro vs. In Vivo Assays The term in vivo is descriptive of an event, such as binding or enzymatic action, which occurs within a living organism. The organism in question may, however, be genetically modified. The term in vi tro refers to an event which occurs outside a living organism. Parts of an organism (e.g., a membrane, or an isolated biochemical) are used, together with artificial substrates and/or conditions. For the purpose of the present invention, the term in vitro excludes events occurring inside or on an intact cell, whether of a unicellular or multicellular organism. In vivo assays include both cell-based assays, and organismic assays. The cell-based assays include both assays on unicellular organisms, and assays on isolated cells or cell cultures derived from multicellular organisms. The cell cultures may be mixed, provided that they are not organized into tissues or organs. The term organismic assay refers to assays on whole multicellular organisms, and assays on isolated organs or tissues of such organisms.
In vitro Diagnostic Methods and Reagents
The in vitro assays of the present invention may be applied to any suitable analyte-containing sample, and may be qualitative or quantitative in nature.
Sample The sample will normally be a biological fluid, such as blood, urine, lymph, semen, milk, or cerebrospinal fluid, or a fraction or derivative thereof, or a biological tissue, in the form of, e.g., a tissue section or homogenate. However, the sample conceivably could be (or derived from) a food or beverage, a pharmaceutical or diagnostic composition, soil, or surface or ground water. If a biological fluid or tissue, it may be taken from a human or other mammal, vertebrate or animal, or from a plant. The preferred sample is blood, or a fraction or derivative thereof.
Binding and Reaction Assays The assay may be a binding assay, in which one step involves the binding of a diagnostic reagent to the analyte, or a reaction assay, which involves the reaction of a reagent with the analyte. The reagents used in a binding assay may be classified as to the nature of their interaction with analyte: (1) analyte analogues, or (2) analyte binding molecules (ABM) . They may be labeled or insolubilized. In a reaction assay, the assay may look for a direct reaction between the analyte and a reagent which is reactive with the analyte, or if the analyte is an enzyme or enzyme inhibitor, for a reaction catalyzed or inhibited by the analyte. The reagent may be a reactant, a catalyst, or an inhibitor for the reaction. An assay may involve a cascade of steps in which the product of one step acts as the target for the next step. These steps may be binding steps, reaction steps, or a combination thereof .
Signal Producing System (SPS)
In order to detect the presence, or measure the amount, of an analyte, the assay must provide for a signal producing system (SPS) in which there is a detectable difference in the signal produced, depending on whether the analyte is present or absent (or, in a quantitative assay, on the amount of the analyte) . The detectable signal may be one which is visually detectable, or one detectable only with instruments. Possible signals include production of colored or luminescent products, alteration of the characteristics (including amplitude or polarization) of absorption or emission of radiation by an assay component or product, and precipitation or agglutination of a component or product. The term "signal" is intended to include the discontinuance of an existing signal, or a change in the rate of change of an observable parameter, rather than a change in its absolute value. The signal may be monitored manually or automatically. In a reaction assay, the signal is often a product of the reaction. In a binding assay, it is normally provided by a label borne by a labeled reagent.
Labels The component of the signal producing system which is most intimately associated with the diagnostic reagent is called the "label". A label may be, e.g., a radioisotope, a fluorophore, an enzyme, a co-enzyme, an enzyme substrate, an electron-dense compound, an agglutinable particle. The radioactive isotope can be detected by such means as the use of a gamma counter or a scintillation counter or by autoradiography. Isotopes which are particularly useful for the purpose of the present invention include 3H, 125I, 131l, 35S, 14C, 2P and 33P. 12ΞI is preferred for antibody labeling. The label may also be a fluorophore. When the fluorescently labeled reagent is exposed to light of the proper wave length, its presence can then be detected due to fluorescence . Among the most commonly used fluorescent labeling compounds are fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerythrin, phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, o- phthaldehyde and fluorescamine. Alternatively, fluorescence-emitting metals such as 125Eu, or others of the lanthanide series, may be incorporated into a diagnostic reagent using such metal chelating groups as diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA) of ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid (EDTA) . The label may also be a chemiluminescent compound. The presence of the chemiluminescently labeled reagent is then determined by detecting the presence of luminescence that arises during- the course of a chemical reaction. Examples of particularly useful chemiluminescent labeling compounds are luminol , isolumino, theromatic acridinium ester, imidazole, acridinium salt and oxalate ester. Likewise, a bioluminescent compound may be used for labeling. Bioluminescence is a type of chemiluminescence found in biological systems in- which a catalytic protein increases the efficiency of the chemiluminescent reaction. The presence of a bioluminescent protein is determined by detecting the presence of luminescence. Important bioluminescent compounds for purposes of labeling are luciferin, luciferase and aequorin. Enzyme labels, such as horseradish peroxidase and alkaline phosphatase, are preferred. When an enzyme label is used, the signal producing system must also include a substrate for the enzyme. If the enzymatic reaction product is not itself detectable, the SPS will include one or more additional reactants so that a detectable product appears. An enzyme analyte may act as its own label if an enzyme inhibitor is used as a diagnostic reagent.
Binding Assay Formats Binding assays may be divided into two basic types, heterogeneous and homogeneous. In heterogeneous assays, the interaction between the affinity molecule and the analyte does not affect the label, hence, to determine the amount or presence of analyte, bound label must be separated from free label. In homogeneous assays, the interaction does affect the activity of the label, and therefore analyte levels can be deduced without the need for a separation step. In one embodiment, the ABM is insolubilized by coupling it to a macromolecular support, and analyte in the sample is allowed to compete with a known' quantity of a labeled or specifically labelable analyte analogue. The "analyte analogue" is a molecule capable of competing with analyte for binding to the ABM, and the term is intended to include analyte itself. It may be labeled already, or it may be labeled subsequently by specifically binding the label to a moiety differentiating the analyte analogue from analyte. The solid and liquid phases are separated, and the labeled analyte analogue in one phase is quantified. The higher the level of analyte analogue in the solid phase, i.e., sticking to the ABM, the lower the level of analyte in the sample. In a "sandwich assay", both an insolubilized ABM, and a labeled ABM are employed. The analyte is captured by the insolubilized ABM and is tagged by the labeled ABM, forming a ternary complex. The reagents may be added to the sample in either order, or simultaneously. The ABMs may be the same or different. The amount of labeled ABM in the ternary complex is directly proportional to the amount of analyte in the sample. The two embodiments described above are both heterogeneous assays. However, homogeneous assays are conceivable. The key is that the label be affected by whether or not the complex is formed. Conjugation Methods A label may be conjugated, directly or indirectly (e.g., through a labeled anti-ABM antibody), covalently (e.g., with SPDP) or noncovalently, to the ABM, to produce a diagnostic reagent. Similarly, the ABM may be conjugated to a solid phase support to form a solid phase ("capture") diagnostic reagent. Suitable supports include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, ^natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, agaroses, and magnetite. The nature of the carrier can be either soluble to some extent or insoluble for the purposes of the present invention. The support material may have virtually any possible structural configuration so long as the coupled molecule is capable of binding to its target. Thus the support configuration may be spherical, as in a bead, or" cylindrical, as in the inside surface of a test tube, or the external surface of a rod. Alternatively, the surface may be flat such as a sheet, test strip, etc.
Biological Assays A biological assay measures or detects a biological response of a biological entity to a substance. The biological entity may be a whole organism, an isolated organ or tissue, freshly isolated cells, an immortalized cell line, or a subcellular component (such as a membrane; this term should not be construed as including an isolated receptor) . The entity may be, or may be derived from, an organism which occurs in nature, or which is modified in some way. Modifications may be genetic (including radiation and chemical mutants, and genetic engineering) or somatic (e.g., surgical, chemical, etc.). In the case of a multicellular entity, the modifications may affect some or all cells. The entity need not be the target organism, or a derivative thereof, if there is a reasonable correlation between bioassay activity in the assay entity and biological activity in the target organism. The entity is placed in a particular environment, which may be more or less natural. For example, a culture medium may, but need not, contain serum or serum substitutes, and it may, but need not, include a support matrix of some kind, it may be still, or agitated. It may contain particular biological or chemical agents, or have particular physical parameters (e.g., temperature), that are intended to nourish or challenge the biological entity. There must also be a detectable biological marker for the response. At the cellular level, the most common markers are cell survival and proliferation, cell behavior* (clustering, motility) , cell morphology (shape, color) , and biochemical activity (overall DNA synthesis, overall protein synthesis, and specific metabolic activities, such as utilization of particular nutrients, e.g., consumption of oxygen, production of C02, production of organic acids, uptake or discharge of ions) . The direct signal produced by the- biological marker may be transformed by a signal producing system into a different signal which is more observable, for example, a fluorescent or colorimetric signal. The entity, environment, marker and signal producing system are chosen to achieve a clinically acceptable level of sensitivity, specificity and accuracy. In some cases, the goal will be to identify substances which mediate the biological activity of a natural biological entity, and the assay is carried out directly with that entity. In other cases, the biological entity is used simply as a model of some more complex (or otherwise inconvenient to work with) biological entity. In that event, the model biological entity is used because activity in the model system is considered more predictive of activity in the ultimate natural biological entity than is simple binding activity in an in vitro system. The model entity is used instead of the ultimate entity because the former is more expensive or slower to work with, or because ethical considerations forbid working with the ultimate entity yet. The model entity may be naturally occurring, if the model entity usefully models the ultimate entity under some conditions. Or it may be non-naturally occurring, with modifications that increase its resemblance to the ultimate entity. Transgenic animals, such as transgenic mice, rats, and rabbits, have been found useful as model systems. In cell-based model assays, where the biological activity is mediated by binding to a receptor (target protein) , the receptor may be functionally connected to a signal (biological marker) producing system, which may be endogenous or exogenous to the cell. There are a number of techniques of doing this.
"Zero-Hybrid" Systems In these systems, the binding of a peptide to the target protein results in a screenable or selectable phenotypic change, without resort to fusing the target protein (or a ligand binding moiety thereof)" to an endogenous protein. It may be that the target protein is endogenous to the host cell, or is substantially identical to an endogenous receptor so that it can take advantage of the latter's native signal transduction pathway. Or sufficient elements of the signal transduction pathway normally associated with the target protein may be engineered into the cell so that the cell signals binding to the target protein.
"One-Hybrid" Systems In these systems, a chimera receptor, a hybrid of the target protein and an endogenous receptor, is used. The chimeric receptor has the ligand binding characteristics of the target protein and the signal transduction characteristics of the endogenous receptor. Thus, the normal signal transduction pathway of the endogenous receptor is subverted. Preferably, the endogenous receptor is inactivated, or the conditions of the assay avoid activation of the endogenous receptor, to improve the signal-to-noise ratio. See Fowlkes USP 5,789,184 for a yeast system. Another type of "one-hybrid" system combines a peptide: DNA-binding domain fusion with an unfused target receptor that possesses an activation domain.
"Two-Hybrid" System In a preferred embodiment, the cell-based assay is a two hybrid system. This term implies that the ligand is incorporated into a first hybrid protein, and the receptor into a second hybrid protein. The first hybrid also comprises component A of a signal generating system, and the second hybrid comprises component B of that system. Components A and B, by themselves, are insufficient to generate a signal. However, if the ligand binds the receptor, components A and B are brought into su ficiently close proximity so that they can cooperate to generate a signal . Components A and B may naturally occur, or be substantially identical to moieties which naturally occur, as components of a single naturally occurring biomolecule, or they may naturally occur, or be substantially identical to moieties which naturally occur, as separate naturally occurring biomolecules which interact in nature.
Two-Hybrid System: Transcription Factor Type In a preferred "two-hybrid" embodiment, one member of a peptide ligand: receptor binding pair is expressed as a fusion to a DNA-binding domain (DBD) from a transcription factor (this fusion protein is called the "bait"), and the other is expressed as a fusion to a transactivation domain (TAD) (this fusion protein is called the "fish", the "prey", or the "catch") . The transactivation domain should be complementary to the DNA-binding domain, i.e., it should interact with the latter so as to activate transcription of a specially designed reporter gene that carries a binding site for the DNA-binding domain. Naturally, the two fusion proteins must likewise be complementary. This complementarity may be achieved by use of the complementary and separable DNA-binding and transcriptional activator domains of a single transcriptional activator protein, or one may use complementary domains derived from different proteins. The domains may be identical to the native domains, or mutants thereof. The assay members may be fused directly to the DBD or TAD, or fused through an intermediated linker. . . . The target DNA operator may be the. native operator sequence, or a mutant operator. Mutations in the operator may be coordinated with mutations in the DBD and the TAD. An example of a suitable transcription activation system is one comprising the DNA-binding domain from the bacterial repressor LexA and the activation domain from the yeast transcription factor Gal4, with the reporter gene operably linked to the LexA operator. It is not necessary to employ the intact target receptor; j st the ligand-binding moiety is sufficient.. The two fusion proteins may be expressed from the same or different vectors. Likewise, the activatable reporter gene may be expressed from, the same vector as either fusion protein (or both proteins) , or from a third vector. Potential DNA-binding domains include Gal4, LexA, and mutant domains substantially identical to the above. Potential activation domains include E. coli B42, Gal4 activation domain II, and HSV VP16, and mutant domains substantially identical to the above. Potential operators include the native operators for the desired activation domain, and mutant domains substantially identical to the native operator. The fusion proteins may comprise nuclear localization signals. The assay system will include a signal producing system, too. The first element of this system is a reporter gene operably linked to an operator responsive to the DBD and TAD of choice. The expression of this reporter gene will result, directly or indirectly, in a selectable or screenable phenotype (the signal). The signal producing' system may include, besides the reporter gene, additional genetic or biochemical elements which cooperate in the production of the signal. Such an element could be, for example, a selective agent in the cell growth medium. There may be more than one signal producing system, and the system may include more than one reporter gene. The sensitivity of the system may be adjusted by, e.g., use of competitive inhibitors of any step in the activation or signal production process, increasing or decreasing the number of operators, using a stronger or weaker DBD or TAD,. etc. When the signal is the death or survival of the cell in question, or proliferation or nonproliferation of the cell in question, the assay is said to be a selection. When the signal merely results in a detectable phenotype by which the signaling cell may be differentiated from the same cell in a nonsignaling state (either way being a living cell) , the assay is a screen. However, the term -'^screening assay" may be used in a broader sense to include a selection. When the narrower sense is intended, we will use the term "nonselective screen" . Various screening and selection ^systems are discussed in Ladner, USP 5,198,346. Screening and selection may be for or against the peptide: target protein or compound: target protein interaction. Preferred assay cells are microbial (bacterial, yeast, algal, protozooal) , invertebrate, vertebrate (esp. mammalian, particularly human) . The best developed two- hybrid assays are yeast and mammalian systems. Normally, two hybrid assays are used to determine whether a protein X and a protein Y interact, by virtue of their ability to reconstitute the interaction of the DBD and the TAD. However, augmented two-hybrid assays have been used to detect interactions that depend on a third, non- protein ligand. For more guidance on two-hybrid assays, see Brent and Finley, Jr., Ann. Rev. Genet., 31:663-704 (1997); Fremont- Racine, et al., Nature Genetics, 277-281 (16 July 1997); Allen, et al . , TIBS, 511-16 (Dec. 1995); LeCrenier, et al . , BioEssays, 20:1-6 (1998); Xu, et al . , Proc. Nat. Acad. sci. (USA), 94:12473-8 (Nov. 1992); Esotak, et al . , Mol. Cell. Biol., 15:5820-9 (1995); Yang, et al . , Nucleic Acids Res., 23:1152-6 (1995); Bendixen, et al . , Nucleic Acids Res., 22:1778-9 (1994); Fuller, et al . , BioTechniques, 25:85-92 (July 1998); Cohen, et al . , PNAS (USA) 95:14272-7 (1998); Kolonin and Finley, Jr., PNAS (USA) 95:14266-71 (1998). See also Vasavada, et al . , PNAS (USA), 88:10686-90 (1991) (contingent replication assay), and Rehrauer, et al., J. Biol. Chem., 271:23865-73 91996) (LexA repressor cleavage assay) .
Two-Hybrid Systems: reporter Enzyme type In another embodiment, the components A and B reconstitute an enzyme which is not a transcription factor.
As in the last example, the effect of the reconstitution of the enzyme is a phenotypic change which may be a screenable change, a selectable change, or both.
In vivo Diagnostic Uses Radio-labeled ABM may be administered to the human or animal subject. Administration is typically by injection, e.g., intravenous or arterial or other means of administration in a quantity sufficient to permit subsequent dynamic and/or static imaging using suitable radio-detecting devices. The dosage is the smallest amount capable of providing a diagnostically effective image, and may be determined by means conventional in the art, using known radio-imaging agents as a guide. Typically, the imaging is carried out on the whole body of the subject, or on that portion of the body or organ relevant to the condition or disease under study. The amount of radio-labeled ABM accumulated at a given point in time in relevant target organs can then be quantified. A particularly suitable radio-detecting device is a scintillation camera, such as a gamma camera. A scintillation camera is a stationary device that can be used to image distribution of radio-labeled ABM. The detection device in the camera senses the radioactive decay, the distribution of which can be recorded. Data produced by the imaging system can be digitized. The digitized information can be analyzed over time discontinuously or continuously. The digitized data can be processed to produce images, called frames, of the pattern of uptake of the radio-labeled ABM in the target organ at a discrete point in time. I most continuous (dynamic) studies, quantitative data is obtained by observing changes in distributions of radioactive decay in target organs over time. In other words, a time-activity analysis of the data will illustrate uptake through clearance of the radio-labeled binding protein by the target organs with time . Various factors should be taken into consideration in selecting an appropriate radioisotope. The radioisotope must be selected with a view to obtaining good quality resolution upon imaging, should- be safe for diagnostic use in humans and animals, and should preferably have a short physical half-life so as to decrease the amount of radiation received by the body. The radioisotope used should preferably be pharmacologically inert, and, in the quantities administered, should-" not'have any substantial physiological effect . The ABM may be radio-labeled with different isotopes of iodine, for example 13I, 125I, or 131I (see for example, U.S. Patent 4,609,725). The extent of radio-labeling must, however be monitored, since it will affect the calculations made based on the imaging results (i.e. a diiodinated ABM will result in twice the radiation count of a similar monoiodinated ABM over the same time frame) . In applications to human subjects, it may be desirable to use radioisotopes other than 125I for labeling in order to decrease the total dosimetry exposure of the human body and to optimize the detectability of the labeled molecule (though this radioisotope can be used if circumstances require) . Ready availability for clinical use is also a factor. Accordingly, for human applications, preferred radio-labels are for example, 99πTc, 67Ga, 68Ga, 90Y, ι In, 113raIn, 123I, 18SRe, 18SRe or 211At . The radio-labeled ABM may be prepared by various methods. These include radio-halogenation by the chloramine - T method or the lactoperoxidase method and subsequent purification by HPLC (high pressure liquid chromatography) , for example as described by J. Gutkowska et al in
"Endocrinology and Metabolism Clinics of America: (1987) 16. (1) :183. Other known methods of radio-labeling can be used, such as IODOBEADS™. There are a number of different methods of delivering the radio-labeled ABM to the end-user. It may be administered by any means that enables the active agent to reach the agent's site of action in the body of a mammal. Because proteins are subject to being digested when administered orally, parenteral administration, i.e., intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, would ordinarily be used to optimize absorption of an ABM, such as an antibody, which is a protein.
EXAMPLES We are utilizing a mouse model of diet-induced obesity that progresses to diabetes. The diet is high in fat and has been documented to lead to diabetes in C57BL/6J mice (Surwit at al . , 1988) . After weaning, C57BL/6J mice were fed either the high fat diet or a standard lab chow diet for 16 weeks. Body weight was monitored bi-weekly. Fasting glucose and insulin levels were measured after 2, 4, 8, and 16 weeks on the diets. At each time point, several diabetic and control mice were sacrificed and a number of tissues collected. For further analysis, RNA was extracted from the pancreas at each time point and used in DNA microarray analyses .
Animal Models . Obesity and subsequent" hyperinsulinemia and hyperglycemia were induced by feeding a group of 3 week old mice (50 C57BL/6 males) a high-fat diet (Bio-Serve, Frenchtown, NJ, #F1850 High Carbohydrate-High Fat; 56% of calories from fat, 16% from protein and 27% from carbohydrates) . Another group of 3 week old mice (20 C57B1/6 males) were fed the normal control diet (PMI Nutrition International Inc., Brentwood, MO, Prolab RMH3000; 14% of calories from, fat, 16% from protein and 60% from carbohydrates) . The mice were placed onto the respective diets immediately following weaning. Animal, weights were determined weekly. Fasting blood-glucose and plasma insulin measurements were determined after 2, 4, 8 and 16 weeks on the respective diets. Normal weight, normal fasting blood glucose and normal fasting plasma insulin levels are defined as the respective mean values of the animals fed the control diet. Two of the "most typical" animals were selected for each group (Control, hyperinsulinemic and Diabetic) at each time point ( 2,4, 8, and 16 weeks after commencement of diet) for sacrifice. The selected mice were sacrificed and pancreas tissue obtained and immediately processed for RNA isolation. Fasting Blood Glucose Levels. The- day after obtaining body weight measurements at the indicated time points (top panel) , mice were fasted 8 hours and blood glucose levels was measured from a drop of blood taken from the tip of the tail of fasted (8 hr) mice using a Lifescan Genuine One Touch glucometer. All measurements occurred between 2:00 p and 5:00 pm.
Plasma insulin measurements. Blood was collected from the tail of fasted (8 hr) mice into a heparinized capillary tube and stored on ice. All collections occurred between 2:00 pm and 5:00 pm. Plasma was separated from red blood cells by centrifugation for 10 minutes at 8000 x g and then stored at -2'0'C. Insulin concentrations were determined using the Ultra-Sensitive Rat Insulin ELISA kit (ALPCO) and rat insulin standards (ALPCO) essentially as instructed by the manufacturer. Values were adjusted by a factor of 1.23 as determined by the manufacturer to correct for the species difference in cross- reactivity with the antibody.
RNA isolation. Total RNA was isolated from pancreas using the RNA STAT-60 Total RNA/mRNA Isolation Reagent according to the manufacturer's instructions (Tel-Test, Friendswood, TX) .
Sample Quantification and Quality Assessment Total RNA was quantified and assessed for quality on a Bioanalyzer RNA 6000 Nano chip (Agilent) . Each chip contained an interconnected set of gel-filled channels that allowed for molecular sieving of nucleic acids. Pin- - electrodes in the chip were used to create electrokinetic forces capable of driving molecules through these micro- channels to perform electrophoretic separations. Ribosomal peaks were measured by fluorescence signal and displayed in an electropherogram. A successful total RNA sample featured 2 distinct ribosomal peaks (18S and 28S rRNA) . Biotinylated cRNA Hybridization Target. Total RNA was prepared for use as a hybridization target as described in the manufacturer's instructions for CodeLink Expression Bioarrays (TM) (Amersham Biosciences) .. The CodeLink Expression Bioarrays utilize nucleic acid hybridization of a biotin-labeled complementary RNA(cRNA) target with DNA oligonucleotide probes attached to a gel matrix. The biotin-labeled cRNA target is prepared by a linear amplification method. Poly (A) + RNA (within the total RNA population) is primed for reverse transcription by a DNA oligonucleotide containing a T7 RNA polymerase promoter 5' to a- (dT) 24 sequence. After second-strand cDNA synthesis, the cDNA serves as the template in an in vi tro transcription- (IVT) reaction to produce the target cRNA. The IVT is performed in the presence of biotinylated nucleotides to label the target cRNA. This procedure results in a 50-200 fold linear amplification of the input poly (A) + RNA.
Hybridization Probes. The oligonucleotide probes were provided by the Codelink Uniset Mouse I Bioarray (Amersham, product code 300013) . Amine-terminated oligonucleotide probes are attached to a three-dimensional polyacrylamide gel matrix. There are 10,000 oligonucleotide probes, each specific to a well-characterized mouse gene. Each mouse gene is representative of a unique gene cluster from the fourth quarter 2001 Genbank Unigene build. There are also 500 control probes. The sequences of the probes are proprietary to Amersham. However, for each probe, Amersham identifies the corresponding mouse gene by NCBI accession number, OGS, LocusLink, Unigene Cluster ID, and description (name) . This information should be available from Amersham. In the case of the differentially expressed probes, this information is duplicated in master table 1. For the complete list, see http : //www . amershambiosciences . com/aptrix/upp01077.nsf/Cont ent/codelink_literature
Under "Gene Lists", select "Uniset Mouse I", and a gene list, in Excel format, can be downloaded.
Hybridization Using the cRNA target, the hybridization reaction mixture is prepared and loaded into array chambers for bioarray processing as set forth in the manufacturer's instructions for CodeLink Gene Expression BioarraysTM (Amerhsam Biosciences) . Each sample is hybridized to an individual microarray. Hybridization is at 37°C. The hybridization buffer is prepared as set forth in the Motorola instructions. Hybridization to the microarray is detected with an avidinated fluorescent reagent, Streptavidin-Alexa Fluor ® 647 (Amersham) .
Mouse Gene Expression Analysis Processed arrays were scanned using a GenePix 4000B Microarray Scanner (Axon Instruments, Inc.); array images were acquired using the Amersham CodeLink™ Analysis Software (Release 2.2) . The Amersham CodeLink™ Analysis Software gives an integrated optical density (IOD) value for every spot; a unique background value for that spot is subtracted, resulting in "raw" data points. individual chips are then normalized by the Amersham Codelink™ software according to the median raw intensity for all 10,000 genes. A negative control threshold (0.2) is also calculated according to the control probes. The expression data was analyzed to identify genes whose expression levels changed significantly with -respect to :
Normal mice compared to hyperinsulinemic mice at 2, 4, 8 and 16 weeks on normal vs. high-fat diet.
Normal mice compared to hyperinsulinemic/hyperglycemic mice at 2, 4, 8 and 16 weeks on normal vs. high-fat diet . Hyperinsulinemic compared to hyperinsulinemic/hyperglycemic mice at 2 , 4, 8 and 16 weeks on high-fat diets.
Database Searches Nucleotide sequences and predicted amino acid sequences were compared to public domain databases using the Blast 2.0 program (National Center for Biotechnology Information, National Institutes of Health) . Nucleotide sequences were displayed using ABI prism Edit View 1.0.1 (PE Applied Biosystems, Foster City, CA) . Nucleotide database searches were conducted with the then current version of BLASTN 2.0.12, see Altschul, et al . , "Gapped BLAST and PSI-BLAST: a new generation of protein database .search programs", Nucleic Acids Res., 25:3389-3402 (1997) . Searches employed the default parameters, unless otherwise stated. For blastN searches, the default was the blastN matrix (1,-3), with gap penalties of 5 for existence and 2 for extension. Protein database searches were conducted with the then- current version of BLAST X, see Altschul et al . (1997), supra. Searches employed the default parameters, unless otherwise stated. The scoring matrix was BLOSUM62, with gap costs of 11 for existence and 1 for extension. The standard low complexity filter was used. "ref" indicates that NCBI's RefSeq is the source database. The identifier that follows is a RefSeq accession number, not a GenBank accession number. "RefSeq sequences are derived from GenBank and provide non-redundant curated data representing our current knowledge of known genes. Some records include additional sequence information that was never submitted to an archival database but is available in the literature. A small number of sequences are provided through collaboration; the underlying primary sequence data is available in GenBank, but may not be available in any one GenBank record. RefSeq sequences are not submitted primary sequences . RefSeq records are owned by NCBI and therefore can be updated as needed to maintain current annotation or to incorporate additional sequence information." See also http: //www.ncbi .nlm.nih.gov/LocusLink/refseq.html It will be appreciated by those in the art that the exact results of a database search will change from day to day, as new sequences are added. Also, if you query with a longer version of the original sequence, the results will change. The results given here were obtained at one time and no guarantee is made that the exact same hits would be obtained in a search on the filing date. However, if an alignment between a particular query sequence and .a particular database sequence is discussed, that alignment should not change (if the parameters and sequences remain unchanged) .
Northern Analysis . Northern analysis may be used to confirm the results. Favorable and unfavorable genes, identified as described above, or fragments thereof, will be used as probes in Northern hybridization analyses to confirm their differential expression. Total RNA isolated from subject mice will be resolved by agarose gel electrophoresis through a 1% agarose, 1 % formaldehyde denaturing gel, transferred to positively charged nylon membrane, and hybridized to a probe labeled with [32P] dCTP that was generated from the aforementioned gene or fragment using the Random Primed DNA Labeling Kit (Roche, Palo Alto, CA) , or to a probe labeled with digoxigenin (Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Indianapolis, IN), according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Real-Time RNA Analysis. Real-time RNA analysis may also.be used for confirmation. For "real-time" RNA analysis, RNA will be converted to cDNA and then probed with gene-specific primers made for each clone. "Real-time" incorporation of fluorescent dye will be measured to determine the amount of specific transcript present in each sample. Sample differences (control vs. hyperinsulinemic, hyperinsulinemic vs. diabetic, or control vs. diabetic) will be evaluated. Confirmation using several independent animals is desirable.
In situ Hybridization Another form of confirmation may be provided by nonisotopic in si tu hybridizations (NISH) on selected human (obtained by Tissue Informatics) and mouse tissues using cRNA probes generated from mouse genes found to be up- or down-regulated during the disease progression. In si tu hybridizations may also be performed on mouse tissues using cRNA probes generated from differentially expressed DNAs. These cRNA's will hybridize, to their corresponding messenger RNA' s present in cells and will provide information regarding the particular cell types within a tissue that is expressing the particular gene as well as the relative level of gene expression. The cRNA probes may be generated by in vi tro transcription of template cDNA by Sp6 or T7 RNA polymerase in the presence of digoxigenin-11-UTP (Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Mannheim, Germany; Pardue, M.L. 1985. In: In situ hybridization, Nucleic acid hybridization, a practical approach: IRL Press, Oxford, 179- 202) .
Transgenic Animals. Transgenic expression may be used to confirm the results. In one embodiment, a mouse is engineered to overexpress the favorable or unfavorable mouse gene in question. In another embodiment, a mouse is engineered to express the corresponding favorable or unfavorable human gene. In a third embodiment, a nonhuman animal other than a mouse,, such as a rat, rabbit, goat, sheep or pig, is engineered to express the favorable or unfavorable mouse or human gene.
Hyperquantitative Tissue Analysis In addition to gene expression analysis the tissue sections can also be analyzed using Tissuelnformatics, Inc.'s TissueAnalytics™ software. A single representative section may be cut from each tissue block, placed on a slide, and stained with H&E. Digital images of each slide may be acquired using an research microscope and digital camera (Olympus E600 microscope and Sony DKC-ST5) . These images may be acquired at 20x magnification with a resolution of 0.64 mm/pixel. A hyperquantitative analysis may be performed on the resulting images : First a digital image analysis can identify and annotate structural objects in a tissue using machine vision. These objects, that are constituents of the tissue, can be annotated because they are visually identifiable and have a biological meaning like islets and tubules. Subsequently a quantification of these structures regarding their geometric properties like area or stain intensities and their relationship to the field of view or per unit area in terms of a % coverage may be performed. Features or parameters for hyper-quantification are specific for each tissue, and may also include relations between features, measures of overall heterogeneity, including orientation, relative locations, and textures-.
Correlation Analysis Mathematical statistics provides a rich set of additional tools to analyze time resolved data sets of hyperquantitative and gene expression profiles for similarities, including rank correlation, the calculation of regression and correlation coefficients, and clustering. Continuous functions may also be fitted through the data points of individual gene and tissue feature data. Relation between gene expression and hyper-quantitative tissue data may be linear or non-linear, in synchronous or asynchronous arrangements .
Example 1 Obesity is increasing at an alarming rate in the United States. In parallel, the incidence of type II diabetes is also rising. We are interested in defining alterations in gene expression that correlate with the development of these conditions in the hopes of reversing these dangerous trends. Insulin plays a major role in regulating blood glucose - levels. It stimulates the uptake of glucose in adipose tissue and striated muscle for storage as intracellular triglycerides and glycogen. Insulin also inhibits the release of glucose from the liver. Normally, this would prevent the rise in blood sugar concentration that occurs after eating. However, in the early stages of type 2 diabetes, resistance to insulin is seen. Initially, production and secretion of insulin from the pancreas increases to compensate for the tissue resistance. Eventually, however, the pancreas cannot keep up with the insulin resistance, blood glucose levels rise, and insulin production by the pancreas is finally exhausted. We are utilizing a mouse model of diet-induced obesity that progresses to diabetes. The diet is high in fat, an increasing component in the U.S. diet, and has been documented to lead to diabetes in C57BL/6J mice (Surwit et al . , 1988) . After weaning, C57BL/6J mice were fed either the high fat diet or a standard lab chow diet for 16. weeks. Body weight was monitored bi-weekly. Fasting glucose and insulin levels were measured after 2, 4, 8, and 16 weeks on the diets. Consumption of the HF diet resulted in significant, progressive increases in body weight and fasting insulin levels in comparison to consumption of the Std diet. Fasting glucose levels of mice on the HF diet were dramatically increased at the first time point assayed (2 weeks) and remained high through the duration of the experiment (16 weeks) . At each time point, several diabetic and control mice were sacrificed and a number of tissues collected. RNA was extracted from the pancreas at each time point. In order to identify pancreatic genes involved in the development of type 2 diabetes, we used microarray analysis to compare RNA expression levels of 10,000 genes in pancreas of high fat diet fed and control diet fed mice at various time points in the progression of type 2 diabetes.
Microarray analysis provides a more global picture of gene regulation, allowing the identification of families or groups of genes showing similar expression patterns that potentially imply similar or coordinated roles in disease progression. Of 10,000 genes analyzed, 115 were up-regulated and 91 down-regulated greater than two-fold in comparisons between 5 the diabetic and non-diabetic mice. Glutathione peroxidase 1 (Gpxl, NM_008160) was one of the most down-regulated genes when comparing HF to Std mice. . It decreased dramatically over the 16 week study.
10 Example 2 Interestingly, further analysis of the time points and exploration of gene pathways and functionally related genes revealed a subset of glutathione peroxidase, S-transferase and synthetase genes exhibiting a consistent decrease in
15 expression in the diabetic mice; 6 of 23 glutathione peroxidase, S-transferase and synthetase genes represented on the array were decreased in diabetic pancreas-at all four time points and an additional 5 were decreased, at three of the four time points.
20 Only three of these genes had been identified using the two-fold cut-off criterion. Thus,, microarray analysis combined with time point sampling can reveal subtle yet consistent changes in gene expression and identify altered metabolic pathways.
25. With nearly half (11 of 23) of the genes in a related family of genes being consistently down-regulated, the glutathione peroxidase, S-transferase and synthetase genes represent an interesting family "for further study in pancreas expression, especially in relation to obesity and
30 diabetes. Introduction to Master Tables
The master tables reflect applicants' analysis of the gene chip data.
For each probe corresponding to a differentially expressed mouse gene, Master Table 1 identifies
Col. 1: The mouse gene (upper) and mouse protein (lower) database accession #s.
Col. 2: The corresponding mouse Unigene Cluster, as of the 4th Quarter 2001 build.
Col. 3: The behavior (differential expression) observed for the mouse gene. This column identifies the gene as favorable (F) or unfavorable (U) on the basis -of its differential behavior. There are three possible comparisons, HI-D, C-HI, and C-D, where C=control (normal), HI-hyperinsulinemic, and D=diabetic. If HI>D, C>HI, or C>D, the behavior for that subject comparison is considered unfavorable. If the inequality is reversed, "the behavior for that subject comparison is considered favorable. In the Master Table, the numerical value is the ratio of the greater value to the lesser value. If this ratio is at least two fold, the degree of differential expression is considered strong. Usually only mouse genes exhibiting at least one strong differential expression behavior are listed in the Master Table; exceptions are noted in the Examples. In some of the related applications cited above, and perhaps occasionally in this application, a ratio may be given as a negative number. This does not have its usual mathematical meaning; it is merely a flag that in the comparison, the former value was less than the latter one, i.e., the gene was favorable. For the purpose of applying the teachings of the specification concerning desired ratios, any negative value should be converted to a positive one by taking its absolute value. Col. 4: A related human protein, identified by its database accession number. Usually, several such proteins are identified relative to each mouse gene. These proteins have 5 been identified by BLAST searches, as explained in cols. 6- 8.
Col. 5: The name of the related human protein.
10 Col. 6: The score (in bits) for the alignment performed by the BLAST program.
Col. 7: The E-value for the alignment performed by the BLAST program. It is worth noting that Unigene considers a Blastx 15 E Value of less than le-6 to be a "match" to the reference sequence of a cluster.
- - Unless otherwise indicated, the bit score and E-value for the alignment is with respect to the alignment of the mouse
20 DNA of col. 1 to the human protein of col. 4 by BlastX, according to the default parameters.
Master Table 1 is divided into three subtables on the basis of the behavior in col. 3. If a gene has at least one
25 significantly favorable behavior, and no significantly unfavorable ones, it is put into Subtable 1A. In the opposite case, it is put into Subtable IB. If its behavior is mixed, i.e., at least one significantly favorable and at least one significantly unfavorable, it is put into Subtable
30 IC. Note that this classification is based on the strongest observed differential expression behaviors for each of the three subject comparisons, C-HI, HI-D and C-D.
Master Table 2 has just three columns.
35 Col . 1 : Mouse gene .
Col. 2: behavior. Same as col. 3 in Master table 1, Col . 3 : Human protein classes . Based on the related human proteins defined in Master Table 1, Master Table 2 generalizes, if possible as to classes of human proteins which are expected to have similar behavior. For a given mouse gene, several human protein classes may be listed because of the diversity of the human proteins found to be related. In some cases, the stated human protein classes may be hierarchial, e.g., one may be a subset of another. In other cases, the stated classes may be non-overlapping but related. And in yet other cases, the stated classes may be non-overlapping and unrelated. Combinations of the above are also possible.
In addition to the classes stated, the corresponding human ____ gene clusters are also of interest. These may be obtained in a number of ways . First, one may search on Unigene (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?db=unigene) for the identified human protein. Review the "hits" (each of which is a Unigene record) for those prefixed by "Hs." Secondly, one may access the Unigene record for the mouse gene cluster (which is given in Master Table 1) , and then click on "Homologene" . This will bring up a new page which includes the section "Possible Homologous Genes" . One of the entries should- be a Homo sapiens gene (considered by Unigene to be the most related human gene) ; click on its Unigene record link. Additional information of interest may be accessed by searching with the mouse gene accession # in the Mouse Gene Informatics database, at http://www.informatics.jax.org/.
MASTER TABLE 1: SIGNIFICANTLY DIFFERENTIALLY EXPRESSED MOUSE GENES/PROTEINS AND CORRESPONDING HUMAN GENES/PROTEINS
Subtable 1A: Favorable Mouse Genes/Proteins and Corresponding Human Genes/Proteins
Figure imgf000110_0001
Figure imgf000111_0001
Figure imgf000111_0002
Figure imgf000112_0002
Figure imgf000112_0001
Figure imgf000113_0002
Figure imgf000113_0001
Figure imgf000114_0002
Figure imgf000114_0001
Figure imgf000115_0001
Figure imgf000115_0002
Figure imgf000116_0002
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000117_0002
Figure imgf000118_0002
Figure imgf000118_0001
Figure imgf000119_0001
Figure imgf000119_0002
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000120_0002
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000121_0002
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000122_0002
Figure imgf000123_0002
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000124_0002
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000125_0002
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000126_0002
Figure imgf000127_0001
Figure imgf000127_0002
Figure imgf000128_0001
Figure imgf000128_0002
Figure imgf000128_0003
Figure imgf000129_0001
Figure imgf000129_0002
Figure imgf000130_0001
Figure imgf000130_0002
Figure imgf000131_0001
Figure imgf000132_0001
Figure imgf000132_0002
Figure imgf000133_0001
Figure imgf000133_0002
Figure imgf000133_0003
Figure imgf000134_0001
Figure imgf000134_0002
Figure imgf000134_0003
Figure imgf000135_0001
Figure imgf000135_0002
Figure imgf000136_0001
Figure imgf000136_0002
Figure imgf000137_0001
Figure imgf000137_0002
Figure imgf000138_0001
Figure imgf000138_0002
Figure imgf000139_0001
Figure imgf000139_0003
Figure imgf000139_0002
Figure imgf000140_0001
Figure imgf000140_0002
Figure imgf000140_0003
Figure imgf000141_0002
Figure imgf000141_0001
Figure imgf000142_0002
Figure imgf000142_0001
Figure imgf000143_0001
Figure imgf000143_0002
Figure imgf000144_0002
Figure imgf000144_0001
Figure imgf000145_0001
Figure imgf000145_0002
Figure imgf000146_0001
Figure imgf000146_0003
Figure imgf000146_0002
Figure imgf000147_0002
Figure imgf000147_0001
Figure imgf000148_0001
Figure imgf000148_0002
Figure imgf000149_0002
Figure imgf000149_0001
Figure imgf000150_0002
Figure imgf000150_0001
Figure imgf000151_0001
Figure imgf000151_0002
Figure imgf000152_0001
Figure imgf000152_0002
Figure imgf000153_0002
Figure imgf000153_0001
Figure imgf000154_0002
Figure imgf000154_0001
Figure imgf000155_0001
Figure imgf000155_0002
Figure imgf000156_0002
Figure imgf000156_0001
Figure imgf000157_0001
Figure imgf000157_0003
Figure imgf000157_0002
Figure imgf000158_0002
Figure imgf000158_0001
Figure imgf000159_0002
Figure imgf000159_0001
Figure imgf000160_0002
Figure imgf000160_0001
Figure imgf000161_0001
Figure imgf000161_0003
Figure imgf000161_0002
Figure imgf000162_0001
Figure imgf000162_0002
Figure imgf000163_0002
Figure imgf000163_0001
Figure imgf000164_0001
Figure imgf000164_0002
Figure imgf000165_0001
Figure imgf000165_0002
Figure imgf000166_0001
ras homolog gene family, member C; Aplysia RAS-related homolog 9(oncogene RHO H9); Aplysia ras-related homolog 9; RhoC; RAS homolog gene family, NP_786886.1 member C (oncogene RHO H9) P08134 RHOCJHUMAN Transforming protein RhoC (H9) TVHURC GTP-binding protein rhoC CAA29969.1 rhoC coding region (AA 1-193) AAC33179.1 GTPase AAH07245.1 ras homolog gene family, member C AAH09177.1 ras homolog gene family, member C AAM21119.1 AF498972_1 small GTP binding protein RhoC ras homolog gene family, member A; Aplysia ras-related homolog 12; Rho12; NP_001655.1 RhoA; Ras homolpg.gene family, member A (oncogene RHO H12) P06749 RHOA_HUMAN Transforming protein RhoA (H12) TVHU12 GTP-binding protein rhoA CAA28690.1 ORF (AA 1-193) AAC33178.1 GTP-binding protein AAH01360.1 ras homolog gene family, member A AAH05976.1 ras homolog gene family, member A AAM21117.1 AF498970_1 small GTP binding protein RhoA . B Chain B, Crystal Structure Of The Dbl And Pleckstrin Homology Domains Of 1LB1 Dbs In Complex With Rhoa D Chain D, Crystal Structure Of The Dbl And Pleckstrin Homology Domains Of 1LB1 Dbs In Complex With Rhoa F Chain F, Crystal Structure Of The Dbl And Pleckstrin Homology Domains Of 1LB1 Dbs In Complex With Rhoa H Chain H, Crystal Structure Of The Dbl And Pleckstrin Homology Domains Of 1LB1 Dbs In Complex With Rhoa
Figure imgf000167_0001
Figure imgf000167_0002
1FTN Crystal Structure Of The Human RhoaGDP COMPLEX
Figure imgf000167_0003
Figure imgf000168_0001
Figure imgf000168_0002
Figure imgf000169_0001
Figure imgf000169_0002
Figure imgf000170_0001
Figure imgf000170_0002
Figure imgf000170_0003
Figure imgf000171_0001
Figure imgf000171_0002
Figure imgf000172_0001
Figure imgf000172_0002
Figure imgf000173_0001
Figure imgf000173_0002
AAD34147.1 CGl-05 protein CDK5 regulatory subunit associated protein 1 isoform b; CDK5 activator-binding NPJD57166.3 protein C42-like; chromosome 20 open reading frame 34 AAF29131.1 HSPC167 BAB55120.1 unnamed protein product AAH01215.1 similar to CGl-05 protein
NP_055792.1 apoptotic chromatin condensation inducer in the nucleus; acinus AAD56724.1 acinusL BAA31645.2 KIAA0670 protein T00365 hypothetical protein KIAA0670 - human (fragment) AAD56725.1 acinusS CAD62309.1 unnamed protein product AAD56726.1 acinusS lysophospholipase I; lysophospholipase 1 ; lysophospholipid-specific NP_006321.1 lysophospholipase; acyl-protein thioesterase-1 AAC31610.1 lysophospholipase AAD26993.1 lysophospholipase AAG10063.1 AF291053_1 acyl-protein thioesterase-1 AAH08652.1 AAH08652 lysophospholipase I AAH10397.1 AAH10397 lysophospholipase I A Chain A, Crystal Structure Of The Human Acyl Protein Thioesterase 1 At 1 5 A 1FJ2 Resolution B Chain B, Crystal Structure Of The Human Acyl Protein Thioesterase 1 At 1 5 A 1FJ2 Resolution AAD26994.1 lysophospholipase isoform NPJD09191.1 lysophospholipase II; acyl-protein thioesterase
Figure imgf000174_0001
Figure imgf000174_0002
AAC72844.1 acyl-protein thioesterase
Figure imgf000174_0003
Figure imgf000175_0002
Figure imgf000175_0001
Figure imgf000176_0001
Figure imgf000176_0002
Figure imgf000177_0001
Figure imgf000177_0002
Figure imgf000178_0001
Figure imgf000179_0001
Figure imgf000180_0001
Figure imgf000181_0001
Figure imgf000182_0001
Figure imgf000183_0001
Figure imgf000184_0002
Figure imgf000184_0001
Figure imgf000185_0001
Figure imgf000186_0001
Figure imgf000186_0002
Figure imgf000187_0001
Figure imgf000188_0001
Figure imgf000188_0002
Figure imgf000189_0002
Figure imgf000189_0001
Figure imgf000190_0002
Figure imgf000190_0001
Figure imgf000191_0001
Figure imgf000191_0003
Figure imgf000191_0002
Figure imgf000192_0001
Figure imgf000192_0002
Figure imgf000193_0002
Figure imgf000193_0001
Figure imgf000194_0001
Figure imgf000194_0002
Figure imgf000195_0001
Figure imgf000195_0002
Figure imgf000196_0001
Figure imgf000196_0003
Figure imgf000196_0002
Figure imgf000197_0002
Figure imgf000197_0001
Figure imgf000198_0002
Figure imgf000198_0001
Figure imgf000199_0002
Figure imgf000199_0001
Figure imgf000200_0001
Figure imgf000200_0002
Figure imgf000201_0002
Figure imgf000201_0001
Figure imgf000202_0002
Figure imgf000202_0001
Figure imgf000203_0002
Figure imgf000203_0001
Figure imgf000204_0002
Figure imgf000204_0001
Figure imgf000205_0001
Figure imgf000206_0001
Figure imgf000206_0002
Figure imgf000206_0003
Figure imgf000207_0001
Figure imgf000208_0001
Figure imgf000208_0002
Figure imgf000209_0002
Figure imgf000209_0001
Figure imgf000210_0001
Figure imgf000211_0001
Figure imgf000211_0002
Figure imgf000211_0003
Figure imgf000212_0002
Figure imgf000212_0001
Figure imgf000213_0002
Figure imgf000213_0001
Figure imgf000214_0002
Figure imgf000214_0001
Figure imgf000215_0001
Figure imgf000216_0002
Figure imgf000216_0001
Figure imgf000217_0001
Figure imgf000217_0003
Figure imgf000217_0002
Figure imgf000218_0001
Figure imgf000219_0001
Figure imgf000219_0002
Figure imgf000220_0002
Figure imgf000220_0001
Figure imgf000221_0002
Figure imgf000221_0001
Figure imgf000222_0002
Figure imgf000222_0001
Figure imgf000223_0002
Figure imgf000223_0001
Figure imgf000224_0001
Figure imgf000224_0002
Figure imgf000224_0003
Figure imgf000225_0001
Figure imgf000225_0002
Figure imgf000226_0001
Figure imgf000226_0002
Figure imgf000227_0001
Figure imgf000227_0002
Figure imgf000228_0001
Figure imgf000228_0002
Figure imgf000229_0001
Figure imgf000230_0001
Figure imgf000231_0001
Figure imgf000232_0001
Figure imgf000233_0001
Figure imgf000234_0001
Figure imgf000235_0001
Figure imgf000236_0001
Figure imgf000237_0001
Figure imgf000237_0002
Figure imgf000238_0001
Figure imgf000238_0002
Figure imgf000239_0001
Figure imgf000240_0001
Figure imgf000241_0001
Figure imgf000242_0001
Figure imgf000243_0001
Figure imgf000244_0001
Figure imgf000245_0001
Figure imgf000246_0001
Figure imgf000247_0001
Figure imgf000248_0001
Figure imgf000249_0001
Figure imgf000250_0001
Figure imgf000251_0001
Figure imgf000252_0001
Figure imgf000253_0001
Figure imgf000254_0001
Figure imgf000255_0001
Figure imgf000256_0001
Figure imgf000257_0001
Figure imgf000258_0001
Figure imgf000259_0001
Figure imgf000260_0001
Figure imgf000261_0001
Figure imgf000262_0001
Figure imgf000263_0001
Figure imgf000263_0002
Figure imgf000264_0001
Figure imgf000265_0001
Figure imgf000266_0001
Figure imgf000267_0001
Figure imgf000268_0001
Figure imgf000269_0001
Figure imgf000270_0001
Figure imgf000271_0001
Figure imgf000271_0002
Figure imgf000272_0001
Figure imgf000273_0001
Figure imgf000274_0001
Figure imgf000275_0001
Figure imgf000276_0001
Figure imgf000277_0001
Figure imgf000278_0001
Figure imgf000279_0001
Figure imgf000280_0001
Figure imgf000281_0001
Figure imgf000282_0001
Figure imgf000283_0001
Figure imgf000283_0002
Figure imgf000284_0001
Figure imgf000285_0001
Figure imgf000286_0001
Figure imgf000287_0001
Figure imgf000288_0001
Figure imgf000289_0001
Figure imgf000290_0001
Figure imgf000291_0001
Figure imgf000292_0001
Figure imgf000293_0001
Figure imgf000294_0001
Subtable IC: Mixed Mouse Genes/Proteins and the Corresponding Human Proteins
Figure imgf000295_0001
Master Table 2 : Human Protein Classes
Subtable 2A: Classes Corresponding to Favorable Mouse
Genes/Proteins
Figure imgf000296_0001
Figure imgf000297_0001
Figure imgf000298_0001
Figure imgf000299_0001
Figure imgf000300_0001
Figure imgf000301_0001
Figure imgf000302_0001
Figure imgf000303_0001
caspase 7, apoptosis-related cysteine protease caspase 7 isoform alpha caspase 7 isoform alpha precursor; ICE-like apoptotic protease 3; apoptotic protease MCH-3; Lice2 alpha/beta/gamma; (ICE-LAP3); (CMH-1) caspase 7 isoform delta caspase 7 isoform delta, large subunit; ICE-like apoptotic protease 3; apoptotic protease MCH-3; Lice2 alpha/beta/gamma Lice2 alpha Lice2 beta cysteine protease Lice2 gamma cysteine protease Mch3 isoform alpha F:(C-IR)+3.24 phosphorylase uridine phosphorylase Uver-specific uridine phosphorylase Similar to uridine phosphorylase Similar to uridine phosphorylase similar to uridine phosphorylase; similar to Q16831 (PID:g2494059) Uridine phosphorylase (UDRPase) F:(C-D)+3.22 apoptosis specific protein apoptosis-related protein APG5 autophagy 5-like; apoptosis specific protein F:(C-IR)+3.21 Protease serine protease prostasin prostasin precursor Prostasin precursor protease, serine, 8 (prostasin) prostasin preproprotein; protease, serine, 8 serine protease protease, serine, 22; brain-specific serine protease 4; protease, serine SI famfly member 22; tryptase epsilon Brain-specific serine protease 4 precursor (BSSP-4) (SP001LA) serine protease 27 serine protease PRSS22 marapsin Marapsin precursor marapsin; channel-activating protease 2
Figure imgf000304_0001
pancreasin
Figure imgf000305_0001
beta-N-acety exosaminidase beta chain precursor cervical cancer proto-oncogene 7 Membrane protein peripheral membrne protein Golgi protein golgi phosphoprotein 3; golgi protein; golgi peripheral membrane protein 1, 34 kDa; golgi-associated protein; coat-protein GPP34-related protein Transport Protein component of SNARE complex snapin SNARE associated protein snapin transcription factor teancriptional repressor negatively regulates MYC MXI1 gene; max interactor 1 Similar to MAX interacting protein 1 Max-associated protein Mxil MAX interacting protein 1 isoform a; MAX-interacting protein 1; MAX dimerization protein 2 MAX interacting protein 1 isoform b; MAX-interacting protein 1; MAX dimerization protein 2 citrate fransporter protein mitochondrial citrate transport protein Tricarboxyiate transport protein, mitochondrial precursor (Citrate transport protein) (CTP) (Tricarboxyiate carrier protein) solute carrier family 25 (mitochondrial carrier; citrate transporter), member 1; solute carrier famfly 20 (mitochondrial citrate transporter), member 3 citrate transport protein GTPase Rho family GTPase ras homolog gene family ras homolog gene family, member A; Aplysia ras-related homolog 12; Rho 12; RhoA; Ras homolog gene family, member A (oncogene RHO H12) ras homolog gene famfly, member B; Aplysia RAS-related homolog 6 (oncogene RHO H6); Aplysia ras-related homolog 6; RhoB; RAS homolog gene family, member B (oncogene RHO H6) ras homolog gene family, member C; Aplysia RAS-related homolog 9(oncogene RHO H9); Aplysia ras-related homolog 9; RhoC; RAS homolog
Figure imgf000306_0001
gene family, member C (oncogene RHO H9) Transforming protein RhoA (H12) Tramforming protein RhoB (H6) Transforming protein RhoC (H9) ras homolog gene family, member A ras homolog gene famfly, member C smaU GTP binding protein RhoA smaU GTP binding protein RhoB smaU GTP binding protein RhoC GTPase GTP-binding protein GTP-binding protein rhoA GTP-binding protein rhoB GTP-binding protein rhoC multidrag resistance protein Human Rhoa Complexed With Gtp Analogue dehydrogenase isovaleryl dehydrogenase isovaleryl-coA dehydrogenase (IVD) Isovaleryl-CoA dehydrogenase, mitochondrial precursor (IVD) isovaleryl-CoA dehydrogenase precursor acyl-CoA dehydrogenase Acyl-CoA dehydrogenase, short-chain specific, mitochondrial precursor (SCAD) (Butyryl-CoA dehydrogenase) acyl-CoA dehydrogenase precursor, short-chain-specific acyl-Coenzyme A dehydrogenase, C-2 to C-3 short chain acyl-Coenzyme A dehydrogenase, C-2 to C-3 short chain precursor acyl-Coenzyme A dehydrogenase, short/branched chain precursor medium-chain acyl-CoA dehydrogenase Acyl-CoA dehydrogenase, short/branched chain specific, mitochondrial precursor (SBCAD) (2-methyl branched chain acyl-CoA dehydrogenase) (2-MEBCAD) (2-methylbutyryl-coen2r me A dehydrogenase) (2-methylbutyryl-CoA dehydrogenase) transcription factor estrogen-responsive finger protein, efp (RING finger, coiled-coil domains); zinc finger protein 147 (Tripartite motif protein 25) zinc finger protein 147; Zinc finger protein-147; estrogen-responsive finger protein; tripartite motif protein TRIM25; tripartite motif-containing 25 Similar to zinc finger protein 147 (estrogen-responsive finger protein) WW domam-containing adapter
Figure imgf000307_0001
Figure imgf000308_0001
Figure imgf000309_0001
Figure imgf000310_0001
lysophosphoUpase isoform lysophosphoUpase I; lysophosphoUpase 1; lysophospholipid-specific lysophosphoUpase; acyl-protein thioesterase-1 lysophospholipase π; acyl-protein thioesterase similar to lysophospholipase E; acyl-protein thioesterase novel protein similar to lysophosphoUpase H (LYPLA2) membrane protein transmembrane protein cleft Up and palate fransmembrane protein 1 left Up and palate associated fransmembrane protein 1 Similar to cleft lip and palate associated transmembrane protein 1 cisρlatin(CDDP) resistance related protein CRR cisplatin resistance related protein CRR9p GTPase-activating protein (GAP) interacts with ARFl ADP-ribosylation factor GTPase activating protein ADP-ribosylation factor GTPase activating protein 3; ADP-ribosylation factor GTPase activating protein 1 zinc finger protein zinc finger protein 289, IDl regulated; likely ortholog of mouse ZFP289 ARFGAP protein ARFGAPl protein transcription factor serum response factor-related protein serum response factor-related protein 2 serum response factor-related protein R2 myocyte-specific enhancer myocyte-specific enhancer factor 2 (XMEF2) MYOCYTE-SPECIFIC ENHANCER FACTOR 2B (SERUM RESPONSE FACTOR-LUCE PROTEIN 2) box transcription enhancer MADS box transcription enhancer factor 2, polypeptide B (myocyte enhancer factor 2B) colUgin colligin-2 coUagen binding protein 2
Figure imgf000311_0001
Figure imgf000312_0001
dipeptidyl peptidase IV dipeptidyl peptidase IV-related protein-1 dipeptidyl peptidase IV-related protein-2 dipeptidyl peptidase 8 Similar to dipeptidylpeptidase 8 dipeptidylpeptidase 8 isoform 1; dipeptidyl peptidase 8 dipeptidyl peptidase 8 isoform 2; dipeptidyl peptidase 8 dipeptidylpeptidase 9 dipeptidylpeptidase 9; dipeptidyl peptidase 9; dipeptidyl peptidase IV-related protein-2 dipeptidyl peptidase-Uke protein 9 Def-6 protein differentially expressed in FDCP 6 homolog; differentiaUy expressed in FDGP (mouse homolog) 6 Similar to differentiaUy expressed in FDCP (mouse homolog) 6 t-complex associated testis expressed t-complex associated testis expressed 1 t-complex-associated-testis-expressed 1-like T-complex associated-testis-expressed 1-like (Protein 91/23 Retinitis pigmentosa 3 RP3 candidate gene Protein C20orf29 chromosome 20 open reading frame 29 receptor
G-protein coupled receptor mediates neurotensin, such as hypotension, hyperglycemia, hypothermia, antinociception, and regulation of intestinal motflity and secretion neurotensin receptor neurotensin receptor 1 Neurotensin receptor type 1 (NT-R-1) (High-affinity levocabastine-insensitive neurotensin receptor) (NTRH) neurotensin receptor 2 neurotensin receptor 2; neurotensin receptor, type 2; levocabastine-sensitive neurotensin receptor; (NT-R-2); (NTR2 receptor) Similar to neurotensin receptor 2 hypothetical protein FLJ20152
Figure imgf000313_0001
Figure imgf000314_0001
Figure imgf000315_0001
Figure imgf000316_0001
binding protein SM-11044 binding protein Similar to S.cerevisiae EMP70 protein precursor (S25110) isomerase protein disulfide isomerase protein protein dsulfide isomerase-related protein protein disulfide isomerase-related protein 5 Protein disulfide isomerase A6 precursor (Protein disulfide isomerase P5) human P5 P5 protein precursor binding protein DNA bmding protein negative regulatory element-binding protein; NREBP SON protei <(SON3) (Negative regulatory element-binding protein) (NRE-binding protein) (DBP-5) (Bax antagonist selected in saccharomyces 1) (BASS1) (Protein C21orf50) SON DNA-binding protein isoform B; NRE-binding protein; chromosome 21 open reading frame 50; SON protein; negative regulatory element-binding protein; Bax antagonist selected in Saccharomyces 1 SON DNA-binding protein isoform C; NRE-binding protein; chromosome 21 open reading frame 50; SON protein; negative regulatory element-binding protein; Bax antagonist selected in Saccharomyces 1 SON DNA-binding protein isoform E; NRE-binding protein; chromosome 21 open reading frame 50; SON protein; negative regulatory element-binding protein; Bax antagonist selected in Saccharomyces 1 SON DNA-binding protein isoform F; NRE-binding protein; chromosome 21 open reading frame 50; SON protein; negative regulatory element-binding protein; Bax antagonist selected in Saccharomyces 1 SON DNA-binding protein isoform G; NRE-binding protein; chromosome 21 open reading frame 50; SON protein; negative regulatory element-binding protein; Bax antagonist selected in Saccharomyces 1 Similar to RIKEN cDNA 1200003G01 gene protease serine protease kallikrein serine protease protease M kallikrein-like serine protease; zyme; protease M; neurosin kallikrein 6 (neurosin, zyme) kallikrein-like protein 6 kallikrein 6 preproprotein; protease M; protease, serine, 9; neurosin; zyme Kallikrein 6 precursor (Protease M) (Neurosin) (Zyme) (SP59)
Figure imgf000317_0001
Figure imgf000318_0001
Figure imgf000319_0001
Figure imgf000320_0001
Figure imgf000321_0001
Figure imgf000322_0001
Figure imgf000323_0001
Figure imgf000324_0001
Figure imgf000325_0001
Figure imgf000326_0001
scavenger receptor class B, member 2; CD36 antigen (coUagen type I receptor, thrombospondin receptor) -; CD36 antigen (coUagen type I receptor, tlirombospondin receptor)-like 2 (lysosomal integral membrane protein E) CD36 antigen (coUagen type I receptor, thrombospondin receρtor)-Uke 2 (lysosomal integral membrane protein E) lysosomal integral membrane protein E Lysosome membrane protein E (LIMP TT) (85 kDa lysosomal membrane sialoglycoprotein) (LGP85) (CD36 antigen-like 2) 85kDa lysosomal sialoglycoprotein glycoprotein GPElb/GPrV Platelet glycoprotein TV (GPTV) (GPIEB) (CD36 antigen) (PAS TV) (PAS-4 protein) F:(C-D)+2.56 Kinase protein kinase serine/threonine protein kinase Testis-specific protein kinase 1 (Testicular protein kinase 1); TESKl Similar to testis-specific kinase 1 Testis-specific protein kinase 2 testicular protein kinase 2 F:(C-D)+2.56 scaffold protein general endocytosis intersectin 1 (SH3 domain protein); SH3 domain protein-1 A; intersectin (SH3 domain protein 1A); human intersectin-SH3 domam-containing protein SH3P17 intersectin short form intersectin long isoform Intersectin 2 (SH3 domam-containing protein IB) (SH3P18) (SH3P18-like WASP associated protein) intersectin 2 long isoform intersectin 2 isoform 1; SH3 domain protein IB; SH3P18-like WASP associated protein intersectin 2 isoform 3; SH3 domain protein IB; SH3P18-Uke WASP associated protein F:(C-IR)+2.55 protease and adhesion domains membrane-anchored protein disintegrin disintegrin-metaUoprotease MADM a disintegrin and metalloprotease domain 10; ADAM 10 ADAM 17 precursor (A ch"smtegrin and metalloproteinase domain 17) (TNF-alpha converting enzyme) (TNF-alpha convertase) (Snake venom-like
Figure imgf000327_0001
protease) (CD 156b antigen) a disintegrin and metalloproteinase domain 17 isoform 1 preproprotein; TNF-alpha converting enzyme; snake venom-like protease a disintegrin and metalloproteinase domain 17 isoform 2 preproprotein; TNF-alpha converting enzyme; snake venom-like protease TNF-alpha converting enzyme TNF-alpha converting enzyme precursor F:(C-D)+2.54 protease ATP dependent protease mitochondrial matrix protein LON protease Lon protease-like protein peroxiso al lon protease endopeptidase La homolog precursor, mitochondrial (version 1) endopeptidase La homolog precursor, mitochondrial (version 2) ATP-dependent lon protease protease, serine, 15; Lon protease-like protein; hLON ATP-dependent protease; LON protease Lon protease homolog, mitochondrial precursor (Lon protease-like protein) (LO P) (LONHs) protease, serine, 15 F:(C-D)+2.54 heparan sulfate proteoglycans glypican glypican 1 precursor; GPC1 Glypican 2 glypican 2; cerebroglycan glypican 4 similar to glypican 4 Glypican-4 precursor (K-glypican) glypican-6 glypican 6 precursor; GPC6 proteoglycan heparan sulfate proteoglycan F:(C-D)+2.54 heUcase protein
ATP-dependent RNA heUcase heUcase like protein 2 DEAD box RNA heUcase DDX4 protein
Figure imgf000328_0001
DEAD box RNA heUcase DDX3 DEAD H (Asp-Glu-Ala-Asp His) box polypeptide 3 DEAD H (Asp-Glu-Ala-Asp His) box polypeptide 3; DEAD H box-3; heUcase like protein 2; CAP-Rf DEAD-box protein 3 (Helicase-like protein 2) (HLP2) (DEAD-box, X isoform) similar to DEAD/H (Asp-Glu-Ala-Asp/His) box polypeptide 3; D-E-A-D (aspartate-glutarrøte-alanine-aspartate) box polypeptide 3 ; DEAD (aspartate-glutamate-alanine-aspartate) box polypeptide 3; embryonic RNA helicase [Mus musculus] DEAD-box protein 3, Y-chromosomal DEAD H (Asp-Glu-Ala-Asp His) box polypeptide, Y chromosome; DEAD/H box-3, Y-linked dead box, Y isoform dead box, X isoform DEAD H (Asp-Glu-Ala-Asp/His) box polypeptide 4; VASA protein VASA protein DEAD-box protein 4 (VASA homolog) DEAD/H (Asp-Glu-Ala-Asp/His) box polypeptide 17 (72kD) DEAD/H (Asp-Glu-Ala-Asp/His) box polypeptide 17 isoform 1; DEAD/H (Asp-Glu-Ala-Asp/His) box polypeptide 17 (72kD); probable RNA-dependent heUcase p72 Probable RNA-dependent heUcase p72 (DEAD-box protein p72) (DEAD-box protein 17) DEAD-box protein p72 F:(C-D)+2.54 HSPC2S8 Protein C14orfl (HSPC288) (Protein AD-011) (x0006) potential membrane protein C14orfl F:(C-D)+2.54 dehydrogenase retinol dehydrogenase sterol/retinol dehydrogenase retinol dehydrogenase similar protein orphan short-chain dehydrogenase / reductase; retinol dehydrogenase similar protein microsomal NAD+-dependent retinol dehydrogenase 4 11-cis retinol dehydrogenase 11-cis retinol dehydrogenase (11-cis RDH) Similar to retinol dehydrogenase 5 (11-cis and 9-cis) epimerase hydroxysteroin epimerase
Figure imgf000329_0001
3-hydroxysteroid epimerase 3-hydroxysteroid epimerase; oxidative 3-alpha-hydroxysteroid-dehydrogenase; 3(alpha->beta)-hydroxysteroid epimerase; retinol dehydrogenase; oxidoreductase; NAD+ -dependent 3 alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenas reductase oxidoreductase F:(C-IR)+2.53 spUcing factor possible role in pre-mrna processing splicing factor p54; arginine-rich 54 kDa nuclear protein arginine-rich nuclear protein Splicing factor arginine/serine-rich 11 (Arginine-rich 54 kDa nuclear protein) (p54) Similar to spUcing factor, arginine/serine-rich 11 F:(C-D)+2.52 transgelin transgelin 2; SM22-alpha homolog; TAG2 similar to Homo sapiens mRNA for KIAA0120 gene with GenBank Accession Number D21261.1 F:(C-D)+2.5 hypothetical protein FLJ13611 Similar to RIKEN cDNA 2410002022 gene F:(C-D)+2.5 regucalcin gene promotor region related protein; RGPR-pl 17
FLJ00305 protein F:(C-D)+1.85 cytoskeletal protein keratin keratin related product keratin 14; cytokeratin 14 keratin 14 (epidermolysis buUosa simplex, Dowling-Meara, Koebner) similar to keratin 14 (epidermolysis bullosa simplex, Dowling-Meara, Koebner) keratin 14, type I, cytoskeletal; (K14) (CK 14) keratin 15 keratin 15; keratin-15, basic; keratin-15, beta; type I cytoskeletal 15; cytokeratin 15; (K15) (CK 15) cytokeratin 15 (AA 1 - 456) keratin 17 Similar to keratin 17 Keratin, type I cytoskeletal 17 (Cytokeratin 17) (K17) (CK 17) (39.1) cytokeratin 17 keratin 19
Figure imgf000330_0001
Figure imgf000331_0001
F:(C-D)+1.60 hypothetical protein SB 143 hypothetical protein MGC10986 AAH04400 Unknown (protein for MGC: 10986) F:(C-D)+1.62 phosphoUpid-binding protein calciur -dependent phospholipid-binding protein role in the regulation of cellular growth and in signal transduction pathways Annexin A13 (Annexin XET) (Annexin, intestine-specific) (ISA) annexin. A13 isoform b F:(C-1R)+1.64 Growth arrest and DNA-damage-inducible protein Growth arrest and DNA-damage-inducible protein GADD45 beta Negative growth-regulatory protein MyDl 18) (Myeloid differentiation primary response protein MyD 118) - growth arrest and DNA damage inducible protein beta myeloid differentiation DKFZP566B133 protein; myeloid differentiation primary response; myeloid differentiation primary response gene negative growth-regulatory protein MyDl 18 F:(C-JR)+1.62 Uprin Uprin-alpha Liprins interact with members of LAR family of fransmembrane protein tyrosine phosphatases interaction may regulate the disassembly of focal adhesion and thus help orchestrate cell-matrix interactions Hprin-alpha2 Mρrin-alpha4 similar to Uprin alpha 4 [Rattus norvegicus] PTPRF interacting protein alpha 1 isoform b; LAR-interacting protein 1 LAR-interacting protein la LAR-interacting protein lb LAR-interacting protein LIP lb PPFIA1 protein F:(C-IR)+1.53 transferase aminotransferase mitochondrial aminotransferase alanine-glyoxylate arninotransferase alanine-glyoxylate arninotransferase 2 alanine-glyoxylate arninotransferase 2-like 1
Figure imgf000332_0001
Similar to alanine-glyoxylate arninotransferase 2-like 1
Figure imgf000333_0001
Figure imgf000334_0001
Subtable 2B: Unfavorable Mouse Genes/Proteiris and Human Protein Classes
Figure imgf000335_0001
Figure imgf000336_0001
Figure imgf000337_0001
Figure imgf000338_0001
Figure imgf000339_0001
Figure imgf000340_0001
Figure imgf000341_0001
Figure imgf000342_0001
Figure imgf000343_0001
Figure imgf000344_0001
Figure imgf000345_0001
Figure imgf000346_0001
U:(C-D)2.97 Upin lipin 1 Similar to Upin 1 lipin 2 Lipin 3 [Segment 2 of 3] Lipin 3 (Lipin 3-like) [Segment 3 of 3] Lipin 3 (Lipin 3-like) U:(C-D)2.97 bmding protein Ca(2+)- and phosphoUpid-binding protein annexin annexin I annexin I; annexin I (lipocortin I); Upocortin I Annexin I (Lipocortin I) (Calpactin II) (Chromobindin 9) (P35) (Phospholipase A2 inhibitory protein) annexin II annexin Al similar to annexin Al annexin A2 annexin A2; annexin E; annexin H (lipocortin TT); calpactin I, heavy polypeptide (p36); Upocortin E; Annexin E (Upocortin I); annexin E (lipocortin E; calpactin I, heavy polypeptide) bA255Al 1.8 (novel protein similar to annexin A2 (ANXA2) (lipocortin H, calpactin I heavy chain, chromobmdin 8, PAP-IV)) annexin IE Annexin El (Lipocortin El) (Placental anticoagulant protein El) (PAP-HI) (35-alpha calcimedin) (Inositol 1,2-cyclic phosphate 2-phosphohydrolase) annexin A3 annexin A3; Annexin El (lipocortin HI); annexin IE (lipocortin IH, 1,2-cyclic-inositoi-ρhosρhate phosphodiesterase, placental anticoagulant protein El, calcimedin 35-alpha); calcimedin 35-alpha annexin Vπ isoform 1; annexin VH (synexin); synexin annexin A7 Annexin A7 (Annexin VE) (Synexin) synexin annexin XI annexin Al 1 annexin Al 1; annexin XI; autoantigen, 56-kD; calcyclin-associated annexin 50 Annexin All (Annexin XI) (Calcyclin-associated annexin 50) (CAP-50) (56 kDa autoantigen)
Figure imgf000347_0001
Upocortin
Figure imgf000348_0001
1
Figure imgf000349_0001
dJ131H7.1 (garnma-a inobutyric acid (GABA) receptor rho 2) GABAA receptor beta 2 subunit gamn -aminobutyric acid A receptor beta 2 subunit; (GABA)A receptor beta 2 subunit gamn -arninobutyric acid (GABA) receptor, rho 2 precursor Gamn -aminobutyric-acid receptor rho-2 subunit precursor (GABA(A) receptor) ganima-arninobutyric acid receptor rho-2 chain precursor Gamrm-airiinobutyric-acid receptor beta-2 subunit precursor (GABA(A) receptor) gamnra-arrnnobutyric acid (GABA) A receptor, beta 2 isoform 2 gaπima-arriinobutyric acid (GABA) A receptor, beta 3 Gamnra-ammobutyric-acid receptor beta-3 subunit precursor (GABA(A) receptor) similar to Garrima-arnmobutyric-acid receptor rho-3 subunit precursor (GABA(A) receptor) garnma-aminobutyric acid (GABA) A receptor; beta 3 isoform 1 precursor garπtna-ammobutyric acid (GABA) A receptor, beta 3 isoform 2 precursor garrrnia-amhiobutyric acid A receptor beta 3 chain spUce form 1 GABA-alpha receptor beta-3 subunit ganirm-armnobutyric acid (GABA) A receptor, delta GABA-A receptor delta subunit Gamma-aminobutyric-acid receptor delta subunit precursor (GABA(A) receptor) U:(C-D)2.76 binding protein U:(C-IR)2.88 mannose bmding protein mannose binding lectin mannose-bmding lectin precursor mannan-binding lectin MBL precursor soluble mannose-bmding lectin precursor; mannose-binding lectin; mannose bmding protein; Mannose-binding lectin 2, soluble (opsonic defect) Mannose-binding protein C precursor (MBP-C) (MBPl) (Mannan-bmding protein) (Mannose-bmding lectin) U:(C-D)2.87 CD 14 antigen monocyte antigen CD14 monocyte antigen CD 14 precursor monocyte surface glycoprotein CD14 precursor cdl4 protein precursor CD 14 antigen precursor Monocyte differentiation antigen CD 14 precursor (Myeloid cell-specific
Figure imgf000350_0001
leucine-rich glycoprotein)
Figure imgf000351_0001
Figure imgf000352_0001
Figure imgf000353_0001
Figure imgf000354_0001
Figure imgf000355_0001
Figure imgf000356_0001
dJ8L15.1 (homeodomam-interacting protein kinase 3) Fas-interacting serme/threonine kinase 3 receptor sperm receptor zona peUucida ZP2 zona pellucida ZP2 glycoprotein zona peUucida glycoprotein 2 preproprotein; zona pellucida sperm-binding protein 2 precursor; zona pellucida protein A Zona peUucida sperm-binding protein 2 precursor (Zona peUucida glycoprotein ZP2) (Zona peUucida protein A) speπn-binding glycoprotein ZP2 precursor phosphatase protein phosphatase FYVE dotna -confaihing dual specificity protein phosphatase FYVE-DSPla FYVE domam-containing dual specificity protein phosphatase FYVE-DSPlb FYVE dornam-containing dual specificity protein phosphatase FYVE-DSPlc FYVE domam-containing dual specificity protein phosphatase FYVE-DSP2 myotubularin myotubularin-related protein 2 myotubularin-related protein 3 isoform a; FYVE (Fabl VGL023 Vsp27 EEAl domain) dual-specificity protein phosphatase; zinc finger, FYVE domain containing 10 myotabularin-related protein 3 isoform b; FYVE (Fabl YGL023 Vsρ27 EEAl domain) dual-specificity protein phosphatase; zinc finger, FYVE domain containing 10 myotubularin-related protein 3 isoform c; FYVE (Fabl YGL023 Vsρ27 EEAl domain) dual-specificity protein phosphatase; zinc finger, FYVE domain containing 10 myotubularin related protein 4 myotubularin related protein 4; zinc finger, FYVE domain containing 11 dedicator of cyto-kinesis dedicator of cyto-kinesis 1 Similar to dedicator of cyto-kinesis 1 similar to dedicator of cyto-kinesis 2 [Mus musculus] DOCK180 protein similar to a human major CRK-bmding protein DOCK180. channel sodium channel
Figure imgf000357_0001
voltage-gated sodium channel voltage-gated sodium channel type I Voltage-gated sodium channel alpha 1 subunit voltage-gated sodium channel alpha subunit SCN1 A voltage-gated sodium channel type E alpha subunit Sodium channel protein, brain E alpha subunit sodium channel, voltage-gated, type E, alpha 2; sodium channel, voltage-gated, type E, alpha 2 polypeptide Sodium channel protein, brain El alpha subunit (Voltage-gated sodium ctiannel subtype El) sodium channel alpha chain HBA regulator of G protein signaling regulator of G protein sigraling 12 Regulator of G-protein signaling 12 (RGS12) Regulator of G-protein signaling 14 regulator of G-protein signalling 14; regulation of G protein signaling 14 regulator of G protein signaling RGS14 Similar to regulator of G-protein signaling 14 RGS12TS-S isoform regulator of G protein signaling RGS14-variant regulator of G protein signalling 14 short variant receptor calcitonin receptor Calcitonin receptor precursor (CT-R) calcitonin receptor isoform calcitonin receptor-like protein truncated isomer of calcitonin receptor Calcitonin Receptor, alternatively spUced form Calcitonin gene-related peptide type 1 receptor precursor (CGRP type 1 receptor) CI esterase inhibitor CI -inhibitor CI inhibitor (AA 155-478 ) (1 is 2nd base in codon) plasma protease (CI) inhibitor precursor complement CI inhibitor precursor serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade G (CI inhibitor), member 1 complement component 1 inhibitor precursor; serine (or cysteine) proteinase
Figure imgf000358_0001
inhibitor, clade G (CI inhibitor), member 1 Plasma protease CI inhibitor precursor (CI Inh) (Cllnh) peroxidase glutathione peroxidase extraceUular glutathione peroxidase Epididymal secretory glutathione peroxidase precursor(Epididymis-specific glutathione peroxidase-like protein) (EGLP) similar to EPIDIDYMAL SECRETORY GLUTATHIONE PEROXIDASE PRECURSOR (EPIDIDYMIS-SPECIFIC GLUTATHIONE PEROXIDASE-LIKE PROTEIN) (EGLP) plasma glutathione peroxidase plasma glutathione peroxidase 3 precursor Plasma glutathione peroxidase precursor (GSHPx-P) (ExteaceUular glutathione peroxidase) (GPx-P) glutathione peroxidase type 5 (GPX5) dJ1186N24.2 (glutathione peroxidase 5 (epididymal androgen-related protein)) glutathione peroxidase 5 precursor isoform 1; epididymal androgen-related protein lutathione peroxidase 3, precursor cyclophilin cyclophilin-Uke protein cyclopHHn-Uke protein CyP-60 cyclophilin:ISOTYPE=CyP-60 , peptidylprolyl isomerase (cyclophilin)-like 2 Peptidyl-prolyl cis-trans isomerase Uke 2 (PPIase) (Rotamase) (Cfycloρhilin-60) (Cyclopbilin-like protein Cyp-60) Similar to peptidylprolyl isomerase (cyclophilin)-Uke 2 peptidylprolyl isomerase-like 2 isoform a; cyclophilin-Uke protein CyP-60; peptidylprolyl cis-teans isomerase; cyclophilin, 60kDa peptidylprolyl isomerase-like 2 isoform b; cyclopMlin-like protein CyP-60; peptidylprolyl cis-teans isomerase; cyclophilin, 60kDa hypothetical protein FLJ22662 unnamed protein product hypothetical protein FLJ22662 hypothetical protein LOC196463 similar to RIKEN cDNA 1300012G16 GDP dissociation inhibitor rho GDP dissociation inhibitor (GDI) Rho-GDP-dissociation inhibitor Ly-GDI
Figure imgf000359_0001
rho protein GDP-dissociation inhibitor 1 (FEF 8118) Rho GDP-dissociation inhibitor 1 (Rho GDI 1) (Rho-GDI alpha) Rho GDP dissociation inhibitor (GDI) alpha Rho GDP-dissociation inhibitor 2 (Rho GDI 2) (Rho-GDI beta) (Ly-GDI) Rho GDP dissociation inhibitor (GDI) beta Rho GDP dissociation inhibitor (GDI) beta; Ly-GDI U:(C-D)2.5 keratin keratin type E KKeratin, type E cytoskeletal 5 (Cytokeratin 5) (K5) (CK 5) (58 kDa cytokeratin) keratin 5 (epidermolysis buUosa simplex, DowUng-Meara/Kobner/Weber-Cockayne types) Similar to keratin 5 (epidermolysis buUosa simplex, DowUng-MearaKobner/Weber-Cockayne types) keratin 5; Keratin-5; 58 kda cytokeratin; keratin, type E cytoskeletal 5; cytokeratin 5 keratin_5,-type E, epidermal keratin 5 keratin K5 keratin 6A Similar to keratin 6A keratin 6a, type E Keratin, type E cytoskeletal 6A (Cytokeratin 6A) (CK 6A) (K6A keratin) keratin 6A; Keratin-6A; keratin, epidermal type E, K6A; cytokeratin 6A; 56 cytoskeletal type E keratin keratin 6B keratin 6B; keratin-6B; keratin, epidermal, type E, K6B; keratin, type π cytoskeletal 6B; cytokeratin 6B keratin 6C; keratin, epidermal type II, K6C; cytokeratin 6C; type E keratin isoform K6c Keratin, type E cytoskeletal 6C (Cytokeratin 6C) (CK 6C) (K6C keratin) keratin 6c, type II Keratin, type II cytoskeletal 6E (Cytokeratin 6E) (CK 6E) (K6E keratin) keratin 6 isoform K6e keratin 6f, type H Keratin, type E cytoskeletal 6F (Cytokeratin 6F) (CK 6F) (K6F keratin) U:(C-D)2.64 cyclophilin cyclophilin-40 peptidylprolyl isomerase CyP-40 peptidylprolyl isomerase D (cyclophilin D); hCyP40
Figure imgf000360_0001
peptidyl-prolyl isomerase G (cyclophilin G); Clk-associating RS-cyclophilin 1 ;
Figure imgf000361_0001
Figure imgf000362_0001
ρ70 ribosomal S6 kinase alpha-I Ribosomal protein S6 kinase alpha 1 (S6K-alpha 1) (90 kDa ribosomalprotein S6 kinase 1) (p90-RSK 1) (Ribosomal S6 kinase 1)(RSK-1) (pp90RSKl) p70 ribosomal S6 kinase alpha-II Ribosomal protein S6 kinase alpha 3 (S6K-alpha 3) (90 kDa ribosomal protein S6 kinase 3) (p90-RSK 3) (Ribosomal S6 kinase 2) (RSK-2) (pp90RSK2) (Insuhri-stimulated protein kinase 1) (ISPK-1) p70 ribosomal S6 kinase beta Ribosomal protein S6 kinase beta 2 (S6K-beta 2) (70 kDa ribosomal protein S6 kinase 2) (p70-S6KB) (p70 ribosomal S6 kinase beta) (p70 SβKbeta) (S6K2) (S6 kinase-related kinase) (SRK) (Serme/lhreonine-protein kinase 14 beta) ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 70kDa, polypeptide 1; ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 70kD, polypeptide 1; serine/threonine kinase 14 alpha ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 70kD, polypeptide 2 ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 70kDa, polypeptide 2; ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 70kD, polypeptide 2; p70 ribosomal S6 kinase beta ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 90kD, polypeptide 1 ribosomal protein S6 kmase, 90EDa, polypeptide 1; ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 90kD, polypeptide 1; Ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 90kD, 1 ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 90kDa, polypeptide 3; ribosomal protein S6 kinase, 90kD, polypeptide 3 ribosomal protein S6 kinase, long splice form serme/threonine kinase 14 beta msul -stimulated protein kinase 1 U:(C-IR)2.61 proteinase inhibitor serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor serine proteinase inhibitor serine protease inhibitor 9 serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade B (ovalbumin), member 1 serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade B (ovalbumin), member 1; protease inhibitor 2 (anti-elastase), monocyte/neutrophil; protease inhibitor 2 (anti-elastase), monocyte/neutrophil derived serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade B (ovalbumin), member 3 serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade B (ovalbumin), member 3; squamous ceU carcinoma antigen 1 serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade B (ovalbumin), member 4; protease inhibitor (leucine-serpin); squamous cell carcinoma antigen 2; leupin serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade B (ovalbumin), member 6; protease inhibitor 6 (placental thrombin inhibitor) serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade B (ovalburnin), member 8; protease inhibitor 8 (ovalburnin type) serine (or cysteine) proteinase inhibitor, clade B (ovalburnin), member 9; protease inhibitor 9 (ovalburnin type)
Figure imgf000363_0001
proteinase inhibitor 8
Figure imgf000364_0001
Figure imgf000365_0001
Figure imgf000366_0001
Figure imgf000367_0001
Figure imgf000368_0001
acetylcholinesterase hydrophiUc form precursor Acetylcholinesterase precursor (AChE) acetylcholinesterase precursor, brain spUce form acetylcholinesterase acetylcholinesterase Pi-linked form precursor apoptosis-related acetylcholinesterase neuroUgin 2 similar to neuroUgin 2 [Rattus norvegicus] neuroUgin 4; neuroUgin X neuroUgin X neuroUgin Y NLGN4 protein U:(C-D)2.53 Protease type I integral membrane glycoprotein and aspartic protease APP beta-secretase beta-site APP cleaving enzyme beta-site APP-cleaving enzyme 1 isoform A preproprotein; beta-site amyloid beta A4 precursor protein-cleaving enzyme; APP beta-secretase; aspartyl protease 2; beta-site amyloid precursor protein cleaving enzyme; memapsin-2; membrane-associated aspartic protease 2; transmembrane aspartic proteinase Asp2; beta-secretase beta-site APP-cleaving enzyme 1 isoform B preproprotein; beta-site amyloid beta A4 precursor protein-cleaving enzyme; APP beta-secretase; aspartyl protease 2; beta-site amyloid precursor protein cleaving enzyme; memapsin-2; membrane-associated aspartic protease 2; transmembrane aspartic proteinase Asp2; beta-secretase beta-site APP-cleaving enzyme 1 isoform C preproprotein; beta-site amyloid beta A4 precursor protein-cleaving enzyme; APP beta-secretase; aspartyl protease 2; beta-site amyloid precursor protein cleaving enzyme; memapsin-2; membrane-associated aspartic protease 2; transmembrane aspartic proteinase Asp2; beta-secretase beta-site APP-cleaving enzyme 1 isoform D preproprotein; beta-site amyloid beta A4 precursor protein-cleaving enzyme; APP beta-secretase; aspartyl protease 2; beta-site amyloid precursor protein cleaving enzyme; memapsin-2; membrane-associated aspartic protease 2; teansmembrane aspartic proteinase Asρ2; beta-secretase beta-site APP-cleaving enzyme 2 isoform A preproprotein; beta secretase 2; aspartyl protease 1; membrane-associate aspartic protease 1; memapsin-1; Down syndrome region aspartic protease; 56 kDa aspartic-like protease; beta-site amyloid beta A4 precursor protein-cleaving enzyme 2; teansmembrane aspartic proteinase Aspl Beta secretase 2 precursor (Beta-site APP-cleaving enzyme 2) (Aspartyl protease 1) (Asp 1) (ASP1) (Membrane-associated aspartic protease 1)
Figure imgf000369_0001
(Memaρsin-1)
Figure imgf000370_0001
Figure imgf000371_0001
Figure imgf000372_0001
Figure imgf000373_0001
Figure imgf000374_0001
Subtable 2C: Mixed Mouse Genes/Proteins and Human Protein Classes
Figure imgf000375_0001
References
1. Unger, R.H., Foster, D.W. (1998) Diabetes mellitus. In Williams Textbook of Endocrinology, J.D. Wilson, D.W. Foster, H.M. Kronenberg, and P.R. Larsen, eds. (Philadelphia, W.B. Saunders Company), pp. 973-1059.
2. Polonsky, K.S. (1995) The beta-cell in diabetes: from molecular genetics to clinical research. Diabetes 44:705-717
3. Velho, G. , Froguel, P. (1997) Genetic determinants of non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus: strategies and recent results. Diabete et Metabolisme 23:7-17
4. Groop, L.C., Tuomi, T. (1997) Non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus-a collision between thrifty genes and an affluent society. Ann. Med. 29:37-53. 5. Reaven, G.M. (1988) Role of insulin resistance in human disease. Diabetes 37:1595-1607. 6. Clark, M.G., Rattigan, S., Clark, D.G. (1983) Obesity with insulin resistance: experimental insights. Lancet (ii) 1236-1240. 7. Kissebah, A.H., Vydelingum, N. , Murray, R. , Evans, D.J., Hartz, A.J., Kakloff, R.K., Adams, P.W. (1982) Relation of body fat distribution to metabolic complications of obesity. J Clin. Endo and Metab 54 (2) :254-260.
8. Kissebah, A.H. (1996) Intra-abdominal fat: is it a major factor in developing diabetes and coronary artery disease? Diabetes Res Clin Pract 30 (Suppl) :25-3θ".
9. Friedman, J.M., Leibel, R. (1992) Tackling a weighty problem. Cell 69:217-220
10. Bjorntorp, P. (1991) Metabolic implications of body fat distribution. Diabetes Care 14:1132-1143.
11. Emery, E.M. , Schmid, T.L., Kahn, H.S., Filozof, P.P. (1993) A review of the association between abdominal fat distribution, health outcome measures, and modifiable risk factors. Am J Health Promot 7:342-353. 12. Wickelgren, I. (1998) Obesity: how big a problem? Science 280:1365.
13. Surwit, R.S., Kuhn, CM., Cochrane, C, McCubbin, J.A. , Feinglos, M.N. (1988) Diet-induced type-II diabetes in C57B /6J mice. Diabetes 37:1163-1167. 14. Surwit, R.S., Feinglos, ' M.N. , Rodin, J. , Sutherland, A., Petro, A.E., Opara, E.C., Kuhn, CM., Rebuffe-Scrive, M. (1995) Differential effects of fat and sucrose on the development of obesity and diabetes in C57BL/6J and A/J mice. Metabolism 44 (5) : 645-651.
15. Ahren, B.E., Simonson, E., Scheurink, A.J.W., Mulder, H., Myerson, U. , Sundler, F. (1997) Dissociated insulinotropic sensitivity to glucose and carbachol in high- fat diet-induced insulin resistance in C57BL/6J mice. Metabolism 46(1) : 97-106.
16. Page, R., Morris, C, Williams, J. , von Ruhland, C, Malik,' A.N. (1997) Isolation of diabetes-associated kidney genes using differential display. Biochem Biophys Res Commun 232(1) :49-53 17. Condorelli, G. , Vigliotta, G. , Iavarone, C, Caruso, M., Tocchetti, C.G., Andreozzi, F., Cafieri, A., Tecce, M.F., Formisano, P., Beguinot, L., Beguinot, F. (1998) PED/PEA-15 gene controls glucose transport and is overexpressed in type 2 diabetes mellitus. Embo J 17(14) :3858-66
18. Peraldi, M.N., Berrou, J. , Hagege, J., Rondeau, E., Sraer, J.D. (1998) Subtractive hybridization cloning: an efficient technique to detect overexpressed mRNAs in diabetic nephropathy. Kidney Int 53(4):926-31 19. Song, Y. , Ailenberg, M. , Silverman, M. (1998) Cloning of a novel gene in the human kidney homologous to r-at muncl3s: its potential role in diabetic nephropathy. Kidney Int 53 (6) :1689-95
20. Imagawa, M., Tsughiya, T. , and Nishihara, T. (1999) Identification of inducible genes at the early stage of adipocyte differentiation of 3T3-L1 cells. Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 254:299-305.
21. Nadler, S.T., Stoehr, J.P., Schueler, K.L., Tanimoto, G., Yandell, B.S., Attie, A.D. (2000) The expression of adipogenic genes is decreased in obesity and diabetes mellitus. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 97:11371-11376
22. Lan H, Rabaglia ME, Stoehr JP, Nadler ST, Schueler KL, Zou F, Yandell BS, Attie AD. (2003) Gene expression profiles of nondiabetic and diabetic obese mice suggest a role of hepatic lipogenic capacity in diabetes susceptibility. Diabetes 52:688-700.
Ci tation of documents herein is not intended as an admission that any ,of the documents cited herein is pertinent prior art, or an admission that the cited documents is considered material to the patentabili ty of any of the claims of the present application . All statements as to the date or representation as to the contents of these documents is based on the information available to the applicant and does not consti tute any admission as to the correctness of the dates or contents of these documents . The appended claims are to be trea ted as a non-limi ting reci tation of preferred embodiments. In addi tion to those set forth elsewhere, the following references are hereby incorporated by reference, in their most recent edi tions as of the time of filing of this application : Kay, Phage Display of Peptides and Proteins : A Laboratory Manual ; the John Wiley and Sons Current Protocols series, including Ausubel , Current Pro tocols in Molecular Biology; Coligan, Current Protocols in Protein Science; Coligan, Current Protocols in Immunology; Current Protocols in Human Genetics; Current Protocols in Cytometry; Current
Protocols in Pharmacology; Current Protocols in Neuroscience ; Current Protocols in Cell Biology; Current Protocols in Toxicology; Current Protocols in Field Analytical Chemistry; Current Protocols in Nucleic Acid Chemistry; and Current Protocols in Human Genetics; and the following Cold Spring Harbor Labora tory publications : Sambrook, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual ; Harlow, Antibodies : A Laboratory Manual ; Manipulating the Mouse Embryo : A Laboratory Manual ; Methods in Yeast Genetics : A Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Course Manual ; Drosophila
Protocols; Imaging Neurons : A Laboratory Manual; Early
Development of Xenopus laeyis : A Labora tory Manual ; Using Antibodies : A Laboratory Manual ; At the Bench : A Laboratory Navigator; Cells : A Laboratory Manual ; Methods in Yeast Genetics : A Laboratory Course Manual ; Discovering Neurons : The Experimental Basis of Neuroscience; Genome Analysis : A Laboratory Manual Series ; Laboratory DJNA Science; Strategies for Protein Purification and Characterization : A Laboratory Course Manual ; Genetic Analysis of Pathogenic Bacteria : A Laboratory Manual; PCR Primer: A Laboratory Manual ; Methods in Plant Molecular Biology: A Laboratory Course Manual ; Manipulating the Mouse Embryo : A Laboratory Manual; Molecular Probes of the Nervous System; Experiments wi th Fission Yeast: A Laboratory Course Manual ; A Short
Course in Bacterial Genetics : A Laboratory Manual and Handbook for Escherichia coli and Related Bacteria; DNA Science: A First Course in Recombinant DNA Technology; Methods in Yeast Genetics : A Laboratory Course Manual ; Molecular Biology of Plants: A Laboratory Course Manual . All references ci ted herein, including journal articles or abstracts, published, corresponding, prior or otherwise related U. S. or foreign patent applications, issued U. S. or foreign patents, or any other reference , are entirely incorporated by reference herein, including all data, tables, figures, and text presented in the ci ted references . Addi tionally, the entire contents of the references ci ted wi thin the references ci ted herein are also entirely incorporated by reference . Reference to known method, steps, conventional methods steps, known methods or conventional methods is not in any way an admission that any aspect, description or embodiment of the present invention is disclosed, taught or suggested in the relevant art . The foregoing description of the specific embodiments will 'so fully reveal the general nature of the invention that others can, by applying knowledge wi thin the skill of the art (including the contents of the references cited herein) , readily modify and/ or adapt for various applications such specific embodiments, wi thout undue experimentation, wi thout departing from the general concept of the present invention . Therefore, such adaptations and modifications are intended to be within the meaning and range of equivalents of the disclosed embodiments , based on the teaching and guidance presented herein . It is to be understood that the phraseology or terminology herein is for the purpose of description and not of limi tation, such that the terminology or phraseology of the present specification is to be interpreted by the skilled artisan in light of the teachings and guidance presented herein, in combination wi th the knowledge of one of ordinary skill in the art . Any description of a class or range as being useful or preferred in the practice of the invention shall be deemed a description of any subclass (e. g. , a disclosed class wi th one or more disclosed members omitted) or subrange contained therein, as well as a separate description of each individual member or value in said class or range. The description of preferred embodiments individually shall be deemed a description of any possible combination of such preferred embodiments, except for combinations which are impossible (e.g, mutually exclusive choices for an element of the invention) or -which are expressly excluded by this specification. If an embodiment of this invention is disclosed in the prior art, the description of the invention shall be deemed to include the invention as herein disclosed wi th such embodiment excised.

Claims

1. A method of protecting a human subject from progression from a normoinsulinemic state to a hyperinsulinemic state, or from either to a type II diabetic state, which comprises administering to the subject a protective amount of an agent which is
(1) a polypeptide which is substantially structurally identical or conservatively identical in sequence to a reference protein which is (a) selected from the group consisting of mouse and human proteins set forth in master table 1, subtables IA and IC, or (b) selected from the group consisting of human proteins within at least one of the human protein classes set forth in master table 2, subtables 2A and 2C,
or (2) an expression vector encoding the polypeptide of (1) above and expressible in a human cell, under conditions conducive to expression of the polypeptide of (1) ;
where said agent protects said subject from progression from a normoinsulinemic state to a hyperinsulinemic state, or from either to a type II diabetic state.
2. A method of protecting a human subject from progression from a normoinsulinemic state to a hyperinsulinemic state, or from either to a type II diabetic state which comprises administering to the subject a protective amount of an agent which is
(1) an antagonist of a polypeptide, occurring in said subject, which is substantially structurally identical or conservatively identical in sequence to a reference protein which is (a) selected from the group consisting of mouse and human proteins set forth in master table 1, subtable IB and IC, or (b) selected from the group consisting of human proteins belonging to at least one of the human protein classes set forth, in master table 2, subtables 2B and 2C,
(2) an anti-sense vector which inhibits expression of said polypeptide in said subject,
where said agent protects said subject from progression from a normoinsulinemic state to a hyperinsulinemic state, or from either to a type II diabetic state.
3. A method of screening for human subjects who are prone to progression from a normoinsulinemic state to a hyperinsulinemic state, or from either to a type II diabetic state, which comprises assaying tissue or body fluid samples from said subjects to determine the level of expression of a "favorable" human marker gene, said human marker gene encoding a human protein which is substantially structurally identical or conservatively identical in sequence to a reference protein which is (a) selected from the group consisting of mouse and human proteins set forth in master table 1, subtables IA and IC, or (b) selected from the group consisting of human proteins within at least one of the human protein classes set forth in master table 2, subtables 2A and 2C,
and directly correlating the level of expression of said marker gene with the propensity to progression in said patient .
4. A method of screening for human subjects who have a propensity for progression from a normoinsulinemic state to a hyperinsulinemic state, or from either to a type II diabetic state, which comprises assaying tissue or body fluid samples from said subjects to determine the level of expression of an "unfavorable" human marker gene, said human marker gene encoding a human protein which is substantially structurally identical or conservatively identical in sequence to a reference protein which is (a) selected from the group consisting of mouse and human proteins set forth in master table 1, subtable IB and IC, or (b) selected from the group consisting of human proteins belonging to at least one of the human protein classes set forth in master table 2, subtables 2B and 2C," and inversely correlating the level of expression of said marker gene with the propensity to progression in said pati nt.
5. The method of claims 1 or 3 in which the reference protein is of subtable IA or of a class set forth in subtable 2A.
6. The method of claims 1 or 3 in which the reference protein is of subtable IB or of a class set forth in subtable 2B.
7. The method of any one of claims 1-6 in which (a) applies.
8. The .method of any one of claims 1-7 in which the reference protein is a human protein.
9. The method of any one of claims 1-7 in which the reference protein is a mouse protein.
10. The method of any one of claims 3 or 4 in which the level of expression of the marker protein is ascertained by measuring the level of the corresponding messenger RNA.
11. The method of any one of claims 3 or 4in which the level of expression is ascertained by measuring the level of a protein encoded by said marker gene.
12. The method of any one of claims 1-9 in which said polypeptide is at least 80% identical or at least highly conservatively identical to said reference protein.
13. The method of any one of claims 1-10 in which said polypeptide is at least 90% identical to said reference protein.
14. The method of any one of claims 1-11 in which said polypeptide is identical to said reference protein.
15. The method of any one of claims 1-14 in which the E- value cited for the reference protein in Master Table 1 is not more than e-6.
16. The method of claim 15 in which the E-value cited for the reference protein in Master Table 1 is less than e-10.
17. The method of claim 17 in which the E value calculated by BLASTN or BLASTX would be less than e-15, more preferably less than e-20, still more preferably less than e-40, even more preferably less than e-60, considerably more preferably less than e-80, and most preferably less than e-100.
18. The method of any of claims 2-17 in which the antagonist is an antibody, or an antigen-specific binding fragment of an antibody.
19. The method of any of claims 2-17 in which the antagonist is a peptide, peptoid, nucleic acid, or peptide nucleic acid oligomer.
20. The method of any of claims 2-17 in which the antagonist is an organic molecule with a molecular weight of less than 500 daltons.
21. The method of claim 20 in which said organic molecule is identifiable as a molecule which binds said polypeptide by screening a combinatorial library.
PCT/US2004/036760 2003-11-06 2004-11-05 Diagnosis and hyperinsulinemia and type ii diabetes and protection against same based on genes differentially expressed in pancreas cells (12.1) WO2005046718A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US51737603P 2003-11-06 2003-11-06
US60/517,376 2003-11-06
US57923204P 2004-06-15 2004-06-15
US60/579,232 2004-06-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005046718A1 true WO2005046718A1 (en) 2005-05-26

Family

ID=34594863

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/036760 WO2005046718A1 (en) 2003-11-06 2004-11-05 Diagnosis and hyperinsulinemia and type ii diabetes and protection against same based on genes differentially expressed in pancreas cells (12.1)

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2005046718A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2938921A1 (en) * 2008-11-21 2010-05-28 Hospices Civils Lyon In vitro determination of the expression level of cyclophilin D in a biological sample comprises measuring the expression level of cyclophilin D in the biological sample and comparing the expression level to the reference sample
WO2012000058A1 (en) * 2010-07-02 2012-01-05 Newsouth Innovations Pty Limited Inheritance of metabolic dysfunction
WO2018086126A1 (en) * 2016-11-14 2018-05-17 高雄医学大学 Method for detecting whether glucose metabolism is abnormal, and prevention and treatment therefor

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1999006059A2 (en) * 1997-07-30 1999-02-11 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Methods and compositions relating to no-mediated cytotoxicity

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1999006059A2 (en) * 1997-07-30 1999-02-11 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Methods and compositions relating to no-mediated cytotoxicity

Non-Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
BERNAL-MIZRACHI, E. ET AL.: "Gene expression profiling in islet biology and diabetes reseach", DIABETES/METABOLISM RESEARCH AND REVIEWS, vol. 19, no. 1, February 2003 (2003-02-01), pages 32 - 42, XP008045358 *
COROMINOLA, H. ET AL.: "Identification of Novel Genes Differentially Expressed in Omental Fat of Obese Subjects and Obese Type 2 Diabetic Patients", DIABETES, vol. 50, no. 12, December 2001 (2001-12-01), pages 2822 - 2830, XP002293068 *
LIM, H.W. ET AL.: "Identification of differentially expressed mRNA during pancreas regeneration of rat by mRNA differential display", BIOCHEMICAL AND BIOPHYSICAL RESEARCH COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 299, no. 5, 20 December 2002 (2002-12-20), pages 806 - 812, XP002324520 *
ROBERTSON, R.P. ET AL.: "Glucose Toxicity in beta-Cells: Type 2 Diabetes, Good Radicals Gone Bad, and the Glutathione Connection", DIABETES, vol. 52, no. 3, March 2003 (2003-03-01), pages 581 - 587, XP002324519 *
WINZELL, M.S. ET AL.: "Downregulation of islet hormone-sensitive lipase during long-term high-fat feeding", BIOCHEMICAL AND BIOPHYSICAL RESEARCH COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 304, no. 2, 2 May 2003 (2003-05-02), pages 273 - 278, XP002324521 *

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2938921A1 (en) * 2008-11-21 2010-05-28 Hospices Civils Lyon In vitro determination of the expression level of cyclophilin D in a biological sample comprises measuring the expression level of cyclophilin D in the biological sample and comparing the expression level to the reference sample
WO2012000058A1 (en) * 2010-07-02 2012-01-05 Newsouth Innovations Pty Limited Inheritance of metabolic dysfunction
WO2018086126A1 (en) * 2016-11-14 2018-05-17 高雄医学大学 Method for detecting whether glucose metabolism is abnormal, and prevention and treatment therefor
CN110168098A (en) * 2016-11-14 2019-08-23 高雄医学大学 A kind of method and its prevention and treatment detecting abnormal carbohydrate metabolism

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7186694B2 (en) Leptin-related peptides
WO2005082398A2 (en) Diagnosis of hyperinsulinemia and type ii diabetes and protection against same based on genes differentially expressed in muscle cells
US20070111933A1 (en) Diagnosis and treatment methods related to aging, especially of liver
WO2006023121A1 (en) Diagnosis of hyperinsulinemia and type ii diabetes and protection against same based on genes differentially expressed in white adipose tissue (13)
WO2000023100A2 (en) Genes and proteins predictive and therapeutic for renal disease and associated disorders
WO2005079840A2 (en) Use of secreted protein products for preventing and treating pancreatic diseases and/or obesity and/or metabolic syndrome
US20070142311A1 (en) Diagnosis of hyperinsulinemia and type II diabetes and protection against same
WO2005046718A1 (en) Diagnosis and hyperinsulinemia and type ii diabetes and protection against same based on genes differentially expressed in pancreas cells (12.1)
WO2005110460A2 (en) Diagnosis and treatment methods related to aging, especially in muscle (14.1)
US20090016963A1 (en) Genes involved in neurodegenerative conditions
EP1644406B1 (en) Use of dg153 secreted protein products for preventing and treating pancreatic diseases and/or obesity and/or metabolic syndrome
US20060240500A1 (en) Diagnosis of kidney damage and protection against same
WO2004092419A2 (en) Diagnosis of hyperinsulinemia and type ii diabetes and protection against same (i)
WO2005005668A2 (en) Diagnosis and treatment methods related to aging (8a)
US20030228677A1 (en) AMID protein, nucleic acid molecules, and uses thereof
US20080107639A1 (en) Use of a Dg147 Protein Product for Preventing and Treating Metabolic Disorders
WO2004012758A1 (en) Use of tgf beta ig-h3 for preventing and treating obesity, diabetes and/or metabolic syndrome
US20070050856A1 (en) Use of protein products for preventing and treating pancreatic diseases and/or obesity and/or metabolic syndrome

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase